Skip to main content

Full text of "Manual of military engineering"

See other formats


MILITARY    BOOKS. 


PRINTED   FOR  HIS  MAJESTY'S   STATIONERY  OFFICE. 


Aud  to  be  purchased,  either  directly  or  through  any  Bookseller,  i 
WYMAN  AND  SONS,  Ltd.,  Fetter  Lane,  E.C,  ;   or 
OLIVIER  AND  BOYD,  Edixbukgh  ;  or 
E.  PONSONBY,  116,  Gkaftox  Street.  Dublin. 


ARMY  REGULATIONS:— 

PAY,  APPOINTMENT,  PROMOTION,  AND  NON-EFFECTIVE 

PAY  OF  TfTE  AEMY.     RovalWarrant.     1900.    Price  Is  (Out  of  print.) 

ALLOWANCES   OF  THE  ARMY.     Regns.    1003.     Price  Is. 
CLOTHING    OF    THE   ARMY.     Regms.     Pait   I.     Eegular  Forces. 

1904.     Price  Is.     Part  II.     Militia.     1904.     Price  6d. 
DRESS  REGNS.  FOR  OFFICERS  OF  THE  ARMY  (including  the 

Militia).     1904.    Price  a?.  6d.  " 

EaniPMENT  OF  THE  ARMY.  Regns.  Part  1.  1902.  Price  I5. 
Part  2.  Details :— Sections— I.  Infantry.  1904.  Price  id.  II.  Cavalry.  1905. 
Price  6d.  III.  Army  Service  Corps.  1904.  Price  3d.  IV.  and  IVa.  Army 
Ordnance  Corps.  Army  Pay  Corps.  1904.  Price  2d.  V.  Army  Medical 
Corps.  1903.  Price  2d.  VI.-IX.  Colleges  and  Prisons.  1898.  Price  2(f. 
VIIC.  Training  Schools  Depot,  B.A.M.C.  1902.  Price  2d.  X.  Engineers. 
1902.  Price  6d.  XI.  (a)  Horse  Artillery,  with  B.L.  12-pr.  6  cwt.  1904. 
Price  Qi.  (b)  Field  Artillery,  -with  Q.F.  IS-pr.  1904.  Price  6d.  (c)  Field 
Artillery,  with  B.L.  15-pr.  1904.  Price  6i.  (d)  Field  Artillery,  with  B.L. 
5-inch  Howitzer.  1904.  Price  Qd.  (e)  Horse  and  Field  Artillery  Staff  and 
Dep6ts,  with  12-pr.  6  cwt.  and  B.L.  15-pr.  1904.  Price  6c?.  Xlla.  Garrison 
Artillery.  Price  2s.  <od.  XIIc.  Heavy  Artillery  Brigade.  1905.  Price  &d. 
XIII.  Staff  Units  in  Time  of  War.  Price  2d.  XIV.  and  XV.  Eemount  Depot 
at  Base.  Mounted  and  Dismounted  Company  of  Signallers  in  Time  of  War. 
1904.  Price  2d.  XVI.  Militia.  1905.  ^rice  6d.  XVII.  Yeomanry.  1903. 
Price  Qd.  XVIII.  Volunteers.  1905.  Price  6rf. 
EaUiPMENT.  INSTRUCTIONS       FOR       FITTING       AND 

WEARIXG    BANDOLIER,  Patte-n  ] 90.3.     Price  2^;. 
KING'S  REGNS.  AND  ORDERS  FOR  THE  ARMY.     Proyi.sional 

Edition.    1904.     Price  1.?.  (od. 
MILITIA   REGNS.     (Provisional.)     1904.     Price  Is. 
ORDNANCE  COLLEGE  REGNS.     1904.     Price  Is.  6d. 
ORDNANCE  SERVICES.      ARMY.     Reg-ns.     (Provisional.)     1904. 

RECRTJITING  FOR  THE  REGULAR  ARMY,  MILITIA,  AND 

I -vrPERIAL  YEOMANRY.     Regns.  for.     190::;.     Price  6'i. 
VETERINARY  SERVICES.     ARMY.     Reg-ns.    1900.     Price  6d. 
ARMY  SERVICE  CORPS:— 

TRAINING.     rProvisional.)     1903.     Price  1«. 
STANDING  ORDERS.     1895.     Price  Is.  6d. 
SUPPLY.     HANDBOOK  FOR.     Price  Is,  6d. 
ARMY  ORDERS.      General   Orders,   Reg-ulations,  and  Instructions 

promulL'ated  to  the  Army.     Monthly.    Price  3'.?.    Covers  for  ditto.    Price  sV. 
WAR  OFFICE  LIST.     1903.    Sold  by  Harrison  4-  Sons,  59,  Pall  Mall,  S.  W. 

Pric  .->s.  ?!?'. 

ARMOURERS.      Instructions  for.     1904.     Price  Is.  Bd. 
CAVALRY  TRAINING.     (Provisional.)     1904.     Price  1*-. 
YEOMANRY.    IMPERIAL.   TRAINING.    1905.   Inptmctions.   Price  li. 
Do.  Do.  REGULATIONS.     1903.    Price  Is. 

OVt.  11464    35,000    9  |  05— II  &  S     5l'^'.t) 


MILITARY  BOOKS,  published  by  ^M^.^ority— continued. 

BICYCLES.     Care  and  Preservation  of.     1905.     Price  Id. 
CYCIilST  TRAINING.     (Provisional.)     1902.     Price  2fZ. 
ARTILLERY  TRAINING  :- 
FIELD.     1904.     Price  Is. 
GARRISON.     Vol.    I.     1902.      Price  6c?.       Vol.    II.      1904.      Price  6(f. 

(Proviiional.)    Vol.  III.     1905.    Price  Is. 
HEAVY.    (Provisional.)    1904.     Price  6d 
SIEGE      1901.     Price  9d 
ARTILLERY.     FIELD.      Tactics  of.     1897.     Price  Is. 
ARTILLERY.     MUSEUM.      In  the  Rotunda,  Woolwicli.     Catalogue 

of.     1889.    Price  Is.  9rf. 
ARTILLERY  KIT  PLATES.     Nos.  1  to  10.     Price  2J.  each. 
ARTILLERY  AND  RIFLE  RANGES  ACT,  1865.     Bye-laws  made  by 
Her  Majestj^'s  Principal   Secretary  of    State  for  the  War  Department,  with  the 
consent  of  the  Board  of  Trade.    8vo.     Price  \d.  each  :— 
Aldeburgh.    Ash,  Aldershot  Camp.      Hj'the.     Inchkeith  Battery.     Kinf^hornes?. 
Landguard.    Finborough.    Lydd.    Middlewick.    Millbrook.    Orchard  Portman 
(1897).    Paull  Point  Battery,  Salisbury  Plain  (price  Mi.).    Scarborouf(li  (189.^). 
Scarborough   Artillery    (1902).       Scraps    Gate.      Shoeburyness.      Southwold, 
Strensall.     Warden  Point  Battery  and  Hurst  Castle.     Wash.     Whitehaven 
Batt«ry.  Cumberland. 
ARTILLEAY.     ROYAL  REGIMENT  OF.     Standing  Orders  of  the. 

Nove.-nbpr,  1893.    Price  2s. 
ARTILLERY  STORE  ACCOUNTS.     Notes  on.    Price  6c?. 
ELECTRICITY.     Notes  on.     For  the  use  of  the  Garrison  Artillery.     By 

Lt.-Col.  .1.  R.  J.  JoCKLYW,  R.A.     Price  Is.  U. 
ENGINEER  SERVICES.     Regns.  for.     1900.     Price  Is.  6c?. 
ENGINEERING.     MILITARY.      Instrviction    in.      Compiled    at    the 
School  of  Military  Engineering,  Chatham.    Svo.    Cloth. 

Part  1.— Field  Defences.     Seventh  Edition.    1902.     Price  Is.  6cZ. 

Part  2.— Attack  of  Fortresses.     Fifth  Edition.     1896.     Price  Is.  .3q!. 

Part  3.— Military  Bridging  and  Use  of  Spars.    Fourth  Edition.    Corrected  to 

January,  1902.    Price  Is.  6rf. 
Part  4.— Mining  and  Demolition.    Fifth  Edition.    1901.    Price  Is.  6rf. 
Part  5.— Miicellaneous.    Fifth  Edition.    Price  Is.  M. 
Part  6.— Military  Railways.     Price  4<r. 
ENGINEERING.  "MILITARY.   Manual.    (Provisional.^   1903.   Price  Is. 
ENGINEERS.     FIELD.     DriU.     1899.     Price  2s. 

ESTABLISHMENTS.  WAR.    Sees.  1  to  4,  6,  and  7.    1905.    Price  \d.  each. 
EXPLOSIVES.     SERVICe.     Treatise  on.     1900.     Price  Is.  6cf. 
FIELD  SERVICE  REGULATIONS  :— 

Part  I— COMBINED  TRAINING.     1905.     Price  Is. 
Part  II.— "WAR  ADMINISTRATION.     1905.  {Jn  vrepnration.^ 

FIELD     SKETCHING    AND     RECONNAISSANCE.      Manual    of. 

Price  Is.  6a:. 
FORTIFICATION      AND      MILITARY      ENGINEERING.       Text 

Book.     Part  II.     (1894.^    Price  6s. 
HORSE  AND  STABLE  MANAGEMENT.     Manual.     1904.     Pricp  Ad. 
HYDRAULICS   FOR    GARRISON   ARTILLERY.      Manual.      18j5. 

Pricei  4.*.  (V/. 

INFANTRY.     Drum  and  Flute  Duty.     1887.     Price  2s. 
INFANTRY  TRAINING.     1905.     Price  Is. 

INFANTRY.   MOUNTED.    TRAINING.    1904.   (Pro^/i^^ional.)   Price  6 J. 
INTELLIGENCE    DUTIES  IN    THE   FIELD.      Regrns.  for.      1901. 

Price  '2d. 
RIFLE  RANGES.     Miniature  and  Safety.     Instructions  for.     Price  3c?. 

Do.  Do.  Care  and  Construction  of.       Do.        Price  Sd. 

MILITIA.     Regns.  for.     1904.     (Provisional.)    Price  Is. 
MUSKETRY   REGNS.     1905.     Price  Is. 

MUSKETRY  EXERCISES.     (Provisional.)     1904.     Price  3d. 
ORDNANCE  CORPS.     ARMY.     Standin^^  Orders.     190'^.     Price  6d. 
ORDNANCE  SERVICES.     ARMY.     P.eg-r'?.  for.     IS.^02.     Price  Is. 
ORDNANCE.     SERVICE.     Treatise  on.     6th  Edition.     1904.     Price  10s. 


MlLITAItV  BOOKS,  f'tiblixhed  by  AuthoriUj—cowWnn^A. 
PROJECTION.      -Linear  Perspective.       Text   Book  for   R.M.   Academy. 

Ill  two  pfirts.     Price  H.c. 
RAILWAYS  DURING  THE  WAR  IN  SOUTH  AFRICA,  18t  9-1902. 

Price  4.*. 
VOLUNTEER  CORPS.     Purchase  of  Land  by.     1803.     Price  Id. 
VOLUNTEER  FORCE.      Regns.   for.      19ul.      Amended  to  July,   1904. 

Price  Is. 

VOLUNTEERS    IN    BRIGADE    AND     REGIMENTAL     CAMPS, 

Oli    WHEN     ENCAMPED     WITH    THE     REGULAR    FOKCES.       Orders    and 
Instructions  for.     Revised  M;-.v,  \%^2.     Price  \d. 
STEAM  ENGINES  AND  BOILERS.    Notes  on  the  Management  of. 

l-^^fl.     Price  1(Z. 
DERRICKS,  SHEERS,  AND   HOiDFASTS.     1898.     Price  9rf. 
TRUMPET    AND     BUGLE     SOUNDS     FOR     THE     ARMY.      1903. 

Price  Is. 
GUNNERY.     Text  Book  of.     1902.     Price  3«. 
GUNNERY  TABLES.      Collected  and  Compiled  by  Major  G.  Mackixlay, 

R  A.,  for  the  Text  Book  of  Gunnery,  1887.     48  pp.     Price  2s.  CcZ. 
GUNS.     Handbooks  for,  viz.  :— 

«1-PR.    R.M.L.    of  64  cwt.    (Marks  I.,  II.,  III.)    Land  Service. 
1900.     Price  Is.  M. 
,,  Converted,  of  58  and  71  cwt.    1902.     Price  9 d 

,,  of  32  and  35  cwt.     1899.     Price  U.    ' 

R.B.L.    of  16  cwt.,  on  Travelling:  Carriag-e.      (Movable 
Armament  and  Volunteer  Batteries  of  Position.)     1898.    Price  Is. 
16-PR.    R.M.L.    of  12  cwt.     1903.     Price  Is. 

B.L.     (Mark  I.)     (Field  Batteries.)     1904.     Price  1«. 
,,        (Marks  II.— IV.)  and  Carriage  Wagon  and  Limber. 
(iMark  IV.)    Field  Batteries.     1004.     Price  Is.  ^d. 
R.M.L,    of  8  cwt.     (Movable  Armament.)     1900.     Price  \s. 
a.F.       (Movable  Armament.)     1903.     Price  9(/. 
of  12  cwt.    A.Q.F.    (Land  Service.)     1903.     Price  Is.  6d. 
B.L.    (Marks  I.— IV.)  of  6  cwt.,  and  Carr     ^es  (Marks  I.* 

and  II.).     Horse  Artillery.     1905.    Pricr 
Jointed    B.L.     (Mule  Equipment.)     1904.  .  Is. 

Hotcbkiss.     a.F.     (Land  Service.)    190'  :e  M. 

(Land  Service.)    19<  o       ..   je  Gc?. 
(Land  Service.)     I  rice  Is. 
1903.     Price  9rf. 

(Marks  I.  and  II.)      Laud  Service.     1904. 
Price  Is.  6rf. 
12-inch    B.L.    (Laud  Service.)    1904.     Price  25. 
10-inch    R'.M.L.     1903.     Price  1«.  6d. 
10-inch    B.L.     (Laud  Service.)    ]904.     Price  2«. 
9'2-inch     (Land  Service.)     1902.     Price  2s.  ^d. 

8-inch     R.M.L.    Howitzer  of  70  cwt.      For  Movable  Armaments  and 
Armaments  of  Works.    Land  Service.    1901.    Price  2s. 
Q,.F.     (Land  Service.)     1903.    Price  Is. 
B.L.  and  B.L.C.    Land  Service.     1904.     Price  Is.  6rf. 
B.L.   Howitzer  of  30  cwt.    (Mark  I.)    1904.     Price  Is. 
,,      Howitzer  of  26  cwt.     (Mark  I.)     Price  3s. 
5-4-inch    B.L.     Howitzer.     (Mark  I.)    1902.     Price  Is.  6(7. 
5-inch  B.L.  Howitzer.     1903.     Price  Is. 

5-inch      ,,      (Marks  I.— V.)      (Land  Service.)     1904.     Pr>e  9c/. 
4-7-inch    a.F.    (Fixed  Armaments.)     Land  Service.     1904.     Price  Is. 
4-7-inch     Q.F.B.     (Mark    IV.*)   on   Travelling   Carriage.       Land 

Service.     1904.     Price  Is. 
4-inch   B.L.    (Marks  V.  and  VI.)     (Land  Service.)    1904.    Price  Is. 
2-9!i-inch    Q.JT.    Mountain   Gun.       (Mark  I.)      Mule  Equipment. 

1901.     Price  'M. 
0-303-inch    and    -SOS-inch     Converted    Maxim    Ma      ine    Gun. 
(Magazine  Rifle  Chamber.)     1903.     Price  \s. 


64-PR. 
40-PR. 
20-PR. 


15-F«. 
15-PR. 

13-PR. 
121-PR. 
12-PR. 
12-PR. 

10-PR. 

6-PR. 

3-PR.     Hotchkiss.     a.F. 

6-PR.    Nordenfelt.     a.F. 

3-PR.     Nordenfelt.     a.F. 

12-5-inch   K.M.L.  38  ton. 


6-inch 
6-inch 
6-inch 
6-inch 


[All  Rights  Reserved. 
40 


W.O. 


MANUAL 


OF 


MILITAET    EMlNEEIll]\Tx 


GENERAL   ST^FF,   AVAR  OFFICE. 


LONDON : 

FEINTED  FOR  HIS  MAJESTY'S  STATIONERY  OFFICE, 

BY  HAEEISON  AND  SONS,  ST.  IMAETIN'S  LANE, 

PEIITTEES   TS  OEDINAET   TO    HIS   MAJESTY. 


And  to  be  purcliased,  either  directly  or  through  any  Bootsellei',  fronx 
WYMAN  AND  SONS,  Ltd.,  Fetter  Lane,  E.G. ;  or 

OLIYER  AND  BOYD,  EDi>-BTTEaH ;  or 
^  E.  PONSONBY,  116,  Geaftox  Sireet,  Dublin. 

1905. 
Price  One  Shillin'j. 


4 


2 


dt,^^ 


?< 


a. 


'•-"'V^^     sXyJ\j^.    L\^ 


/       ^     y 


r^ 


(^w^   35.000  nf^-R^mi^^_^  ^,  ^.,^  ^ 


'^^-^    ^'T^  ManuaMs  issued  by  comnandoTSSe^my  Council 
for  the  guidance  of  all  concerned. 


--ico^fUzM^ 


War  Office, 

8/A  August,  1905. 


(5289)  A  2 


CONTENTS 


Chapter. 


Subject. 


Page. 


I. 

IT. 

ITT. 

IT. 

y. 

YI. 

YIL 

VIII. 

IX. 

X. 

XI. 

XII. 

XIII. 

XIV. 

XV. 

XVI. 

XVII. 


XVIII. 

XIX. 

XX. 


XXI. 

XXTI. 
XXIII. 


PAET    I. 
Peeltaitnabt 

ElELD    GeOMETUT      .  . 
lNTRE>^CHiyG^   T03LS 

WoEKiNG    Parties    and    Execution    of    In- 

trench5ients 
Materials     . . 
Retetiments  . . 
Clearing  the  Foreground 
Improvement  of  existing  Coyer,  Stockades, 

&c.  .. 
Earthworks.  . 
Obstacles 

Defence  of  Posts,  Villages  and  Camps 
Temporary  Eoads  .... 
Knotting  AND  Lashings.. 
Military  Bridges.  . 
Camping  Arrangements.. 
Hasty  Demolitions  with  Explosives., 

„       Demolition   of   Railways    and    Tele- 
graphs without  Explosives 


PART    II. 

Strength  of  Materials  and  Buoyancy 
Blocks  and  Tackles — Use  of  Spaiis  .. 
Erame    and    Cantilever    Bridges,    Framed 

Trestles,   Suspension   Bridges,  and   Cask 

Piers 
Demolition   Eoemulje   and   Working  Party 

Table,  &c. 
Roads— Boning  and  Levelling 
Railways  and  Telegraphs 

G-LOSSARY    OF   TeRMS 

Index 


5 
10 
12 

14 
17 
23 
25 

26 
31 
41 
44 
51 
52 
55 
68 
78 

96 


101 
107 


109 

lis 

]2S 
l;{7 
]40 


MMUAL    OF    MILITARY    ENGINEERING. 


(^Tliis  book  is  divided  into  two  parts.  Officers  should  he 
ihoroughly  acquainted  with  the  matter  dealt  icith  in  Fart  I. 
Part  II  contains  information  useful  for  reference. 

The  types  of  the  various  works  described  will  vary  according  to 
the  conditions  of  time,  labour,  and  material. 

Officers  and  Non-commissioned  Officers  in  charge  of  luorks 
should,  while  bearing  the  principles  in  mind,  learn  to  modify  the 
types  according  to  local  conditions.') 


CHAPTER   I.— PRELIMINARY. 

{See  also  "  Combined  Training,"  1905,  Section  123,  and 
following  sections.) 

1.  The  object  of  fortification  is  to  strengthen  ground,  and  by  Objects  o! 
thus  economising  the  numbers  of  the  defenders,  to  swell  the  fortifica- 
force    available    for    offensive    movements,    by    which   alone  ^^°^' 
decisive   results   can  be  obtained.     This  object  is  secured  by 
fulfilling,  as  far  as  possible,  the  following  conditions  : — 

(a)  The  position  to  be  defended  must  be  chosen  with  due  General 
regard   to   tactical   requirements,    and   with  a  view  P^iiiciples. 
to  economising  men  ;    its  strong    and   weak    points 
must  be  carefully  studied. 
(6)  The  enemy  in  attacking  should  be  exposed  as  much 
as  possible  to  the  fire  of  the  defenders  during  the 
advance.     To  this  end  the  foreground  may  require 
more  or  less  clearing, 
(c)  Every  endeavour  must  be  made  to  deceive  the  enemy 
as  to  the  strength  and  dispositions  of  the  troops  in 
the  defence,  and  as  to  the  character  of  the  defensive 
works. 


6  CHAPTER   I. — PRELIMINARY. 

(d)  The  defenders  should  be  sheltered  from  the  enemy's 

fire,  and  as  far  as  possible  screened  from  liis  view, 
by  natural  or  artificial  cover,  so  arranged  as  to  permit 
the  greatest  possible  development  of  rifle  fire. 

(e)  The  free  movement  of  the  attacking  troops  should 

be  hindered  by  leaving  or  creating  obstacles  to  detain 
them  under  fire  or  to  break  their  order  of  attack. 

(/)  The  free  movement  of  the  defenders  should  be  assisted 
by  improving  communications  within  their  position, 
and  clearing  the  way  for  counter  attack. 

Shortly  stated  these  principles  in  order  of  importance  are : — 

(a)  Choice  of  ground. 

(b)  Clearance  of  foreground, 

(c)  Concealment. 

{d)  Provision  of  cover. 

(e)  Creation  of  obstacles. 

(/)  Improvement  of  communications. 

The  above  are  dealt  with  in  detail  in  subsequent  chapters. 

2.  A  thorough  knowledge  of  the  fire  effect  of  all  arms  is 
necessary,  in  order  to  design  good  defence  Avorks, 

Rifle  fire,  3,  Modern  military  rifles  are  sighted  to  about  2,800  yards. 
The  slope  of  descent  of  the  bullet  varies  from  about  -^^  at 
1,000  yards  to  ^  at  2,800  yards. 

Height  oi:       The   heights   over  which   an  average  man  can  fire  on  level 
line  of        ground  are  : — 

^^^'  Lying  down 1'  0'' 

Kneeling  3'  0^' 

Standing  4'  3'^  to  4'  <6" 

These  heights  must  be  adjusted  to  suit  different  men  ana 
varying  inclinations  of  ground. 


CHAPTER   I. — PRELIMINARY. 


4.  The  following  table  gives  the  thickness  in  various  materials- 
proof  against  modern  rifle  bullets  at  foint  blank  range  : — 


Material. 

Thickness 
proof. 

Remarks. 

Clay 

5  ft. 

Varies  greatly.  This  is  maxi- 
mum for  greas7  clay. 

Earth,    free    from     stones 

3  ft. 

Ramming   earth   reduces   its 

(unrammed) 

resisting  power. 

Sand            

2  ft.  6  ins. 

Rather  more  than  enough. 
Very  high  velocity  buUets 
have  less  penetration  in 
sand     at    short     than     at 

medium  ranges. 

Sand  between  boar Js 

IS  ins. 

Brickwork  . .          . .          . . 

9  ins. 

If  well  built. 

Soft  wood,  e.g.,   fir,  across 

48  ins. 

24  ins.  proof  at  500  yds. 

grain 

Hard  wocd,  e.g.,  oak,  across 

27  ins. 

15  ins.  proof  at  500  yds. 

grain 

Wrought  iron  or  mild  steel 

Jin. 

Hardened  steel  plate 

iin. 

yV  in.  proof  at  600  yds. 

Special  hard  steel  .. 

4  in. 

Shingle        .. 

6  ins. 

Coal 

15  ins. 

Snow 

About  8  ft. 

5.  The  usual  projectiles  for  field  artillery  are  shrapnel  from  Field 
field  guns,  and  shrapnel  and  common  shell  filled  with  higr  artillerj. 
explosive  from  field  howitzers. 

Shrapnel  can  be  used  from  field  guns  at  ranges  up  to  about 
6,000  yards. 

The  slope  of  descent  of  the  projectiles  of  field  guns  varies 
from  ^  at  1,500  yards  to  J  at  4,000  yards,  but  howitzer 
projectiles  have  angles  of  descent  up  to  \. 

6.  The  penetration  of  shrapnel  balls  is  considerablv  less  Penetra- 
than  that  of  small-bore  rifle  bullets,  but  shrapnel  with  percussion  tion  of 
fuzes  can  be  used  with  considerable  effect  against  troops  behind  ^^^\1^^^.^' 
waUs.  projectiles. 

Several  foreign  nations  have  introduced  common  shell  filled 
with  some  high  explosive  for  use  with  field  guns.  The  special 
feature  of  such  shell  is  that,  on  bursting,  they  break  up  into  a 


s 


CHAPTER   I. — PRELIMINARY. 


Field 
lio\\  il  zerp. 


Heavy 
gnis. 


Modern 
aitilleiy. 


Ranges. 


very  large  number  of  fragments  wHch  are  driven  in  all 
directions.     They  are  not  so  effective  as  well  burst  shrapnel. 

7.  Field  howitzers,  firing  common  shell  and  shrapnel,  have 
now  been  introduced  into  the  service  of  most  nations.  They 
are  light  pieces  of  artillery,  firing  comparatively  heavy  shell, 
with  low  charges  at  high  elevation,  and  in  consequence  possess 
gocd  searching  power* 

No  practicable  amount  of  extemporised  cover,  except  as 
in  Sec.  73,  will  keep  out  a  howitzer  common  shell.  The  effect 
of  the  burst  is  very  powerful,  not  merely  from  the  fragments 
of  the  shell,  but  also  from  the  blast  and  the  fumes  of  the 
explosive  ;  but  this  effect  is  very  local,  and  slight  cover  will 
suffice  against  the  splinters. 

80  Heavy  guns  up  to  6-inch  have  been  used  in  the  field 
and  will  probably  be  met  with  in  future.  They  are  long- 
ranging,  but  their  searching  power  is  little  greater  than  that  of 
field  guns. 

9.  The  object  of  modern  artillery  is  to  reach  the  defenders 
of  a  parapet  by  means  of  fragments  of  projectiles  burst  in  the 
right  position,  and  not  by  breeching  the  parapet  with  the  pro- 
jectile itself.  An  occasional  sheU  may  strike  and  penetrate 
the  parapet,  but  in  the  case  of  a  shrapnel  shell  the  damage 
to  the  parapet  wiU  be  trifling,  while  in  the  case  of  a  howitzer 
shell  filled  with  high  explosive,  the  effect  will  be  no  worse 
on  a  thin  parapet  than  on  a  thick  one.  Thus  it  is  useless  to 
spend  time  and  labour  on  making  a  thick  parapet  to  keep 
out  the  actual  shell.  Against  such  fire,  concealment  is  of 
greatest  importance. 

Plate  1  gives  some  idea  of  the  effect  of  bursting  shells. 

10.  The  following  table  (taken  from  "  Combined  Training," 
1905)  gives  the  various  ranges  of  the  different  weapons  : — 


Terms  applied  to 
ranges. 

Rifle. 

Field 
Artillery. 

Keavy 

Artillery. 

Distant 
Long 

Effective      . . 
Decisive 

Yards. 

2,800-2,000 
2,000-1,400 

1,400-eoo 

coo  and 
under. 

Yards. 

6,000-4,500 

4,500-3,500 

3,500-2,000 

2,000  and 

under. 

Yards. 

10,000-6,000 

6,000-4,000 

4,000-2,500 

2,500  and 

under. 

riai^,   /. 


Veiier&Sr^hflm.  LJ*  Li itio. London." 

Opposite  pou^e  S. 


CHAPTER   I. — PRELIMINARY.  9 

The  extreme  width  of  the  area  of  ground  struck  by  the 
bullets  of  an  effective  shrapnel  is  about  25  yards. 

The  limit  of  the  forward  effect  of  shrapnel  at  effective  range 
is  about  300  yards. 

The   radius    of   the  explosion  of   a  high  explosive  shell  is 
about  25  yards. 

11.  The  follo^ving  terms  are  used  with  reference  to  artillery  Matures 
and  rifle  fire  :—  of  ^ire- 

High  Angle  Fire. — Fire  from  guns   and  howitzers   at  all 

angles    of    elevation    exceeding    25°. 
Frontal  Fire. — When  the  line  of  fire  is  perpendicular  to  the 

front  of  the  target. 
Oblique  Fire. — AVhen  the  line  of  fire  is  inclined  to  the  front 

of  the  target. 
Enfilade  Fire. — Fire   which  sweeps   a   line  of   troops   or 

defences  from  a  flank. 
Reverse  Fire. — When  the  rear  instead  of  the  front  of  the 
target  is  fired  at. 


10 

CHAPTER   II.— FIELD   GEOMETRY. 

12.    Before    proceeding   to   the    more    technical  portion  of 
military  engineering,  it  is  as  well  to  understand  some  of  the 
simplest  applications  of  geometry  to  the  laying  out  of  field 
defences. 
Slopes.  Slopes   are   usually   described  by   fractions,   in   which  the 

numerator  expresses  the  height,  and  the  denominator  the  base 
of  the  slope. 

Thus,  in  Fig.  2,  Pi.  2,  the  vertical  height,  B  C,  is  jr  of  the 
horizontal  distance,  A  B.  The  slope  A  C  would,  therefore,  be 
called  a  slope  of  ^  (verbally,  one  in  six). 

In  Fig.  1,  the  vertical  height  B  C  is  four  times  as  great  as  the 
horizontal  distance  A  B.  The  slope  A  C  is  called  -i  (verbally, 
four  in  one,  or  four  over  one). 

Slopes  are  sometimes  expressed  in  degrees.  A  good  rough 
rule  for  converting  degrees  of  slopes  into  fractions,  or  the 
reverse,  is  to  divide  60  by  the  number  of  degrees  expressing  the 
slope,  the  result  gives  the  denominator  of  the  fraction  whose 
numerator  is  1,  e.g.,  5^  slope  =  ^i^"'  ^^  1  ^^  ^-  slope. 

N.B. — This  formula  should  not  be  used  for  slopes  steeper 
than  30^ 

To  lay  out  13.  To  lay  out  a  right  angle.  Let  X  be  a  point  in  a  given 
a  right  straight  line  A  B  (Fig.  3),  from  which  it  is  required  to  set  oS  a 
*"gl^-         right  angle. 

Take  any  point  C  in  A  B,  and  drive  in  pickets  at  C  and  X. 
Take  any  convenient  length  of  tape  C  D  X,  and  make  loops 
at  either  end,  and  find  its  centre  D  by  doubling  it.  Xow  place 
the  two  loops  over  C  and  X  and  stretch  the  tape  taut  into  the 
position  C  D  X.  Take  D  X  off  the  picket  at  X  and  turn  it 
round  till  it  comes  into  the  position  D  E,  in  prolongation  of 
C  D.     Join  E  X,  which  gives  the  right  angle  required. 

2nd  Method. — From  X  measure  off  a  distance  of  4  units 
X  C  along  A  B  (Fig.  4).  Take  a  piece  of  line  or  tape  8  units 
long,  and  apply  one  end  to  the  point  X,  and  the  other  to  the 
point  C  ;  find  a  point  in  the  tape  3  units  from  X,  and  seizing 
it  at  this  point,  draw  the  bight  out  to  D,  till  the  line  is  taught, 
then  C  X  D  is  a  right  angle.     This  method  is  founded  on  the 


I^lajt€>  Z, 


Fi^.1.^ 


c        Field     Geometry. 


A       C 


J^ff.5.[ 


^x  ^^  ^ 


c     :b 


-'C  SB 


■<a4Me  ^.os 


W«J{f  r  *  Gr«h«m.  Lr*  Litho.  LoiMlon. 
Opposite  pcu^e'iO 


CHAPTER   II. — FIELD    GEOMETRY.  11 

fact  that  in  any  triangle  whose  sides  are  in  proportion  of 
3,  4  and  5,  the  angle  contained  between  the  two  shorter  sides 
is  a  right  angle. 

14.  To  trace  a  perpendicular  to  a  given  hne  from  a  point  To  trace 
outside.     Let  X  be  the  point  outside  the  line  A  B  (Fig.  5),  perpendi- 
f rom  which  it  is  required  to  draw  a  perpendicular  to  that  line.  ^     [  ^^"^ 
Take  a  tape  or  cord  longer  than  the  perpendicular  will  be  ;   fix  outside  a 
one  end  at  X,  and  stretching  it  taut,  swing  it  round  so  that  the  given  line, 
other  end  shall  cut  A  B  in  C.     Drive  in  a  peg  at  C,  find  D,  the 
middle  point  of  C  X.     With  D  as  centre,  swing  D  X  or  D  C 

round  to  the  position  D  E,  cutting  A  B  in  E.  Join  X  E,  then 
X  E  is  at  right  angles  to  xV  B. 

15.  To  lay  off  an  angle  of  60"^  or  120^.  Let  X  be  the  point  To  lay  ofe 
in  the  line  A  B  (Fig.  6)  from  which  it  is  required  to  lay  off  an  angles  of  ^ 
angle  of  60°.  Take  any  point  C  in  A  B  at  a  convenient  distance  o^'l^O  . 
from  X,  and  towards  that  end  of  the  line  from  which  the  angle 

of  60°  is  desired  to  be  drawn.  Take  a  tape  or  cord  twice  the 
length  of  X  C,  and  fasten  the  ends  to  X  and  C.  Seize  it  by  the 
middle  point  and  draw  the  bight  out  taut  to  E.  Then  the 
angle  E  X  C  is  60°  and  A  X  E  is  120°. 

16.  To  bisect  a  given  angle.     Let  A  B  C  be  the  angle  which  To  bisect 
it  is  required  to  bisect  (Fig.  7).     On  B  A  and  B  C,  mark  points  ^  ^'^J^^ 
D  and  E  at  equal  distances  from  B.     Find  by  means  of  a  ^^^  ®' 
tape  or  cord  a  point  F  equidistant  from  D  and  E.     Join  B  F. 

Then  B  F  bisects  the  angle  A  B  C. 

17.  To  lay  out  an  angle  equal  to  a  given  angle.    Let  X  be  the  To  lay  out 
point  in  the  straight  line  A  B  (Fig.  8),  from  which  it  is  desired  ^^  ^^§1® 
to  lay  off  an  angle  equal  to  the  angle  DEC.     Fix  the  points  ^^^^  *^ 
D  and  C  at  any  convenient  distance  from  E,  and  from  the  an't^le. 
point  X  measure  X  G,  equal  to  E  C.    Then  from  the  point  X 

as  centre,  and  a  distance  equal  to  E  D  as  radius,  and  from  the 
point  G  as  centre,  and  a  distance  equal  to  C  D  as  radius, 
describe  arcs,  intersecting  at  F.  Join  X  F.  The  angle  F  X  G 
is  equal  to  the  given  angle  DEC. 

18.  To  find  the  distance  between  any  two  points  A  and  B  Tofmdtbe 
when  it  cannot  be  measured  directly.     From  B  (Fig.  9)  lay  off  (distance 
the  line  B  D  at  any  convenient  angle,  D  being  at  any  con-  ^^tTwo 


12 


CHAPTER   III. — INTPvEInCHIXG    TOOLS. 


points 
when  it 
cannot  be 
measured 
directly. 


vcnient  distance.  In  B  D  select  a  point  C  so  that  B  C  is  some 
multiple  of  C  D.  From  D  lay  off  the  angle  B  D  F  equal  to  the 
angle  A  B  D,  and  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  line  B  D.  Make 
D  E  of  such  a  length  that  the  point  E  is  in  line  vs-ith  A  and  C. 

Then  A  B  :  B  C  :  :  D  E  :  C  D, 
BC  X  DE 


or  AB 


CD 


as  shown  in  PI.  2. 


CHAPTER  III.— IXTREXCHING  TOOLS. 


Tools 


Use  of 
tools. 


19.  The  service  intrenching  and  cutting  tools  are  shown  on 
Plates  3  and  4.  It  is  well  to  note  the  dimensions,  as 
they  are  useful  in  laying  out  and  executing  work. 

A  heavy  pick  with  an  8-lb.  head  has  been  sealed,  and  can  be 
obtained  from  Ordnance  Store  if  heav3'  work  is  expected. 

Only  a  smaU  proportion  of  spades  are  carried,  as  they 
are  of  little  use  in  the  field.  They  are  employed  for  cut- 
ting sods,  and  for  digging  generally  when  a  pick-axe  is  not 
required. 

20.  For  safety  the  pick  must  be  used  working  front  and  rear, 
and  never  sideways. 

Before  striking  the  pick  into  the  ground  it  should  be  raised 
well  above  the  head  with  both  hands.  In  bringing  it  do^vn,  the 
helve  should  slide  through  the  hand  nearest  to  the  head,  and 
the  weight  of  the  pick  should  be  employed  to  help  in  the  work. 

The  shovel  is  used  right  or  left  handed.  Xav\Tes  make 
gTeat  use  of  the  thigh  in  thrusting  the  shovel  under  the  loosened 
earth. 

In  throwing  earth  from  the  shovel  there  should  be  no 
jerk,  the  left  (or  right)  hand  m^ust  be  allowed  to  slide  freely 
up  the  handle,  otherwise  the  earth  will  scatter. 


J^ta-teS 


Intrenching   Tools 


*3* 


'^ 


1 . 


Ft^.i. 
SpoudUMf^ni  5Ujs  Woxs.      K ;^ 


Fs.5. 
Crowhar  1a  Ihs 


S-  6' 


*«06     ■   05 


Wel'trr  &  Grflhdti  L'f    Lirf^O  London 


Opposrfje  JiCiriie  JZ . 


FLr.t^  4- 


CuTT!  NG  Tools 


Aj-e.  ■FeZUri.g  ,  wer-ffh^  6li^  7oxs. 


2^:5 


BUI  Nook 


^2.7^ 


^«°^-zn.4!/  7re^s 


Ivff    6  . 
Gre<it/ Anver-icarv  Croas-cut^Scm  weiglU  Olbs.  loxs. 


fhk. 


•'  liitjrfi 


^-^nuwfwu./iJ;:^.,^ 


50 

IT 


Wcller  &  Graham.  Lr^  Litha  London. 


7b  foll^tvplcLU3. 


CHAPTER   III. — INTRENCHING    TOOLS. 


13 


■The  following  tools   will    probablv   bo  carried  in  the  field  Tntrench- 

bv  remmental  transport,  but  see  Field  Service  Manuals  : —      "''?  ^°^^ 
^  ^  cutting 

tools. 


• 

1 

•^ 

1 

Royal 
Engineers. 

Infantry. 

c 

n 

« 

1 

1 

S 

>. 

b 

>> 

>> 

Tools. 

i 

_S 

£ 

3 

1 

£, 

^3 

3 

3 

i. 

>> 

< 

<J 

^ 

< 

o 
O 

H 

.2 

•-  5 

"H 

I 

2 

i 

S 

3 

^^ 

<z 

% 
'^ 

^ 

"a 

^ 

s 

H 

(a)  latrenchinr;  Tools. 

Shovels     

80 

144 

98 

36 

33 

100 

32 

222 

220 

Spades       

_ 

— 

— 

_:- 

— ■ 

_ 

2 



Axes,  pick           

40 

55 

49 

18 

18 

100 

36 

148 

110 

(5)  Cutting  Tools. 

Axes,  felling       

32 

19 

13 

6 

6 

39 

22 

IS 

20 

hand          

3 

— 

— 

— . 

— 

28 

14 

12 



Bill-hooks            

4S 

55 

49 

18 

18 

27 

16 

40 

44 

Saws,  hand         

54 

3t5 

12 

12 

14 

18 

2 

2 

,,      cro's-cut 





— 

— 

4 

2 

1 

1 

Reaping  hooks 

33 

12 

8 

4 

4 

_. 

20 

64 

(c)  Miscellaneous. 

Crowhars 

11 

1 

1 





8 

6 

12 

8 

Guncotton  (including  primers) 

i 

lbs. 

im 

i- 
1 

ieoei 

32CJ 

The  above  numbers  do  not  include  wagon  equipments. 

Note. — G.S.    wagon    with    headquarters   of    an    Infantry 
Brigade  carries : — 

Picks 80 

Shovels         120 

Crowbars      . .  . .  . .         12 


u 


Reliefs. 


Tasks. 

Detail  of 

■working 

parties. 


Size  of 

tasks. 


Balancing 
parapet 
and  ex- 
cavations. 


CHAPTER  IV.— WORKING  PARTIES  AND  EXECU- 
TION  OF  INTRENCHMENTS. 

21.  In  digging  intrenchments  for  all  except  the  smallest 
works,  the  working  parties  are  not  kept  continuously  at  work, 
but  are  changed  at  intervals,  thus  dividing  the  total  time  into 
periods  called  reliefs.  As  regards  the  length  of  rdiejs  a  great 
deal  depends  upon  the  nature  of  the  work,  the  total  time  it 
will  take,  and  the  climate.  Also  the  question  must  be  con- 
sidered as  to  whether  the  work  has  to  be  hurried  through,  and 
whether  it  can  be  carried  on  by  night  as  well  as  by  day.  Short 
reliefs  are  best,  and  as  a  rule  it  will  be  found  that  a  four  hours 
relief  (actual  digging)  is  quite  long  enough  for  the  infantry 
soldier.     Six  hours  reliefs  may  occasionally  be  resorted  to. 

A  task  is  the  amount  of  work  a  man  has  to  do  in  one 
relief. 

Too  much  pains  cannot  be  taken  in  the  preliminary  details 
of  working  parties,  so  that  they  may  arrive  at  the  site  of 
their  work,  ready  provided  with  tools,  their  tasks  clearly 
defined,  and  the  men  in  such  formation  as  will  admit  of 
their  ready  distribution  on  the  work.  Delay  and  noise  is 
thus  avoided,  and  the  chance  of  confusion  during  night 
work  reduced  to  a  minimum. 

In  ordinary  easy  soil  the  average  untrained  soldier  should 
excavate  with  service  tools  {see  Pi.  3,  Figs.  1  and  3)  30  cubic 
feet  in  one  hour,  or  80  cubic  feet  in  a  four-hour  relief. 

If  the  soil  is  very  easy  these  rates  may  be  increased,  and 
vice  versa ;  in  hard  stony  ground  it  may  be  reduced  by  50 
per  cent. 

These  rates  hold  up  to  a  maximum  horizontal  throw  of 
12  feet,  combined  with  a  lift  out  of  a  trench  4  feet  deep. 

22.  As  the  earth  required  for  the  parapet  of  a  large  field  work 
is  obtained  from  the  excavations  (ditch  and  trench),  the  areas 
of  the  sections  across  the  parapet  and  excavation  must  be 
roughly  balanced. 

PI.  5,  Fig.  1,  gives  an  example  of  a  section  of  a  parapet 
with  high  command,  the  successive  reliefs  (with  their  tasks) 
necessary  for  the  execution  of  the  work  being  shown. 

Figures  shown  thus  ["  36  ]  denote  the  area  of  the  excava- 
tion or  parapet  in  square  feet. 


Plxit4    .5. 


BALANCING  PARAPET  &.  EXCAVATION 


z±^-A    \ «. 


^ 


TASKS 


I  ReJjrj&f'  76  ctcij5rjc  feet 

u .   ,,.-.  7;^  ..  .- 

3ir 3S%  ,,  ..  „  -. 


TASKS 
JT —  f ,  —  »>.^^  - ,, —  , ,  -- 


PROFILING 


^r^.^, 


Jhter^ior-  csrss 


''////w//////w/Mmmm^, 


s/ae  .s  OS. 


Wfiier&Grahan.L'*  UrhoLoodon 

Opposite  pa^  tS. 


CHAPTER   IV. — WORKING   PARTIES,    ETC.  15 

23.  Tracing  a  work  consists  in  laying  out  so  much  of  its  plan  Tracing, 
on  the  ground  as  is  necessary  to  guide  the  distribution  of 

the  working  parties.     This  may  be  done  by  a  mark  on  the 
ground,  or  by  tapes. 

In  hasty  defence  work  tracing  with  a  tape  is  usually  only 
necessary  for  night  work. 

24.  When  making  works  of  high  command,  profiles  should  be  Profiling, 
put  up  to  guide  the  construction  of  the  parapet.     {See  PI.  5.) 

For  high  profiles  it  is  best  to  drive  stout  pickets  into  the 
ground  at  the  position  of  the  verticals,  construct  the  profile 
bodily  to  a  straight  line,  lying  flat  on  the  ground,  and  then 
up-end  it,  and  nail  it  to  the  pickets  on  a  level  line. 

Profiles  are  laid  out  at  right  angles  to  the  crest  line.  They 
should  be  placed  at  intervals  of  about  30  feet,  two  at  least  being 
required  for  each  face  near  the  angles. 

High  profiles  should  be  secured  by  stays  or  light  guys,  or 
they  are  liable  to  be  blown  down. 

25.  For   all   intrenchments  the   normal   distance   apart  at  Orgauisa. 
which  the  men  are  spaced  for  work  is  two  paces  (5  feet).  ^^^^  9^ 
This  can  be  reduced,  if  necessary,  to  4  feet,  but  it  cramps  the  "^*^ff^"S 
diggers. 

Task  work  is  better  than  working  for  a  fixed  time.  In 
arranging  tasks  it  is  better  to  under  estimate  the  men's  powers 
in  order  to  avoid  incomplete  tasks. 

In  arranging  reliefs,  the  following  rules  should,  if  possible, 
be  adhered  to  : — 

(1)  The  second  and  succeeding  reliefs   should   have   less 

earth  to  excavate  than  the  first,  as  the  diggers  have 
further  to  throw. 

(2)  If  fossible,  each  relief  should  leave  a  vertical  face 

of  earth  for  the  next  relief  to  commence  upon.     For 
instance,  in  PL  5,  Fig.  1,  the  dividing  line  between 
the  reliefs  is  vertical  and  not  horizontal. 
26.  _A  party  of  the  necessary  strength  for  the  work  in  hand.  Detailing 
including   a    reserve    of    one-tenth,    having   been    demanded,  working 
should  be  detailed  from  a  company,  battalion,   brigade,  or  P^^'^^^s. 
division,  and  not  formed  of  detachments  from  difierent  com- 
panies and  corps. 


16  CHAPTER   IV. — V/ORKING    PARTIES,    ETC. 

The  party  is  then  marched  to  the  tool  depot  to  get  their 
tools,  which  should  be  ready  laid  out,  according  to  the  detail 
of  the  several  parties,  either  in  rows  or  in  heaps,  the  men  in 
the  former  case  filing  on  the  rows  and  taking  up  a  pick  in 
the  left  hand  and  a  shovel  in  the  right,  or  filing  between  the 
heaps  and  receiving  the  tools  in  the  same  order  in  passing. 

For  extending  men  for  work,  see  "  Infantrv  Trainiog,'* 
1905,  p.  96. 

If  the  party  be  large  and  the  work  of  a  complicated  nature, 
such  as  a  redoubt,  the  men  should  be  divided  into  detachments, 
each  under  a  superintendent,  corresponding  to  definite  portions 
of  the  work,  formed  in  column  at  some  distance  from  the  site, 
and  successively  extended  along  the  line,  driving  in  their  picks 
on  the  left  of  their  tasks,  and  laying  down  their  shovels  along 
the  front.  It  is  sometimes  advisable,  in  order  to  save  time 
in  extending,  to  keep  a  separate  detachment  for  distributing 
on  the  excavations  at  the  angles. 

No  work  must  be  commenced  till  the  distribution  of  the  whole 
is  complete,  as  it  is  difficult  to  remedy  mistakes  when  work  has 
once  begun,  the  subsequent  shifting  of  men  invariably  tending 
to  confusion  and  possibly  loss  of  tools,  clothing  and  accoutre- 
ments. 
Double  When  the  men  available  greatly  exceed  the  tools  in  number, 

manning     i^,  j^^y  be  advisable  to  tell  off  tw^o  men  to  each  set  of  tools,  and 
*°  so  complete  the  work  in  about  two-thirds  of  the  ordinary 

time. 

Superintendents  should  be  relieved  at  alternate  hours  to 
the  working  parties,  to  ensure  continuity  in  work. 

When  the  distance  that  the  earth  has  to  be  thrown  is  too 
great  for  the  diggers  to  deposit  it  in  its  final  position  in  one 
throw,  shovellers  wiU  be  necessary  as  well  as  diggers. 

Methods         27.  Diggers  should  commence  on  the  left  of  their  tasks,  in 

of  execu-    order  to  incommode  each  other  as  little  as  possible. 

tmg  tasks.      j^  excavating  V-shaped  ditches  the  slopes  should  not  be 

formed  until  the  last  relief,  rectangular  portions  being  taken 

out  first. 
If  not  under  fire  the  earth  first  excavated  should  be  furthest 

thrown. 


CHAPTER    V. — MATERIALS.  17 

In  making  fire-trenches  the  men  should  try  to  get  cover  as 
soon  as  possible.  Sods  and  lumps  of  earth  should  be  used 
for  revetting  the  interior  slope,  which  must  be  made  as  nearly 
vertical  as  possible,  the  revetting  being  carried  on  with  the 
parapet. 


CHAPTER   v.— MATERIALS. 

For  approximate  time  required  for  carrying  out  work  referred  to 
in  this  chapter,  with  labour  and  tools,  see  table,  p.  120. 

28.  The  materials,  which  are  mostly  available  for  the  con-  Earth, 
struction   of    field   defences   are   earth,    st--  nes,    timber     and 
brushwood,   while  railway  plant,  iron  sheeting,   wire  barbed 

and  plain,  &c.,  may  often  be  obtained.  Of  these  materials 
earth  is  the  most  valuable  as  well  as  the  most  generally  used. 

For  the  purpose  of  field  fortification,  earth  is  usually  pro- 
cured from  the  trenches  dug  as  near  as  possible  to  the  place 
where  it  is  to  be  used. 

The  steepest  slopes  at  which  thrown-up  earth  will  stand 
is  about  45°  or  \. 

29.  Sods  are  used  for  revetments  and  also  to  form  walls  in  Sods, 
special  cases.     They  should,  if  possible,  be  cut  from  meadows 
growing  thick  grass.     Each  sod  should  be   about   18  inches 
long,  9  inches   broad  (these  dimensions   depending,  however, 

on  the  width  of  the  spade)  and  4|  inches  thick. 

30.  Stones  may  be  employed  to  form  rough  walls  in  places  stones. 
where  digging  is  difficult  or  impossible.     A  well-built  rubble 

wall,  12  to  18  inches  thick,  will  keep  out  bullets,  this  thickness 
being  necessary  to  avoid  having  any  "  through  "  joints. 

Two  such  walls  about  10  feet  apart  afford  good  protection 
against  artillery  fire,  the  outer  wall,  which  should  be  at  least 
2  feet  thick,  serving  to  burst  the  shell. 

31.  Timber   is   used   in   the  construction  of   bridges,  huts,  Timber, 
splinter-proofs,  stockades,  abatis,  &c. 

(5289)  B 


18  CHAPTER    V. — MATERIALS. 

Felling  32.  The  tools  employed  for  felling  timber  are  the  felling  axe, 

Timber.  ^|^g  hand  axe,  the  cross-cut  saw  and  the  Jiand  saw  (PI.  4). 
Of  these  the  felling  axe  in  the  hands  of  an  experienced  work- 
man is,  probably,  the  best  of  all.  The  hand  axe  is  only 
suitable  for  felling  small  trees  not  exceeding  12  inches  to 
15  inches  in  diameter,  but  it  may  be  employed  with  advan- 
tage when  men  practised  in  the  use  of  the  felling  axe  are 
not  available,  as  it  requires  little  or  no  skill  in  handling. 

The  cross-cut  saw  or  the  hand  savr  may  also  be  used,  the  latter 
with  small  trees  only,  provided  that  measures  are  taken,  by 
wedging  or  otherwise,  to  prevent  the  weight  of  the  tree  from 
jamming.  Inexperienced  men  can  use  the  cross-cut  saw  more 
easily  and  safely  than  the  axe,  and  can  cut  more  quickly  with  it. 
When  convenient,  it  is  best  to  fell  a  tree  in  the  direction  of  its 
natural  inclination.  In  using  the  felling  axe,  the  tree  should  be 
first  attacked  on  the  side  on  which  it  is  required  to  fall,  a  rope 
being  employed,  if  necessar)-,  to  pull  it  over,  as,  for  instance, 
when  the  natural  inclination  is  not  in  the  required  direction. 
When  the  tree  has  been  cut  into  as  far  as  the  centre,  or  a  little 
beyond  it,  the  workman  should  change  over  to  the  opposite  side 
and  commence  cutting  about  4  or  5  inches  above  the  former  cut 
until  the  tree  falls.  The  cuts  should  be  as  shown  in  Fig.  4, 
PL  4,  where  the  arrow  indicates  the  direction  in  which  the 
tree  is  required  to  fall.  With  beginners,  or  when  it  is  not 
important  to  save  timber,  and  when  there  is  no  objection 
to  leaving  the  cover  which  high  stumps  afford,  the  point  a 
should  be  the  height  of  the  hip,  h  c  should  be  about  three-fourths 
the  diameter  of  the  tree. 

It  may  sometimes  be  convenient  to  employ  both  the  saw 
and  the  axe  to  cut  down  a  tree.  In  such  cases  the  axe  should 
be  used  on  the  side  towards  which  the  tree  is  to  fall,  and  the 
saw  en  the  opposite  side. 

The  teeth  of  all  saws  used  for  cutting  down  timber  should 
be  set  wide. 
Cutting  33.  Brushwood  is   much  used  in   military  engineering   for 

!!L"!^"  roadmaking  and  revetting  purposes,  and  for  the  construction 
of  gabions,  fascines,  hurdles,  &c. 

WiUow,  birch,  ash,  Spanish  chestnut  and  hazel  are  the 
most  suitable  kinds,  and  work  best  if  cut  w^hen  the  leaf  is  off. 


ood. 


Thff^'    G. 


V 


Tiq.Z 


or'JBnttorL 


Brushwood. 

JifeZfvoOi  of  7>iftdz7i^^r*itsJuvood 


^zy.;.         /rj)  JJVB 


^^.5 


4^06   S. 05 


.eilerSrGraham.  L'*  Lirho, London 
Opposite  pajge  J 9 


CHAPTER   V. — MATERIALS.  ID 

As  a  rough  rule  it  may  be  taken  that  1,000  square  yards  of 
brushwood,  0  years  old,  make  up  three  G.S.  wagon  loads. 

34.  Withes,  for  binding  purposes,  in  lieu  of  wire  spun  yarn,  Withes. 
&c.,  are  made  of  pliable  wood,  such  as  willow  and  hazel.      They 
should  be  6  feet  to  7  feet  long,  |  inch  in  diameter,  and  made 
pliable  by  being  well  twisted,  the  thin  end  being  placed  under 

the  left  foot,  and  the  rod  twisted  with  the  hands,  avoiding 
kinks.  If  the  rod  is  stiff  a  smaU.  piece  of  stick,  lashed  across 
the  butt,  will  be  of  use  in  twisting  it  (PL  6). 

35.  A  fascine  is  a  long  faggot  tightly  packed  and  carefully  Fascines, 
bound,  used  in  revetments,  for  foundations  of  roads  in  marshy 

sites,  and  for  many  other  purposes.  The  usual  dimensions 
are  18  feet  long  and  9  inches  in  diameter.  It  is  made  in  a 
cradle  of  trestles  placed  at  a  uniform  level  (PL  7,  Figs.  6 
and  9).  The  brushwood,  trimmed  if  possible,  is  laid  in  the 
cradle,  projecting  about  1  foot  6  inches  beyond  the  outside 
trestles,  and  adjusted  so  that  there  may  be  no  weak  place. 
Crooked  rods  must  be  half  sawn  through  and  straightened. 

The   fascine    is    then    gauged    with    the    choker    (Fig.    7),  Choker, 
which  consists  of  two  wooden  levers,  4  feet  long,  connected 
at  18  inches  from  their  ends  by  a  chain  4  feet  long,  provided 
with  two  gauge  rings,  28  inches  apart,  corresponding  to  the 
circumference  of  the  fascine. 

To  use  it,  two  men,  standing  one  on  each  side,  place  the 
centre  of  the  chain  under  the  fascine  with  the  short  ends  of 
the  levers  uppermost,  cross  the  levers  to  each  other  over  the 
fascine  with  the  short  ends  down,  and  bear  down  on  the  long 
ends  until  the  gauge  rings  meet. 

Binding  must  be  commenced  at  one  end.  The  first  binding  Binding, 
(of  we,  spun  yarn  hoops  or  withes)  is  put  on  3  inches 
beyond  the  outside  trestle,  and  the  remainder  (12  in  all)  at 
intervals  of  about  18  inches.  This  admits  of  the  fascine  being 
cut,  if  required,  into  9  feet  or  6  feet  lengths.  The  ends  of  the 
fascine  are  sawn  off  9  inches  beyond  the  outside  bindings. 

In  all  cases  the  fascine  must  be  choked  close  up  to  the 
position  of  the  binding  while  the  latter  is  being  put  on. 

With  withes  an  eye  is  formed  at  the  tip,  the  withe  put  on  With 
under  the  fascine,  the  ends  brought  up,  the  butt  passed  through  withes. 
the  eye,  turned  back  and  twisted  round  itself  (Fig.  5). 

(5289)  -B  2 


Piclvets. 


Gabions. 


Brush- 
wood 
gabion. 


20 


CHAPTER   V. — MATERIALS. 


Length. 

Diameter. 

feet  ins. 

ins.      ins. 

3     6 

ftol 

2     6 

li  »  li 

6     6 

3    „  4 

3     6 

1     „  2 

1     6 

1     „  U 

5     0 

li  „  2*' 

2     6 

1     „  li 

1     6 

h  „    1 

With  spun  yarn  the  centre  is  found  and  laid  on  the  fascln^ 
and  the  yarn  is  then  passed  twice  round  the  fascine,  haule 
taut,  and  fastened  off  with  a  reef  knot. 

Both  withes  and  yarn  are  apt  to  perish. 

Wire  is  laid  on  like  the  yarn,  passed  twice  round,  haule 
taut,  the  ends  t\^asted  together  and  tucked  in  ;  14  gaug 
is  a  convenient  size. 

A  piece  of  hoop  iron  may  be  used  for  binding.  It  should  b 
31  inches  long,  with  notches  cut  at  opposite  vsides,  and  2. 
inches  apart.  The  iron  is  passed  round  the  fascine,  and  th 
notches  hitched  together  (Fig.  8). 

36.  Pickets  are  made  from  brushwood  for  various  purposes 

The  following  dimensions  are  useful  for  reference  : — 


For  gabions 
fascines 
fascine  cradles 
hurdles 
tracing 

high  wire  entanglement 
low  wire  entanglement 
sodwork 

37.  Gabions  are  cylinders  open  at  both  ends,  which,  when 
standing  on  one  end  and  filled  with  earth,  make  a  strong 
revetment. 

For  dimensions  see  PL  8. 

They  may  be  made  of  almost  any  material  capable  of  beina 
bent  or  woven  into  a  cylindrical  form,  such  as  brushwood,^ 
canvas,  sheet  iron,  ware  netting,  &c.  Their  employment  in 
the  future  is  likely  to  be  more  limited  than  in  the  past,  as 
revetments  are  as  a  rule  lower,  and  so  simpler  forms  of  support 
will  suffice. 

38.  To  make  a  brushwood  gabion,  a  circle  of  10|  inches  radius 
is  traced  on  level  ground,  and  an  even  number  of  pickets, 
usually  10  or  12,  driven  at  equal  intervals  round  the  inside 
of  the  circumference  {see  Fig.  1). 

The  pickets  are  3  feet  6  inches  high,  |  inch  to  1  inch  in 
diameter,  and  must  be  driven  with  the  thick  and  thin  end 
alternately  downwards. 


PlaJte  7 


Brushwood. 


Fascines 


:Fiff.7. 


^a^'czne.  Choicer^, 


M-PO->^. 


\  ^  '  .  >,< 


<!>  s^,mf4,.^  ,..>  ..  .o 


WelleriGrahsff'.  L"  Lirtxi  Lerdw 

Oppas/Lte  pcx^e  20. 


i 


Plnte  8 


Brusjiwood. 

Gabions. 
S&i/ym'  yj'ithj  \vir&  or'  spuny  i/oc/yz/ 

Tiff.  /.  Tzff.Z. 


Tiff.  4^. 


jyl  || 

HI  HI      i    [H 

1 

'H3 

i 

Ti.j.5. 


Tig.   6. 


Tz^.S 


J^-9 


^....2f)"--> 


We<le'i<  C-rgham.  I"  Lif'^oLooon 


Ojjposite^  p<x^&Z1 . 


CHAPTER   V. — MATERIALS.  21 

The    web    is   constructed    by  a  process    called    waling,    as  Waling, 
follows  : — 

Three  rods  well  trimmed  are  placed  with  their  butt  ends 
inside  three  adjacent  pickets  (Fig.  1).  The  first  rod  is  passed 
over  the  other  two,  outside  the  two  adjacent  pickets,  and  inside 
the  third,  the  second  and  third  rods  are  similarly  treated,  and 
the  process  continued.  When  introducing  a  fresh  rod  in  place 
of  one  that  is  coming  to  an  end,  the  two  must  be  laid  together 
for  a  few  inches  and  worked  as  one  rod. 

The  web  must  be  close,  even  and  well  pressed  down,  the 
<limensions  strictly  maintained  by  frequent  gauging,  and  the 
pickets  kept  upright  and  in  their  proper  places,  otherwise 
the  gabion  will  become  either  crooked  or  funnel-shaped. 

When  the  web  has  reached  a  height  of  2  feet  6  inches,  Pairing, 
two  pairing  rods  are  put  on  as  follows  : — The  rods  must  be 
9  feet  long,  well  twisted  (like  withes)  and  pointed  at  the  butt 
ends,  which  are  driven  down  into  the  web  at  its  lowest  point 
on  either  side  of  one  of  the  pickets,  the  rods  are  then  passed 
alternately  over  and  under  each  other,  and  inside  and  outside 
the  pickets  (being  well  twisted  during  the  operation),  and 
finished  off  and  driven  down  the  web  on  either  side  of  the 
picket  next  beyond  that  at  which  the  pairing  was  commenced. 

The  pairing  rods  are  then  sewn  down  to  the  web  at  Sewing, 
four  equal  intervals,  either  with  wire,  spun  yarn,  or  withes. 
If  the  latter  -are  used  they  should  be  about  6  feet  long  and  well 
twisted.  The  first  sewing  is  placed  where  the  pairing  rods 
are  double,  the  butt  end  is  passed  through  the  web  from  the 
outside  7  inches  below  the  top  and  turned  down  inside  ;  the 
withe  brought  over  the  top,  down  inside,  through  the  web 
above  the  old  place,  do^vn  outside,  through  the  web  again 
7  inches  lower  down,  back  through  the  web,  clasping  the  butt 
end  in  passing  down  outside,  back  through  the  web  another 
7  inches  down,  and  finished  off  with  two  half  hitches  round  the 
butt  end  above  the  clasping. 

The  gabion  is  then  reversed,  pairing  rods  put  on  at  the  bottom 
and  sewn  in  four  places,  the  sewings  alternating  with  those 
already  put  on.  A  carrying  picket  must  then  be  driven  through 
the  web. 

Forked  pickets  (Fig.  6)  driven  well  down  into  the  web 
may  sometimes  be  used  instead  of  sewing. 


22 


CHAPTER    v.  — MATERIALS. 


Jones' 
gabions. 


Hurdles. 


Willesdtn       39.  Willesden  paper  band  gabions  are  an  article  of  store, 
paper  Each  gabion  consists  of  10  bands,  3  inches  wide,  fastened  at 

ga  ions.      ^^^  ^^^^  -^^^  ^^^^^  copper  cUps.     (Pb  8,  Figs.  8  and  9.) 

To  make  it,  lay  a  band  ready  fastened  in  the  form  of  a  circle 
on  the  ground.  Drive  the  pickets,  10  in  number,  round  it 
alternately  inside  and  outside,  sHp  a  second  band  over  the 
tops  of  the  pickets,  alternating  with  the  first  band,  and  press 
it  half-way  down  to  keep  the  pickets  steady,  until  the  third 
band  is  on,  when  they  may  be  pressed  down  to  the  bottom, 
and  the  remaining  seven  bands  put  on.  All  the  joints  should 
be  kept  behind  two  adjacent  pickets.  A  thin  carrying  picket 
can  be  driven  through  the  web.  The  top  and  bottom  bands 
should  be  nailed  to  the  pickets. 

Jones'  steel  band  gabions  are  still  articles  of  store,  but  no 
more  will  be  made.  They  are  made  up  similarly  to  Willesden 
paper  gabions. 

40.  Hurdles,  unless  for  a  special  object,  are  usually  made 
6  feet  long  and  2  feet  9  inches  high  in  the  web,  thus  correspond- 
ing to  the  height  of  a  gabion  {see  PI.  9). 

They  are  useful  for  revetments,  huts  and  temporary  roadways. 

A  line  6  feet  long  is  marked  on  the  ground,  and  divided 
into  nine  equal  parts,  and  a  picket  (about  3  feet  6  inches  long 
and  from  1  inch  to  2  inches  in  diameter)  driven  in  at  each 
division,  the  two  outside  ones  being  somewhat  stouter  and 
longer  ;  the  web  is  then  constructed  by  randing. 
Ranfling.  Randing  is  worked  with  single  rods,  and  is  commenced 
in  the  centre  {see  Fig.  1).  The  rod  is  taken  alternate  sides  of 
the  pickets,  twisted  round  the  end  pickets,  and  woven  back 
to  the  centre.  A  fresh  rod  must  overlap  by  several  pickets 
the  one  which  it  supplants. 

Pairing  rods  are  used  in  the  centre  and  at  both  ends  of  the 
web,  which  is  usually  se^vn  top  and  bottom  in  three  places. 

The  operation  of  slewing  is  the  same  as  randing,  two  or 
three  rods  being  worked  simultaneously  ;  it  makes  weaker 
work  than  randing. 


Slewing. 


JL   L4AJL4'      y 


Brush  wood 

Tiff  J. 


CcfTTurve^t^cerfzepvi?  ofa^  6fP Hur-clle.. 


7  to  2/  ISzuTclLe^  o/^.JBr7zs7iAA^6o(L 


igoe   ."  OS. 


Ojjrposxte  page  22- . 


23 


CHAPTER  VI.— REVETMENTS. 

41.  A  revetment  is  a  retaining  wall  used  for  supporting 
earth  at  a  steeper  slope  than  that  at  which  it  would  naturally 
stand. 

The  following  are  the  revetments  most  in  use  in  the  field  : — 

42.  Gabion. — This  is  one  of  the  best  that  can  be  used  when  a  Gabion 
considerable  height  of  parapet  has  to  be  dealt  with,  but  for  revetment, 
breastworks  gabions  are  extravagant  of  material.     They  are 
usually  placed  at  a  slope  of  \.     This  tilt  may  be  obtained  by 
resting  their  outer  edges  on  a  fascine  sunk  3  inches  into  the 
ground  (PI.  10,  Fig.  1),  or  in  any  other  way. 

For  high  parapets  two  fascines  are  generally  interpolated 
between  the  rows  of  gabions,  and  in  this  case  it  is  advisable 
to  anchor  the  gabions  \\\i\\  wire  to  stakes,  fascines,  or  logs 
buried  in  the  parapet.     (Figs.  3  and  1.) 

43.  Fascines. — Fascines  make  a  poor  revetment  by  themselves,  Fasc  ne 
and  their  use  is  generally  confined  to  revetting  steps.     They  ^^^e^ment. 
should  be  well  picketed  down. 

44.  Hurdles. — Hurdles  form  some  of  the  most  useful  forms  of  Hurdle 
revetment,  either   in    the    form    of    ready-made    hurdles,    or  revetment, 
continuous     hurdle     revetment     constructed     simultaneously 

with  the  parapet.  In  either  case  the  slope  is  built 
at  \,  and  frequent  anchoring  is  essential.  Stretching  of 
fastenings,  &c.,  due  to  weight  of  earth  in  the  parapet,  will 
bring  the  hurdle  to  a  slope  of  \,  as  shown  in  PL  10,  Fig.  7. 
In  continuous  hurdlework  the  web  is  formed  by  randing  or 
slewing,  each  pair  of  men  having  10  feet  or  12  feet  of  revetment 
as  their  task  time,  J  to  |  of  an  hour.  They  must  work  in 
their  rods  with  the  men  on  either  side.      (Fig.  7.) 

45.  Brushwood. — This  is  a  rapidly  made  and  useful  revetment.  Brush- 
Stakes  are  driven  in  at  a  slope  of  about  f ,  at  from  1  foot  to  wood 

2  feet  apart,  and  anchored  back.     As  the  parapet  rises,  loose  revetment, 
brushwood  (or  ferns,   reeds,  straw,   &c.)  is  filled  in  between 
the  stakes  and  the  parapet.     (Fig.  2.) 

46.  Sandbag  revetment  is  made  at  a  slope  of  f  with  alternate  Sandbag 
rows  of  headers  and  stretchers  (the  former  with  the  chokes,  revetment, 
the  latter  with  the  seams  turned  into  the  parapet),  breaking 

joint  (Fig.  5).     The  bags  must  be  laid  at  right  angles  to  the 


24  CHAPTER    VI. —REVETMENTS. 

slojie,  .ind  not  liorizontally  or  the  revetment  may  slide.  Thev 
should  be  not  more  than  about  three-quarters  full,  and  should 
be  well  beaten  when  placed  in  position.  Two  men  build,  and 
if  supplied  with  sandbags  by  carriers  and  fillers,  will  lay  about 
70  bags  an  hour ;  1  cubic  \Hird  of  earth  fills  about  50  bags. 
Sod  47.  Sod  revetment  is  built  at  a  slope  of  |.     The  sods  should 

revetment.  \^fy  ^^^^  jg  inches  long,  9  inches  wide,  and  not  more  than  i\  inches 
thick,  with  a  sharpened  spade  or  sod-cutter  (Fig.  8). 

They  must  be  laid  in  alternate  rows  of  headers  and  stretchers, 

grass  downwards,  breaking  joint,  and  at  right   angles  to  the 

slope,  with  two  rows  of  sods  in  each  stretcher  course.    The 

top  layer  should  be  laid  with  grass  upwards,  and  all  headers. 

They  should  be  bedded  and  backed  by  fine  earth  well  rammed. 

For  superior  work  the  sods  should  not  exceed  3  inches  in 

thickness  ;    and  a  picket  should  be  driven  through  each  sod. 

Cleit  fir  pickets  are  better  than  round,  which  split  the  sods. 

Two  builders  should  lay  70  to  100  sods  an  hour. 

Timber  48.  Timber  revetment  may  be  made  by  driving  strong  stakes 

revetment  j^^q  ^]^g  ground,  placing  planking  behind  them,  and  filling  in 

with  earth.     The  slope  wall  depend  on  the  strength  of  the 

timber,  f  will  generally  be  safe.   The  stakes  should  be  anchored. 

Planks  should  never  be  used  for  revetments  where  they  will 

be  exposed  to  the  fire  of  high  explosive  shells. 

Willesclen       49.  Willesden  canvas. — This  is  kept  as   an  article  of  store, 

canvas        [^  \ojig  strips  about  3  feet  wide.     For  use,  stout  pickets  should 

■  be  driven  from  12  inches  to  18  inches  apart  and  anchored. 

The   canvas   will  then  be   stretched  between   these   and  the 

parapet,  being  laced  with  wire  to  the  pickets  top  and  bottom 

at  about  6  feet  intervals  (Fig.  6). 

Wire  50.  Wire  netting  with  stakes  passed  in  and  out  of  the  meshes 

netting       ^j^^j  anchored  back  forms  a  good  revetment  in  soils  which  are 

revetment.       j.  ,  i 

not  too  sandy. 

All  revetments  of  parapets  intended  for  musketry  fire 
should  be  finished  off  with  one  or  two  courses  of  sods  or  sand- 
bags, where  available. 

For  estimate  of  material  required  for  revetments,  see  table^ 
p.  120 


vuue.  ;o. 


Revetmep^ts 


Brushwooo 


OANHBAGS 


^'.e: 


CcLnx^aJi  ^^'  ^- 


Fig.Q 


Section^ 

HUR-DLE 


4soe.z  OS. 


Welter  4  Graham  l'"^   Litbo. London 


25 


CHAPTER  VII.-CLEAKING  THE  FOREGROUND. 

For  estimate  of  time  and  labour  required,  see  table,  f.  120. 

51.  In  most  cases  a  certain  amount  of  clearing  will  have  to  GenerMl 
be  done  in  front  of  a  defensive  position.     The  object  should  pi-iuciples. 
be  to  secure  for  the  defenders  the  full  use  of  their  weapons 
within  effective  range,  while  at  the  same  time  leaving  intact 

or  improving  all  existing  obstacles  which  would  impede  the 
free  employment  of  the  weapons  of  the  enemy  and  obstruct 
or  break  up  his  attack.  When  an  active  defence  is  contem- 
plated (which  would  be  the  general  rule)  the  obstacles  left  should 
be  such  as  not  to  interfere  with  counter-attack.  In  clearing  Screens, 
the  foreground,  the  value  of  leaving  screens  to  hide  the 
defenders'  movements  must  be  considered  [see  Chap.  VIII, 
Sec.  63). 

It  is  difficult  to  make  exact  estimates  of  time  required 
to  clear  ground,  as  difficulties  cannot  be  foreseen.  The  table 
on  p.  120  can  only  be  taken  as  a  rough  guide  for  estimating 
working  parties. 

It  will  be  advisable  to  start  the  clearing  from  the  position 
and  work  forward  as  time  permits. 

Hollows  and  unseen  ground,  which  would  give  an  enemy's 
troops  shelter  at  points  dangerously  near  the  position,  may 
be  filled  up  with  abatis,  or  debris  of  walls,  &c. 

Large  scattered  trees  give  less  cover  when  standing  than  if 
cut  down,  and  may  sometimes  be  useful  as  range  marks. 

Thick  brushwood,  especially  in  the  case  of  some  tropical 
growths,  forms  a  very  effective  obstacle,  which  should  only 
be  cleared  away  in  accordance  with  the  principles  above  laid 
down.  Thus,  in  place  of  making  a  general  clearance,  portions 
may  frequently  be  left  with  advantage,  both  to  deny  special 
points  to  an  enemy  and  to  break  up  his  attack,  or  to  compel 
the  adoption  of  particular  lines  of  advance  (the  portions  cut 
down  may  often  be  formed  into  an  obstacle  among  the  parts 
left  standing). 

52.  Hedges  which  interfere  with  the  defenders'  fire  or  screen  Hedges, 
the  attack,  must  be  removed. 


2G    CHAPTER  VIII. — IMPROVEMENT   OF   EXISTING   COVER,   ETC. 

The  clearance  of  those  perpendicular  to  the  front  is  of  less 

importance  than  that  of  those  parallel  to  the  front. 

Walls  and      53.  Walls  can  be  knocked  down  by  a  part  of  men  iisina  a 

buildings,   trunk  cf  a  tree  or  a  railway  iron  as  a  battering  ram.     Low 

buildings  may  be  similarly  treated.     If  high,  they  must  be 

blown  down  and  the  ruins  levelled,  as  far  as  possible,  so  as 


CHAPTER    VIII.— IMPROVEMENT    OF    EXISTING 
COVER,    STOCKADES,   &c. 

For  time  and  labour  required^  see  table,  p.  120. 

Walls.  54.  Brick  walls  9  inches  thick,  if  badly  built,  are  liable  to  be 

penetrated  through  the  joints  by  small-bore  bullets,  and  can 
he  cut  through  by  short  range  volleys  directed  on  the  same 
spot.  Practically,  however,  any  fairly  well  built  wall  will 
give  good  cover  against  musketry.  Walls  alone  cannot  be 
occupied,  as  a  rule,  under  effective  artillery  fire,  but  may, 
nevertheless,  be  utilised  for  defence,  after  artillery  fire  has 
ceased. 

A  wall  between  4  feet  and  4  feet  6  inches  high  can  be  used 
as  it  stands.  If  a  wall  is  less  than  I  feet  high,  a  small  trench 
can  be  sunk  on  the  inside  to  gain  additional  cover. 

Between  5  feet  and  6  feet  in  height  a  wall  can  be  notched. 
(PI.  11,  Fig.  4.) 

Above  6  feet  in  height,  a  step  must  be  raised  inside,  to 
enable  men  to  either  fire  over  the  wall,  or  through  notches,  or 
else  the  wall  must  be  loopholed  (Fig.  5). 
Loop-  55.  Loopholes  should  not  be  closer  together  than  3  feet  from 

holes.  centre  to  centre,  and  can  be  made  by  means  of  crowbars  or 
picks.  It  is  desirable  to  make  the  opening  on  the  outside  as 
small  as  possible,  to  lessen  the  chance  of  the  entry  of  the  bullets. 
In  a  moderately  thick  brick  wall  the  loophole  may  be  commenced 
by  knocking  out  a  "  header  "  from  the  outside  of  the  wall, 
the  interior  dimensions  of  the  loophole  being  afterwards 
varied  with  the  direction  in  which  fire  is  to  be  delivered, 
In  actual  warfare  a  rough  hole  only  can  generally  be  formed, 


PLat&    Jl 


HED6E.S 
Fi^.    1. 

yt^^g^:  NcUaraL  DztcTv 
ire  rear 


Fzg.    Z. 


t^      MtturctlliiUh 
TTV  frortt. 


Walls 


Fig.  3 


0   ston^  coping  &.raiJbi7ig 
t2v  scatter  ecb 


Fig.  4     ElevatLOTL  of  Fig.  8 


Two  Tiers  of  Fire 
7s     ^tcLoing  ofPlcaiks 
anJilBarrels . 


SancUbag  loaphdU 
or  caiy  other  sort 
of  loophole 


«06^h    05 


Weller  A  Graham.  L^  Lj.cho  Lonuon. 


CHAPTER   VIII. — IMPROVEMENT    OF    EXISTING    COVER,    ETC.     27 

which  should,  nevertheless,  conform  to  the  conditions  above 
laid  down  as  far  as  possible. 

Figs.  6  and  7  suggest  methods  for  preparing  walls  for  a  double 
tier  of  fire,  which  might  be  used  for  flanking  purposes. 

56.  In  preparing  hedges  for  defence,  weak  places  should  be  Hedges, 
made  up  with  boughs,  stakes,  wire,  &c.,  and  if  a  ditch  is  on 

the  defenders'  side,  little  else  requires  to  be  done.  If  not  on 
the  defenders'  side,  something  in  the  nature  of  a  shelter  trench 
may  be  dug,  and  the  earth  thrown  up  breast  high  against  it 
when  such  command  is  necessary,  and  if  the  hedge  is  strong 
enough  to  support  it. 

In  no  case  should  excavated  earth  be  thrown  in  front  of  the 
hedge,  so  as  to  indicate  its  occupation. 

The  time  required  to  excavate  such  trenches  is  longer  than 
for  ordinary  trenches  on  account  of  the  presence  of  roots, 
and  the  work  required  to  strengthen  the  hedge. 

In  preparing  a  hedge  for  defence,  if  the  top  of  the  bank  on 
which  it  stands  is  not  thick  enough  to  keep  out  bullets,  it 
must  be  made  so. 

Hedges  sometimes  form  very  good  screens  for  field  guns. 
It  would  generally  be  advisable  for  the  guns  to  be  in  action 
about  150  to  300  yards  behind  the  hedge. 

57.  Embankments  are  not  as  a  rule  good  positions  for  a  Embauk- 
firing  line,  because  they  offer  such  a  good  mark  to  the  enemy's  ments. 
artillery,  but  nevertheless  embankments  in  front  of  a  position 

and  parallel  to  it,  will  generally  have  to  be  held. 

Embankments  can  be  defended  by  occupying  the  nearer 
edge,  as  in  Fig.  1,  PI.  12,  or  the  further  edge,  as  in  Fig.  2. 

The  front  edge  gives  the  best  command  of  the  ground  in 
front,  but  cover  can  be  obtained  with  less  labour  at  the  rear 
edge. 

58.  Either  side  of  a  cutting  can  be  defended,  according  to  Cuttings, 
circumstances  (Fig.  3).     The  rear  side  gives  the  best  obstacle  ; 

the  front  side  is  best  for  a  subsequent  advance,  and  secures  good 
shelter  for  supports. 

A  road  cut  on  the  side  of  a  hill  would  generally  be  visible 
to  the  artillery  of  the  attack  for  a  long  distance,  and  therefore 
should  not  be  held  unless  it  offers  special  facihties  for  defence. 

Fig.  4  shows  a  method  of  defending  a  road,  the  fence  or 


28    CHAPTER   VIII. — IMPROVEMENT   OF   EXISTING   COVER,    ETC 

hedge  on  one  side  being  converted  into  an  obstacle^  and  that 
on  the  other  used  as  cover. 


Woods. 

Woods,  59.  Woods  vary  so  much  in  character  that  it  is  impossible 

to  give  general  instructions  for  their  defence  suitable  to  all 
cases.  Those  which  reach  down  towards  the  enemy  are  very 
dangerous  and  require  special  consideration. 

The  two  most  important  attributes  of  woods,  which  are 
common  to  nearly  all,  are  the  obstacle  which  they  make  to 
the  passage  of  troops,  whether  in  defence  or  attack,  and  the 
concealment  they  offer.  As  to  the  obstacle  it  is  the  defenders' 
business  to  arrange  that  it  shall  cause  the  least  inconvenience 
to  his  own,  and  the  greatest  inconvenience  to  the  enemy's 
troops.  The  concealment  afforded  should  be  so  utihsed  as  to 
be  almost  entirely  in  favour  of  the  defence. 

The  front  edge  of  a  wood  very  often  has  a  boundary  capable 
of  being  easily  made  into  a  good  shelter,  while  the  materials 
for  abatis  are  at  hand:  In  order  to  economise  troops,  especially 
if  the  edge  of  the  wood  is  indented,  portions  may  be  defended 
while  the  remainder  is  entangled  ;  the  portions  to  be  defended 
being  those  whence  the  most  fire  can  be  developed.  The  edge 
of  a  wood,  however,  often  offers  a  good  mark  for  the  enemy's 
artillery ;  for  this  reason  it  is  sometimes  desirable  to  place 
the  firing  Hne  some  distance  in  advance. 

Entrenchments  and  breastworks  in  the  interior  of  a  wood 
involve  great  labour  and  should  seldom  be  used.     Where  the 
ground  is  favourable,  clearances  in  front  of  interior  positions 
may  be  made,  and  the  wood  cut  down  made  into  abatis. 
Log  Log  breastworks,  especially  of  hard  wood,  will,  of  course, 

breast-        give  a  good  deal  of  protection  against  bullets,  even  if  it  is  not 
complete. 

If  the  defence  of  the  rear  of  the  wood  is  more  convenient 
than  that  of  the  front,  the  best  arrangement  will  be  to  entangle 
the  rear  edge  and  take  up  a  position  commanding  it  and  some 
distance  behind  it.  The  rear  edge  may  be  cut  so  as  to  leave 
well  defined  saUents.  This  will  induce  the  attackers  to  crowd 
into  these  salients  and  so  make  a  good  target. 


works. 


M^teJZ 


Cuttings  &  Embankments. 


Embankments 


/ly  ; 


/t^    3 


5  t. 

Railway    CuTT'MG.Jkj 


;-SS?^- 


Road  on  Hillside 


y/el!er&  Graham  L'"=    Litho  London 

Opposite  p(xge  2-S  . 


I 


PlxxjbeJS 


Defence  of  a  House 

Doors. 


JE^cczt^  door' 
Str'utte/d/ 


Mg.Z. 

\'\yctk^  atones 


^^f^ff?^^^^^WW?W^^'.. 


Fi^.S. 


^^OjCJ' covers 


Ti^.^. 


IKeJIer  &  Graijam.  L^  ituho.  LondotK. 
Opposite  pa^e  Z^ 


PUUe  Uh 


Defence  of  a  House 


Doors 


JFuj.^. 


l^:Z 


JPntfrnxxL  J^l^^ation 


Windows. 


Tlsf,3, 


JFzff.4^. 


of2»^cJcsrL  starve^  hetivejgrf. 


vVer.er&G'-aham.U?    ^Jtho  ucndon 


CHAPTER  VIII.- -IMPROVEMENT   OF  EXISTING    COVER,  ETC.      29 

Communications  through  the  wood  should  be  improved, 
if  the  front  is  to  be  held  ;  if  the  position  is  in  the  rear  of  the  wood 
and  the  latter  is  merely  to  serve  as  an  obstacle,  they  should 
be  blocked. 

In  making  clearances,  large  trees  should  not  be  felled. 
Much  can  be  clone  by  judicious  thinning. 

With  limited  time,  it  ivill  generally  he  best  to  occupy  it  in 
improving  the  communications  rather  than  in  multiplying 
obstacles. 

Defence  of  Buildings. 

60.  Buildings  can  seldom  be  held  under  artillery  fire.    When  Buildings, 
time  and  labour  are  available  they  may,  however,  be  prepared 

for  defence.     When  screened  from  artillery  fire  they  are  of 
great  value. 

The  principles  for  defence  of  buildings  are  the  same  as  those 
laid  down  in  Chap.  I,  Sec.  1,  but  the  following  special  points 
must  be  dealt  with  : — 

Barricading  of  doors  and  ^vindows  {see  Pis.  13  and  14). 
(One  door  should  be  available  for  use  and  must  be 
specially  dealt  with.)  Arrangements  for  ventilation 
(usually  by  upper  windows)  ;  for  storing  ammunition, 
provisions  and  water ;  for  a  hospital  and  for  latrines  ; 
and  precautions  must  be  taken  against  fire. 
Any  neighbouring  buildings  which  are  not  to  be  occupied, 

should  be  made  useless  to  the  enemy. 
If  the  building  is  large  and  strongly  built,  and  it  is  intended 
to  make  a  determined  defence,  arrange  for  interior 
defence  by  loophohng  partition  walls  and  upper 
floors,  and  providing  movable  barricades  to  cover 
the  retreat  from  one  part  of  the  building  to  the  other. 

Stockades. 

61.  Stockades  are  improvised  defensible    walls,    which,    in  Stockades. 
addition  to  affording  cover  to  their  defenders,   form  a  fair 
obstacle    to    assault.     They    are    only   suitable    for   defences 

of  a  purely  passive  character,  where  not  exposed  to  artillery 
fire. 


30     CHAPTER  VIII. — IMPROVEMENT  OF  EXISTING  COVER,  ETC. 

The  commonest  forms  of  stockade  consist  of  earth,  gravel 
or  broken  stones,  &c.,  between  two  upright  revetments 
The  necessary  thickness  w^ll  be  obtained  from  the  table  in 
Chap.  T,  Sec.  4  {see  PI.  15,  Fig.  1). 

Eails  or  iron  plates,  if  available,  are  useful  materials.  Types 
of  stockades  of  rails  and  sleepers  are  shown  on  PL  15,  Figs.  2 
and  3. 

62.  It  must  be  remembered  that  the  loopholes  through  which 
the  defenders  deliver  their  fire  should  be  so  arranged  that  the 
enemy,  if  he  succeed  in  closing  with  the  obstacle,  will  not  be 
able  to  use  the  loopholes  in  his  turn. 

Loopholes  may  be  formed  of  sandbags  or  by  inserting  a 
plank  box  in  the  earth,  gravel,  &:c.,  taking  care  to  give  some 
splay  to  the  rear  to  admit  of  lateral  range.  They  should  be 
from  3  to  5  feet  apart. 

Loopholes  may  with  advantage  be  bhnded  when  not  in  use 
by  an  old  sandbag  or  piece  of  sacking  in  situations  where  the 
nature  of  the  back  ground  would  indicate  their  position  clearly 
to  the  enemy. 

If  required  two  tiers  of  fire  can  be  obtained  in  a  rail  stockade 
by  arranging  a  staging  of  sleepers  for  the  upper  rank  to  stand 
on,  lea^nng  sufficient  head  room  underneath  the  staging  for 
the  lower  rank  standing  on  the  ground  level.  In  this  case 
there  should  be  a  ditch  in  front. 
Screens.  63.  In  these  da^^s  of  smokeless  powder  the  value  of  screens, 

both  for  attack  and  defence,  cannot  be  over-estimated.  Much 
can  be  done  in  a  close  country  by  judicious  thinning  or  leaving 
of  woods,  trees  and  hedgerows.  Where  no  natural  screens 
exist  they  can  be  made.  Smoke  sometimes  forms  valuable 
cover  for  working  parties,  especially  against  search  hghts. 

Sacks  filled  rather  tightly  with  straw,  left  open  at  each  end 
and  slit  to  allow  the  escape  of  the  smoke,  form  simple  and 
portable  smoke  producers.  They  should  be  lit  in  the  centre 
of  the  straWj  so  as  to  burn  outwards. 


Piafr  15. 


Stockades 


topu^Ceis  dH^€?t^  into  qpyjxt/idL/ 


S'toS'ctpariy 


WelU 'KGri^-aip  L"  urt>o  Lordon 

Oppoicte  page  SO, 


en  AFTER   IX. — EARTHWORKS.  31 


CHAPTER  IX.— EARTHWORKS. 

64.  Earthworks  may  be  classed  generally  under  two  heads,  Earth- 
viz.  : — Trenches  and  Redoubts.  works. 

The  defences  of  an  extended  position  will  usually  be  trenches.  Trenches. 
They  may  be  disposed  in  irregular  lines  arranged  mainly  for 
frontal  fire,  as  may  be  best  suited  to  the  ground,  or  in  groups 
with  intervals.  The  ground  sometimes  permits  of  these 
groups  being  arranged  so  as  to  provide  flanking  fire  for  the 
intervals  and  front  of  other  groups.  In  laying  out  such 
trenches  the  danger  of  enfilade  fire  must  be  considered. 

Redoubts  will    be  used  principally  for  isolated  positions,  Redoubts, 
such  as  posts  on  lines  of  communication,  or  a  chain  of  advanced 
posts  watching  a  long  line  of  front.     When  placed  as  supports 
to  the  front  hne  of  an  extended  position  they  must  be  care- 
fully withdrawn  or  concealed  from  view. 

With  all  intrenchments  invisibility  is  of  the  utmost  impor-  Inrisi- 
tance,  and  is  almost  of  as  much  value  as  the  cover  itself.  bility. 

65.  Every  effort   should  be  made  to   utihse  and  improve  Existing 
existing  cover  in  order  to  save  labour  and  time.     On  the  ^o^^^'- 
defensive  there  will  generally  be  time  to  make  a  trench  before 

the   attack  commences.     In   attacking  across   open  ground, 
under  fire,  men  will  not,  as  a  rule,  be  able  to  stand  up  and  dig.  Attack. 
When  brought  to  a  halt,  they  will  have  to  make  such  cover  as 
they  can  while  lying  down,  but  no  opportunity  should  be  lost 
of  entrenching  ground  that  has  been  gained. 

Siting  of  Trenches — {See  also  "  Combined  Training,"  1905, 
Section  126). 

66.  The  following  points  must  be  considered  : —  Siting  of 
A  good  field  of  fire  ;    this  is  most  important  and  should  trenches. 

not  be  sacrificed  to  any  other  consideration. 

As  much  concealment  as  possible,  particularly  from  the 
enemy's  artillery. 

Ground  in  rear  suitable  for  reserves. 

When  the  position  includes  commanding  ground  the 
firing    hne    need    not    necessarily  be    on    it;    it  should    be 


32 


CHAPTER   IX. — EARTHWORKS. 


Arrangfe- 
ment  of 
trenches. 


in  the  best  position  for  fire  effect.  It  will  often  be  a  good 
plan  to  place  the  firing  line  at  or  near  the  foot  of  a  slope, 
so  as  to  obtain  a  grazing  fire,  with  the  artillery  on  the  high 
ground  above. 

The  advantage  of  high  ground  for  a  defeusive  position  is 
often  over-estimated.  It  need  oidy  be  high  enough  to  conceal 
and  shelter  the  defenders'  reserves  and  their  movements,  and 
to  expose  the  movements  of  the  enemy. 

67.  The  arrangement  of  trenches  should  be  simple.  There 
should  be  one  main  line  of  defence.  Several  tiers  of  trenches 
may  sometimes  be  useful,  to  increase  the  volume  of  defenders' 
fire,  and  also  to  deceive  the  attack  as  to  the  actual  position  of 
the  defence  ;  but  there  should  be  no  idea  of  using  these  trenches 
as  successive  lines  of  defence.  The  defenders  should  understand 
clearly  which  is  the  main  line  of  defence,  and  what  it  is  that 
they  must  hold  on  to  when  the  assault  is  pushed  home. 

The  main  line  should  not  as  a  rule  be  continuous.  If 
echelonned  in  suitable  lengths,  say  for  companies,  or  even 
smaller  units,  it  will  be  more  difficult  for  the  enemy's 
artillery  to  get  the  range. 

In  tracing  a  trench  attention  should  be  paid  to  probable 
enfilade  fire. 

Every  artifice  should  be  used  to  mislead  the  enemy  as  to 
the  positions  of  the  trenches,  e.g.,  conspicuous  dummy  trenches 
to  draw  his  fire. 


Invisibility. 


Tnvisi-  68.  Every  effort  should  be  made  to  conceal  the  trench. 

biiity.  Concealment    may   be    gained   by    (a)    careful   siting,    i.e., 

position,  (h)  Assimilation  to  surrounding  ground.  When 
possible  a  position  should  be  studied  both  before  and  after  the 
construction  of  trenches  from  the  front,  and  especially  from 
the  enemy's  artillery  positions.  Well-marked  features  of 
the  ground,  such  as  isolated  hedge-rows,  Hues  of  road,  sharp 
changes  of  gradient,  or  anything  which  casts  a  shadow  are, 
at  long  ranges,  more  visible  than  the  trenches  themselves. 

The  neighbourhood  of  such  objects  forms  a  target,  especially 
for  artillery  fiie,  and  should  when  possible  be  avoided. 


PlrrJe   JO 


Fire      Trench  es 


Surplus    ea7*th.  m/iy 
he  hecuped-  or  sprecLeL 
in.  re^xr  of  trerhcJv 


*806-S  as 


we'-e'SiGra^aT'  L''  iJtio  Lonoon 
Opposite  pajqie.33. 


CHAPTER   IX. — EARTHWORKS.  33 

The  front  of  the  parapet  maybe  covered  with  sods  or  branches, 
or  whatever  will  make  them  look  like  the  surrounding  ground. 
Sharp  hues  must  be  avoided  and  attention  must  be  paid  to 
back  ground. 

If  the  parapet  is  on  the  skyline,  spare  earth  may  be  piled 
up  behind  the  trench  to  make  a  back  ground  for  the  defenders' 
heads.     As  a  rule,  however,  a  sky  line  is  to  be  avoided. 

The  parapet  should  be  kept  as  low  as  possible  consistent 
with  fire  effect ;    in  some  cases  no  parapet  is  required. 

Trenches. 

69 .  Trenches  are  distinguished  as  "fire  trenches"  and  "cover  Trenches, 
trenches,"  according  as  they  are  for  the  firing  line  or  merely 

to  cover  troops  not  actually  engaged. 

Fire  Trenches. 

70.  The  design  of  the  trench  will  depend  on  the  time  and  Fire 
labour  available,  on  the  soil  and  on  the  siting,  but  the  following  trendies, 
points  are  important  : — 

(1)  The  parapet  should  be  bullet  proof  at  the  top;  2  feet 

6  inches  to  3  feet  will  iLsually  suffice.     But  see  Sec.  i. 

(2)  The  trench  should  be  as  invisible  as  possible. 

(3)  The  interior  slope  should  be  as  steep  as  possible. 

(4)  The  bottom  of  the  trench   (unless  there  is   a  step) 

should  be  wide  enough  to  allow  men  to  sit  in  it. 

(5)  The  interior  should  be  protected,  as  far  as  possible, 

against  oblique  and  enfilade  fire,  and  sometimes  from 
reverse  fire, 
(G)  Drainage  should  be  attended  to. 

71.  Types  of  fire  trench  are  given  in  Pis.  16  and  17,  but  see 
Sec.  .3. 

Fig.  1  gives  good  cover  against  frontal  artillery  fire, 
and  allows  room  for  the  supernumerary  rank  to  pass  behind 
the  firing  line. 

To  excavate  the  normal  length  of  2  paces  of  this  trench 
will  take  an  untrained  man  about  H  hours,  in  moderately 
easy  ground. 

(528'J)  c 


34  CHAPTER   IX. — EARTHWORKS. 

In  Rpecially  difficult  soil  the  width  may  be  reduced  to  2  feet. 

Should  time  be  available,  the  cover  and  the  facility  of  com- 
munication may  be  much  improved  by  deepening  and  widening 
the  trench,  as  shown  on  PI.  16,  Fig.  2. 

Should  a  higher  command  than  1  foot  6  inches  be  required, 
to  enable  the  defenders  to  see  the  ground  in  front,  the  parapet 
must  be  heightened  with  earth  obtained  from  widening  and 
deepening  the  trench.  A  firing  step,  at  least  IJ  feet  wide,  is 
necessary  4J  feet  below  the  top  of  the  parapet,  the  interior 
slope  of  which  must  be  revetted. 

PI.  16,  Fig.  3,  is  a  case  where  the  ground  in  front  can  be  seen 
without  any  command,  and  it  is  desired  to  dispense  with  a 
parapet  for  the  sake  of  concealment.  The  excavated  earth 
must  be  scattered  or  removed  to  form  a  dummy  parapet. 

PI.  44  shows  how  fairly  good  cover  can  be  rapidly  obtained 
for  men  lying  down  ;  the  trenches  can  be  connected  up  £is 
shown  by  the  dotted  lines. 

An  elbow  rest  is  &  useful  feature  in  a  parapet.  It  increases 
cover  considerably,  gives  support  to  the  men  while  firing, 
and  is  convenient  for  ammunition.  It  should  be  9  inches  below 
the  crest  and  18  inches  wide. 

Earth  thrown  up  should  not  le  rammed. 


Head  Cover  and  Loopholes. 

Head  72.  Head  cover  tends  to  diminish  the  number  of  rifles  that 

cover.         p^j-^  i^g  p^^  jj^  ii^Q  ajj(j  reduce  the  field  of  view  and  fire,  and 

generally   makes    the   work    more    conspicuous,    but    is    of 

undoubted     advantage     for     protection,     especially    against 

shrapnel. 

It  requires  careful  arrangement  so  as  to  ensure  the  maxi- 
mum of  fire  effect  and  of  invisibility  with  the  minimum  of 
exposure. 

It   will    usually  be    obtained    by  making    notches    in    the 
parapet  for  the  rifle,  or  by  loopholes. 
Lo'^p-  Loopholes  can  be  made  of  sandbags,  sods,  or  other  materials 

hole^.         available  on  the  spot,  such  as  biscuit  boxes  or  sacks  filled  with 


R^Ltt    J  7 


2 

.^ 

O 

-1 

^ 

O 

o 

^^ 

w 

^ 

^ 

> 

"?3 

o 

w 

-I 

< 

C; 

u 

0! 

1 

I 

z 

h 

'^ 

^ 

to 
q: 

.^ 

I 

o 

^ 

7 

CO 

S 

o 

h 

-|W 

t^ 

"^ 

lli 

Q 

< 

1,1 

'C 

q: 

EC 

ii 

Q 

— 

o 

u. 

D 

^ 

cr 

o 

o 

<0 

UJ 

'O 

to 

y 

a: 

LI 

53 

> 

^ 

< 

a: 

h 

W€Uftr*6rahani.  \J.*  Lirtio.London. 
Opposile  pCLg&  J^4. 


PZccLe  JS. 


Head    Cover  . 

SojixL'bcuf  Loophjole  with.  Loophole  Plcutes 
on  Lei^el^  groujvcL. 

Ftg.    1  Fig.  Z 


Section 


Fi€f.  3 


Sandbag   Loophole 


Sod 


Plan  of  j*ir  Courses 


Plan  of^&tt  Courses 


Stbdks  to  cccrry 
tap  soTLdba^s 


S  ECTION 


ler&Graham.L"  Urho, London 
Opprtsitje  jtctgfi>3S. 


CHAPTER   IX.~  EARTHWORKS^  35 

earth.  The  size  of  the  openings  must  be  governed  by  the 
ground  to  be  covered  by  fire,*  and  can  best  be  regulated  by 
testing  with  a  rifle  with  the  bolt  removed  to  ensure  that 
neither  line  of  sight  nor  line  of  fire  are  obstructed. 

Sandbag  loopholes,  as  shown  in  PI.  18,  Figs.  3  and  4,  can  be  Sandbag 
made  in  a  continuous  line  as  close  as  3  feet  3  inches  from  loophole, 
centre  to  centre. 

Sandbags  sag  a  good  deal  unless  well  supported. 

Loopholes  made  with  earth  or  sandbags  may  have  the  larger 
opening  either  inside  or  outside.  If  the  larger  opening  be 
inside,  the  loophole  is  very  much  less  conspicuous,  which  is 
often  a  point  of  great  importance. 

If  the  larger  opening  be  outside,  a  defender  can  fire  with  much 
greater  ease,  since  he  can  cover  the  whole  arc  without  moving 
his  position. 

The  choice  must  depend  upon  the  requirements  of  the  place. 

A  compromise  between  the  two  above  methods  is  shown  in  , 

PI.  19,  Fig.  1. 

A  very  good  form  of  loophole  which  has  the  advantage  of  Con- 
giving  a  wide   field    of  view,   is   a  slit  all   round  the   work,  tinnous 
continuous,  except  for  the  supports  of  the  material  above  {see  ^^^  ^^  ^' 
PL  25). 

Loopholes  made  with  hard  material,  such  as  stone,  must  have 
the  larger  opening  inside  to  prevent  ricochet. 

Steel  loophole  plates,  see  Figs.  1  and  2,  PI.  18,  are  articles  of  Steel 
store.     They  make  the  best  head  cover,  but  cannot,  as  a  rule,  loophole 
be  provided  for  hasty  defence  work.  plates. 

Loopholes  should  never  show  against  the  skyline,  but 
should  be  blinded,  say,  by  canvas  hung  behind  them.  The 
front  of  the  loophole  may  be  masked  with  branches,  long 
grass,  fee. 

Overhead  Cover. 

73.  Overhead  cover  gives  the  best  protection  against 
shrapnel  from   guns  and   howitzers.      It  is    especially    useful 

*  The  minhiium  depth  of  openings  for  a  parapet  2  feet  6  inches  tliick 
on  level  ground,  using  the  new  service  rirte  at  2,000  yards  range,  is,  for 
the  inside,  six  inches  ;  for  the  outside,  four  inches. 

(5289)  c  2 


3G  CHAPTER   IX,— EARTHWORKS. 

against  oblique  fire  ;  9  to  12  inches  of  earth,  or  say  3  inches 
of  shingle,  supported  by  brushwood  or  other  suitable  material, 
will  suffice.     (PI.  20.) 

Two  sheets  of  corrugated  iron  sloping  to  the  rear  at  about  |, 
afford  good  protection  against  shrapnel  {see  PL  19.)  The 
corrugations  must  be  parallel  to  the  line  of  fire. 

Overhead  cover  of  above  natures  will  not  keep  out  a  common 
shell,  but  the  effect  of  a  burst  in  the  trench  can  be  locahsed 
{see  below). 

A  row  of  heavy  steel  rails  arranged  in  the  same  way  as  the 
corrugated  iron,  has  been  found  to  be  practically  proof  against 
G-inch  howitzer  shells  filled  with  high  explosive. 

Overhead  cover  against  weather  may  be  made  with 
branches,  corrugated  iron,  canvas,  or  any  other  covering 
available. 

See  also  Sec.  88. 

Traverses. 

Traverses.  74.  Open  trenches  and  parapets  which  may  be  exposed  to 
enfilade  fire  and  to  the  oblique  fire  of  artillery,  should  be 
traversed  and  recessed.  Traverses  are  simple  means  of 
gaining  protection  against  enfilading  shell,  and  also  of  localis- 
ing the  effect  of  a  shell  bursting  in  the  trench.  They  are  also 
effective  against  rifle  bullets,  on  account  of  their  flat  trajectory. 
An  irregular  fine  of  trench  will  answer  the  same  purpose,  when 
it  suits  the  ground. 

Against  shrapnel  bullets  coming  obliquely,  or  in  enfilade, 
traverses  will  not  suffice,  on  account  of  the  steep  angle  of 
descent  of  the  bullets.  Eecesses  made  in  the  parapet,  lar^e 
enough  to  hold  one  or  two  men,  give  the  best  protection  against 
these.  See  PL  21.  Such  recesses  are  best  made  after  the 
trench  is  excavated. 

75.  Traverses  to  localise  bursts  may  consist  of  two  walls  of 
brushwood,  with  about  1  foot  of  earth  between. 

Protected  Look-out. 

Look-out.        76.  In  all  trenches  some  sort  of  protected  look-out  is  useful. 
It  should  not  be  distinguishable  from  the  front. 
A  well-made  loophole  may  suffice  for  this  purpose. 


Flate.  J9. 


Fi^.1. 


Sod    Loophole 


J^.2 


Elbow  ^es\ 


SocLs 

Sods  


Overhead    Cover 


-K  /     6 


Welter  &  Graham.  L^f  Litho  London. 


PUlIa  20 


\, 


TTmni 


■3.  I 


0 

UJ 

<o 

1 

at: 

1 

Ul 

-J 

^. 

> 
< 

0 

(0 

1    ?■ 

»- 

> 

<0 

^ 

Q 

< 

^     -^ 

Z 

UJ 

^      co^ 

< 

n 

z 

.^r 

U4 

J? 

-^  J 

(0 

<o 

X 

It 

UJ 

<0 

^  < 

0 

0 

!3       W 

UJ 

u 

>-  "S 

oc 

oe 

S   S 

3C 

3 

s   *, 

u 

UJ 

J-^ 

z 

QC 

UJ 

UJ 

^ 

a: 

? 

H 

P 

? 

111 

^ 

0^1 

v^ 

Plat^  2  J. 


^fic^  e  "9 


TofoULowpUjute20 


PLote  22 


Gun     Epaulment. 


Fr^l 


\    7'.^"      . ^  SecwoTL  on,    A  .a . 


»  V*      ~^-/2«ORy-$"  for  cortt&vt^  o^  <nieJrn.7rSUh^o7z, 


J-,^.  4. 


^  +3' 


Fig.  5. 

SectUnv  across  Wix^on  Grver. 
\  ^       -  j^  LenxjftTh  aucc^rdiTui  toTva/nber* 


WetlerAGraham.  L'^  Lirtio,Lx)ndon. 


Piate   23 


CO 


Gu  N       ;   Pi  t  . 

(On   rear  crest    ifv/t/r  wkson    coi>^er/n  near) 


/OO 


F^ — irt     GUN     PIT 


'%1li]!iLli% 


^ 
^ 


-30 


97 


34- 


91 


88 


'^    k: 


/O' 


^ 


rear  crest   of  hill 


COVER      FOR    ^ 
WAGONS.       ^ 


<.. 


Section    on    AB 


-/-/•6 


Section 


S/tfe-   •  r..      we;!ers.r-a-3r 


To  follon' plate  22. 


chaftrr  ix.— earthworks.  ^  37 

Drainage  of  Trenches. 

77.  This  is  an   important  point,    and  should  be  attended  r)rainage. 
to  from  the  outset.     A  gutter  should  be  formed  in  the  trench, 
usually  at  the  back,  and  the  bottom  of  the  trench  sloped  to 

it.  Any  water  collecting  in  it  should,  where  possible,  be  led  off 
to  lower  ground,  otherwise  into  soak  pits,  which  may  be  about 
2  feet  or  3  feet  in  diameter  and  3  feet  deep. 

Communication  Trenches. 

78.  If    time    admits    covered    communications  should    be  Communi- 
arranfTed  behind  the  firine  line.     These,  while  concealing  the  cation 
movements  of  the  defenders,  will  also  permit  of  the  firing  line 

being  withdrawn  altogether  while  the  artillery  bombardment  is 
going  on.  A  trench  similar  to  PI.  16,  Fig.  4,  will  usually 
suffice. 

It  may  be  necessary  to  make  long  lines  of  such  approaches, 
but  every  possible  use  should  be  made  of  the  ground  to  mini- 
mise labour  on  them. 

They  may  require  parapets  on  both  sides,  and  where  much 
exposed  may  be  given  overhead  cover. 

Cover  Trenches. 

79.  Cover  trenches  {see  PI.  24,  Fig.  1)  are  useful  to  protect  the  Cover 
firing  line  during  a  bombardment,  and  for  troops  not  actually  trenches, 
engaged. 

The  section  of  these  trenches  may  be  as  in  that  figure,  or, 
if  more  time  and  material  be  available,  as  in  Pis.  28  and  29. 
When  time  is  limited  and  materials  are  not  at  hand,  a  section 
similar  to  PI.  16,  Fig.  1,  might  be  employed,  but  with  slightly 
higher  parapet  and  no  elbow  rest. 

Cover  for  Artillery. 

80.  Cover  for  field  guns  will  take  the  form  of  epaulments,  or  Cover 
pits,  as  shown  in  Pis.  22  and  23.     An  ammunition  recess  must  for 

be  provided  close  to  the  gun,  and  cover  for  one  or  more  ammu-  ^^'"^^^7- 
nition  wagons  near  the  emplacement  is  also  desirable.      There 
should  be  covered  communication  between  the  gun  emplace- 
ment  and  the  wagons.     Parapets  to   be  bullet  and  sphnter 


38 


CHAPTER    IX.— EARTHWORKS. 


proof.  The  height  of  the  parapet  should  be  regulated  by  the 
site  and  range.  Three  feet  is  suitable  for  medium  and  long 
ranges.  Howitzers  will,  as  a  rule,  be  in  concealed  positions, 
wdierc  they  can  only  be  reached  by  high  angle  fire.  If  they 
are  likely  to  be  for  some  time  in  one  position,  e.g.,  in  siege 
operations,  they  can  be  surrounded  by  splinter-proof  walls 
[see  Traverses). 


Field 

redoubts. 

Definition. 

Kmploj- 
ment. 


Detached 
posts. 


Trace. 


Field  Redoubts. 

81.  Field  redoubts  are  Avorks  entirely  enclosed  by  defensible 
parapets.  Their  dimensions  should,  as  a  rule,  be  such  that 
they  could  be  constructed  in  from  12  hours  to  24  hours. 

It  may  be  generally  laid  dowm  that  redoubts  in  defensive 
positions  must  not,  under  ordinary  conditions,  be  used  on  sites 
w^here  they  can  be  recognised  as  redoubts  by  the  enemy: 
This  \\\\\,  as  a  rule,  prevent  their  employment  in  the  front  line, 
although  irregularities  of  the  ground,  &c.,  may  shelter  certain 
portions  of  this  line  where  redoubts  may  find  place.  A  redoubt 
has  greater  resisting  power  against  infantry  than  a  group  ol 
trenches. 

As  supporting  points  in  rear  of  the  front  hne,  redoubts  w^ill 
more  often  be  employed.  In  such  retired  positions  there  will 
generally  be  sites  which,  while  commanding  the  foreground, 
will  not  be  exposed  to  view  from  a  distance. 

It  should  be  remembered  that  a  redoubt  does  not  necessarily 
need  a  high  or  thick  parapet ;  a  fire  trench  parapet  may  suffice. 

82.  Redoubts  may  have  to  be  used  for  detached  posts,  and 
posts  in  lines  of  communication.  Such  works  wall  often  have 
to  be  a  refuge,  shelter  and  depot  for  passing  troops,  and  room 
inside  must  be  given.  It  will  hardly  be  possible  to  make  these 
works  invisible,  as  it  is  essential  that  the  parapets  should 
conceal  the  interior  from  view\  Plenty  of  splinter-proof  cover 
should  be  provided,  and  a  good  obstacle  near  the  parapet  is 
essential. 

83.  The  plan  or  trace  of  a  redoubt  will  depend  on — 

(a)  Fire  effect  required  from  it. 
(6)  Configuration  of  the  ground, 
(c)  Proposed  garrison. 


Plate  Z^. 


Cover    Trenches 
Fig    r 


REDOUBT(Low  Command) 

111. 


Gerve^aL    JPZccn^ 


JE^,Z^ 


JUL 


-K---. 


WIL 


"IVTi^N.    lOrrven^  X  10. me^      -<''XA'\ 


JPlany  of^Shelter'S. 


430S.B   OS. 


Welleri Graham. L'^  Irrtio.LonJorv, 

Opposite  pa^e>39 


FJjubt  25. 


■</eli»rfcGraha(»  V*  Lirtio. London 

To  follow plale^ 24 


CHAPTER   IX.— EARTHWORKS.  39 

84.  The  site  should  be  such  that  the  surrounding  foreground  Site, 
may  be  well  swept  by  the  fire  from  the  parapet,  and  the  work 
should  be  so  disposed  as  to  give  the  strongest   possible  fire  on 

the  enemy's  best  lines  of  attack.     There  must  be  no  dead  angles. 

A  redoubt  may  be  of  any  shape  that  suits  the  ground  and 
provides  good  firing  fines.  There  is  no  necessity  for  symmetry 
in  the  design,  although  it  has  advantages.  On  a  level  site 
a  rectangle  with  blunted  angles  would  be  suitable. 

All  faces  should  be  long  enough  to  give  an  effective  fire. 
Those  making  a  considerable  angle  with  neighbouring  faces, 
as  in  a  rectangle,  should  not  be  less  than  20  yards  long,  and 
the  short  faces  which  blunt  the  angles  should  be  at  least 
10  yards. 

It  is  often  convenient  to  use  curved  faces.  These,  as  a  rule, 
should  be  struck  with  a  radius  of  not  less  than  20  yards. 
A  complete  circle  should  be  avoided,  except  for  very  small  posts, 
as  its  fire  is  weak  in  every  direction. 

85.  The   garrison   should   always  consist   of   one   or   more  Garrison, 
units  of  command.     The  proportion  of  defenders,  including 
supports  and  local  reserves,  to  size  of  work  should  be  from 

1  to  IJ  men   per   yard    of    parapet,    but    the  proportion  of 
parapet  to  men  may  have  to  be  much  larger. 

86.  In  a  redoubt   in  front   line  exposed   to   artillery  fire  Low 
invisibihty  is  the  first  consideration.      This  will  entail  in  most  command 
cases  a  low  command,  about  the  same  as  that  of  the  neighbour-  I'^doubt. 
ing  fire  trenches.     This  should  be  combined,  w^hen  time  per- 
mits, with  a  deep  trench  in  rear,  both  to  increase  the  cover 

and  to  afford  cover  to  troops  not  actually  engaged.     A  redoubt 
of  this  type  is  shown  on  Pis.  24  and  25. 

87.  For  a  work  placed  as  a  supporting  point  behind  the  High 
front  line,  the  question  of  invisibility  is  not  generally  so  urgent,  command 
In  this  case  a  high  command  has  four  advantages  : — 

(1)  It  has  a  better  command  of  its  field  of  fire  than  a  low 

redoubt. 

(2)  It  has  a  better  moral  effect  on  its  defenders. 

(3)  It  conceals  the  whole  of  the  interior  of  the  redoubt 

from  view. 

(4)  It  can  be  easily  combined  with  a  good  obstacle. 


40 


CHAPTER  IX. — EARTHWORKS. 


Reverse 
fire. 

Overhead 
cover. 


The  disadvantages  lie  in  the  extra  labour  and  time  entailed 
in  making  the  large  parapet. 

In  the  case  of  a  detached  post,  which  may  be  surrounded, 
invisibility  is  of  much  less  importance  than  that  the  defenders 
should  be  able  to  move  freely  about  the  whole  interior  of  the 
work  without  being  seen. 

A  type  of  parapet  with  high  command  is  shown  in  PL  26. 

Since  a  redoubt  is  intended  for  all  round  defence,  precautions 
must  be  taken  to  prevent  the  defenders  suffering  from  reverse 
fire. 

88.  Overhead  cover  for  a  redoubt  should  consist  of  about 
9  to  12  inches  of  earth  supported  on  brushwood  or  other 
material. 

Various  forms  of  these  shelters  are  shown  on  Pis,  26,  27,  28, 
and  29.  They  all  require  a  great  deal  of  material.  They 
should  always  be  given  transverse  partitions,  at  intervals  of 
from  10  feet  to  12  feet,  to  localise  the  effect  of  sheU. 

A  fairly  bomb-proof  roof  can  be  made  with  rails  sloping 
down  from  line  of  fire  [see  Chap,  IX,  p.  36). 

Shelters  for  the  flanks,  when  artillery  attack  is  expected 
from  the  front  only,  may  be  given  in  trenches  roughly  parallel 
to  the  front  faces  ;  some  of  these  may  be  continued  with  ad- 
vantage across  the  whole  redoubt,  for  purposes  of  com- 
munication. 

When  the  artillery  attack  may  come  from  any  direction, 
as  with  some  detached  posts,  the  shelters  must  be  arranged  to 
meet  this  by  facing  various  directions. 
Entrances.  89.  The  entrance  to  a  redoubt  used  in  civilised  war  may  be 
a  gap  left  in  the  face  least  exposed  to  attack,  and  covered 
by  a  traverse,  inside  or  out  as  may  be  most  convenient.  The 
entrance  should  be  wide  enough  to  admit  a  wagon,  see 
Chap.  XXII. 

90.  The  drainage  of  the  redoubt  and  trenches  must  always 
be  provided  for,  and  should  be  put  in  hand  as  soon  as  the  work 
is  commenced.  Soak  pits  will  seldom  suffice  for  this  purpose, 
and,  as  a  rule,  the  drains  should  be  led  out  of  the  redoubt 
to  lower  ground  if  possible. 

91.  When  a  redoubt  is  to  be  occupied  for  more  than  a  few 
hours,  latrines  and  cooking-places  should  be  provided  within 
it. 


Drainage. 


Latrines, 
&c. 


Ql 
< 

I 

ml 

I  Si 


h 
CQ 
D 
O 
Q 

UJ!  ofti 

'  UJ: 
z  ° 

O'     -, 

Ol  uii 
i  U): 

X'   ^' 
O     > 

—  I   < 


>  o 

UJ  o 

°-5 

O  111     u 
H  g    ,6 

Ul   <0    (/) 
O  UJ   (/> 

«*  ;^ 

z  o  0^ 
-  _i  o 

^  ^  ^ 
o  o   o 

>  08  >- 

l>  = 

?    UJ     ^ 

°  J  i 

y   H    > 


Z   10 

< 

UJ    < 

si 

2  o 

O  I 

->  10 


WtllerfcGrdhdni.  L'^  Lirho.London 
Opposite  pajCfB'  40 


WeilertGraham  L'.'  Litho, London 

To  folZow  plaJ^.  Z6. 


/^lal^  2S 


WellerlGrsham f*  Urho.Looden 


Vlat^  29 


HASTY 


R  EDOU  BT 


BLINDAGE     IN     REAR    OF     FIRE  TRENCH 


SectCoTh  t/iro '  ^iCrtjcLcyfe^ . 


Weiler*  Graham.  L""     LiLho  London 

To  fcUow  plodbe  28 


CHAPTER    X. — OBSTACLES.  41 

92.  Obstacles    should    always   be    provided   in  connection  Obstacles, 
with   redoubts.     They  must  not  mark  the  j^osition    of    the 
redoubts. 

The  nearer  the  obstacle  is  to  the  parapet  the  less  labour 
and  material  will  be  required,  and  the  more  efiective  will  be 
the  defence,  especially  at  night. 


CHAPTER   X.— OBSTACLES. 
For  time,  labour,  tools  aiid  material  required,  see  table,  p.  120. 

93.  Obstacles  judiciously  placed  add  very  much  to  the  strength  General 
of  a  defensive  position,  and  are  especially  useful  as  a  protection  eonditious 
against  night  attacks.     The  following  conditions  should  be 
observed  : — 

(a)  They  should  be  under  the  close  rifle  fire  of  the  defender. 

For  small  posts  or  redoubts  they  should  be  quite  close, 
so  that  they  may  be  effectively  defended  at  night. 
They  should  afford  the  enemy  no  cover,  and,  if 
possible,  be  sheltered  from  his  artillery  fire. 

(b)  They  should  be  difficult  to  remove  or  surmount,  and 

will  be  most  effective  if  special  appliances,  not  usually 
carried  by  troops,  are  required  for  their  removal. 

(c)  They  should,  if  possible,  be  so  placed  that  their  exact 

position  may  be  unknown  to  the  attacking  force. 

(d)  Except  where  the  purely  defensive  is  inevitable,  they 

should  be  arranged  so  as  not  to  impede  counter 
attacks. 

(e)  As  obstacles  on  a  large  scale  may  interfere  with  an  Caution. 

advance,  they  should  not  be  constructed  without 
authority. 

For  the  protection  of  small  posts  at  night  some  sort  of 
automatic  alarm  is  desirable,  such  as  tins  hung  on  a  wire, 
rifles  fired  by  trip  wire,  &c.,  see  p.  47. 


42  CHAPTER    X. — OBSTACLES. 

abatis.  94.  Abatis  formed  of  limbs  of  trees  firmly  picketed  down  and 

interlaced,  with  the  branches  turned  towards  the  enemy 
and  pointed,  form  a  very  efficient  obstacle  (PI.  30). 

Figs.  1  and  2  show  method  of  covering  abatis  from  artillery 
fire. 

Fig.  3. — The  method  of  forming  an  abatis  from  small 
branches.  Several  rows  are  used,  the  excavated  earth  being 
replaced  after  the  branches  are  secured.  To  make  abatis 
carefully,  at  least  a  relief  of  six  hours  and  a  strong  working  party 
are  required,  so  that  very  little  of  it  can  be  undertaken  in 
hastily-fortified  positions.  A  very  effective  abatis  may,  how- 
ever, be  made  much  more  rapidly  when  the  trees  can  be 
utilised  where  they  are  felled,  no  excavation  being  made  for 
them  and  the  branches  being  only  roughly  trimmed. 

Strands  of  wire  interlaced  between  the  branches  are  a  useful 
adjunct  to  abatis. 
Tree  95.  Tree  entanglements  (Fig.  4,  PI.  30)  are  formed  by  cutting 

entangle-  trees,  brushwood,  &c.,  nearly  through  at  a  height  of  about 
3  feet,  and  interlacing  or  securing  the  branches  by  pickets 
to  the  ground.  They  make  a  formidable  obstacle  at  the  edges 
of  woods  and  orchards,  and  for  blocking  roads,  and  can  often 
be  formed  w^hilst  clearing  the  foreground. 

Wire  96.  A  low  wire  entanglement   is    formed   by  stout   stakes 

entangle-    (Jnyen  into  the  ground  about  6  feet  apart,  in  rows  arranged 

Low  ^'        chequerwise,   their  heads   being   connected    by   strong   w^ires 

twisted  round  them  and  crossing  diagonally  about  1  foot  or 

18  inches  above  the  ground  (Fig.  3,  PL  31). 

The  outside  pickets  should  have  ware  stays,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  3. 

It  is  not  a  good  obstacle  unless  constructed  amongst  brush- 
wood, small  bushes,  or  long  grass,  which  conceal  it,  when  it 
may  be  of  great  use  against  mounted  troops.  It  is  especially 
effective  in  the  bed  of  a  river. 

High.  97.  High  wire  entanglements   form  effective  obstacles,  es- 

pecially if  barbed  wire  be  used.  PI.  31,  Figs.  1  and  4,  give 
two  different  types.  Fig.  4  shows  a  method  of  improving  a 
wire  fence,  but  is  not  so  efficient  an  obstacle  as  that  shown  in 


ments. 


I^lcutG   30. 


Obstacles 

Abatis. 


j^  1 


Palisades 


Fi^.5 


4<  N  A 

1 
K 

I 


l'    '         '    'i    iil 'I]      I  "  111 ';    "I    |I|iil '-11  'I' '    I  1  I 


FlxuL  of  PcLbuscule 


»60B3O5. 


Welter  &  Graham.  L^    LithaLowJon. 
Opposite  p^e.  4Z. 


Pictte^Sl. 


F^,1. 


Obstacles. 

High  wire  Entanqlement 

Dixfj^onxxX  -yytres  .<ihou2jdb  he'  ccivrvecf  eel ^  by  TwruumtaZ' 
-wJT-'&s  omxtted^  yyt,  J^jgr  J .  ibr-  seeks  of  deaTm^s^. 


the^  'hjori;z/7T€taX  m/lt^s  are  cdjba^KfjJf. 


Fi^.3 


Low  WIRE  Entanglement. 


Stof 


Fz^    i  . 


Barbed   wires 


WcJIcr  4  Graham.  L**^  UthoLondon. 
Opposite  poLge  ^3. 


CHAPTER   X. — OBSTACLES.  43 

Fig.  1.  The  pickets  should  be  about  4  or  5  feet  high,  driven 
firmly  into  the  ground  and  sta3^ed  as  in  the  low  wire 
entanglement. 

Where  two  wires  cross  they  should  be  fastened  together  with 
fine  wire  or  string.  Where  materials  are  available  the  obstacle 
should  be  two  or  three  rows  deep. 

98.  Palisades  are  occasionally  used  for  the  defence  of  ditches,  Palisades, 
and  for  closing  the  rear  or  gorges  of  partially  enclosed  works. 

They  would  principally  be  employed  in  savage  warfare.  They 
are  made  of  timbers  about  10  feet  long,  arranged  so  as  to  form 
a  stout  open  paling,  and  pointed  or  spiked  at  the  top.  The 
timbers  may  be  round,  spUt,  or  sawn  to  a  rectangular  or  tri- 
angular section ;  they  should  be  6  inches  to  8  inches  wide, 
and  are  placed  upright  about  4  inches  apart,  and  spiked 
to  two  ribands  about  1  foot  from  either  end,  the  butt  ends 
being  sunk  3  feet  or  4  feet  into  the  ground.  The  top  riband 
should  be  on  the  defenders'  side  of  the  palisade.  They  are 
most  conveniently  made  and  placed  in  lengths  of  10  feet  or 
12  feet,  the  ribands  being  arranged  so  as  to  overlap. 
(PI.  30,  Fig.  5.) 

99.  Fraises  are  palisades  placed  horizontally,  or  nearly  so.  Fraises. 
They  should  point   downwards   if   placed   on  the   defenders' 

side  of  the  ditch  and  upwards  if  on  the  enemy's  side.  Both 
ribands  are  buried,  the  one  nearest  the  points  being  placed 
underneath,  the  other  on  top.  The  points  should,  if  possible, 
be  at  least  7  feet  above  the  bottom  of  a  ditch. 

100.  Barricades,  used  to  close  streets,  roads  and  bridges,  Barri- 
can  be  made  of  any  materials  at  hand.     They  should  not,  as  a  cades, 
rule,  completely  close  the  road  to  traffic,  but  be  made  in  two 
overlapping  portions,   or  be  placed  where  a  house  standing 
back  from  the  general  line  of  building  allows  a  passage  round 

the  barricade. 

The  defenders  should  be  able  to  fire  over  them,  and,  if 
placed  in  a  street,  they  should  be  flanked  both  in  front  and 
rear  by  the  fire  from  adjacent  houses. 

101.  Foagasses  and  land  mines  {see  "Instruction  in  Military  Foujjas'es 
Engineering,"  Part  I)  are  a  useful   adjunct  to  the  defence.  ^"^  ^*"*1 
They  should  only  be  laid  by  officers  who  have  a  thorough  ^^^°^^' 
knowledge  of  explosives. 


44 


CHAPTER    XI. — DEFENCE    OF    POSTS,    VILLAGES,    ETC. 


Inunda- 
tions. 


Passage  of 
obstacles. 


Illumina- 
tion of 
obstacles. 


General. 


Choice  of 
ground. 


102.  Inundations  can  be  made  by  damming  up  a  stream. 
A  bridge  is  a  good  place  to  select  for  the  purpose. 

If  the  inundation  is  likely  to  be  very  shallow,  the  ground 
should  be  first  prepared  by  digging  irregular  trenches  and  holes, 
the  existence  of  which  will  render  the  passage  of  even  a  shallow 
inundation  a  difficult  matter. 

103.  Obstacles  may  be  crossed  by  using  hurdles,  planks, 
fascines,  bundles  of  straw,  &c.,  or  by  rough  ladders  with  steps 
made  of  pieces  of  plank  about  9  inches  wide  and  a  pace  apart. 
Handsaws,  axes,  bill-hooks  and  cutting  pliers  should  always 
be  carried  by  a  party  removing  obstacles.  Ropes,  grapnels, 
hedgers'  gloves  and  guncotton  may  also  be  useful. 

104.  For  illumination  of  obstacles  see  page  47. 


CHAPTER  XI.— DEFENCE  OF  POSTS  AND  VILLAGES. 

Organisation  for  Defence  of  Large  Positions. 

{See  also  "  Combined  Training,"  1905,  Section  123  and 
following  Sections.) 

105.  Campaigns  of  the  present  time  often  entail  a  long 
line  of  communications  in  a  more  or  less  hostile  country. 
Even  when  protected  by  a  field  army  this  is,  if  the  enemy  is 
strong  in  mounted  troops,  very  liable  to  raids  and  must  there- 
fore be  protected  by  fortified  posts.  These  posts  may  involve 
(a)  the  protection  of  a  comparatively  large  area  of  ground  or  of 
villages  containing  supply  depots,  and  will,  in  the  case  of  a  road, 
have  to  afford  protection  to  the  convoys  and  transport  animals 
which  are  working  along  it,  or,  if  on  a  railway,  to  protect 
rolling  stock,  station  buildings,  telegraph  stations,  &c. ;  or 
(6)  may  only  have  to  protect  a  very  hmited  area,  e.g.,  bridges, 
signalUng  stations. 

106.  For  strategic  or  other  reasons  the  choice  of  ground 
for  a  post  may  be  limited.  Tactically  the  ground  to  be 
defended  will  not  always  be  of  the  best,  and  the  art  of  the 
field  engineer  will  be  taxed  to  the  utmost.  Water  may  not 
be  readily  obtainable,  and  may  have  to  be  stored ;  to  insure 
that  this  and  all  other  supplies  are  easily  accessible,  much 
forethought  is  required. 


CHAPTER    XI. — DEFENCE    OF   POSTS    AND    VILLAGES.  45 

107.  Every  man  employed  on  communications  is  in  a  sense  Scheme  of 
wasted,  therefore  the  garrisons  of  such  posts  must  be  kept  as  i^ptV-nce, 
low  as  possible,  and  every  effort  made  by  the  skilful  use  of  g^'"'^**^°^' 
ground  and  field  fortifications  to  economise  men. 

The  main  princij^les  to  bear  in  mind  are  as  follows  : — 
{a)  Organisation  of  defence. 

(b)  Defenders  to  be  close  to  the  ground  they  have  to  defend. 

(c)  Storage  of  ammunition,  water  and  supplies.      Strong 

obstacles  (automatic  alarms  if  possible). 
{d)  Clear  field  of  fire,  adequate  cover,  good  communica- 
tions,   including    telephones,    telegraphs,    or    a    well 
organised  system  of  signalUng. 

Plenty  of  time  is  usually  available  for  the  organisation 
of  the  defence,  and  in  these  days  of  rapid  fire,  given  adequate 
supplies  of  ammunition,  food,  water  and  material,  small  posts 
can  be  made  practically  impregnable  against  raid  attacks, 
even  though  the  invaders  be  accompanied  by  a  few  guns  ; 
while  larger  posts  can  be  so  held  that,  even  should  the  enemy 
be  able  to  penetrate  under  cover  of  darkness,  the  risk  and 
loss  involved  would  be  hardly  worth  the  attempt. 

Owing  to  the  paucity  of  troops  the  defence  will  usually 
be  entirely  passive,  and  except  for  a  small  reserve  to  meet 
emergencies,  every  man  will  have  his  post  assigned  to  him, 
and  every  rifle  will  be  in  the  first  hne.  Works  and  picquets 
suddenly  attacked  at  night  cannot,  as  a  rule,  be  reinforced  from 
a  distance,  and  for  this  reason  it  is  essential  that  the  garrisons 
told  off  for  the  defence  of  such  works  should  live  quite  close  to 
them. 

108.  The  defence  of  a  post  of  class  (a)  (Sec.  105)  will  consist  Detail, 
of  a  ring  of  closed  works  supporting  each  other ;  the  number  and 
distance  from  the  centre  will  depend  on  the  ground  and  troops 
available  ;  the  intervals  will  be  closed  by  a  strong  obstacle, 
which  latter  must  be  flanked  by  a  fire  from  the  works.  The 
works  themselves,  in  view  of  a  night  attack,  must  be  sur- 
rounded by  an  efficient  obstacle  at  a  very  close  range,  say 
20  to  50  yards.  The  field  of  fire  must,  of  course,  be  cleared  as 
much  as  possible.  In  most  cases  an  inner  hne  of  defences 
will  also  be  required,  and  possibly  a  "  keep.'* 


4G        CHAPTER    XI.— IJEFENCE    OF   POSTS,    VILLAGES,    ETC. 

Tiiis  ring  of  defences  will  not  be  of  as  elaborate  a  pattern 
as  those  of  the  outer  line,  described  in  the  paragraph  following, 
and  will  generally  consist  of  fortified  houses,  garden  enclosures, 
small  blockhouses,  &c.,  placed  in  the  immediate  outskirts 
of  the  village  or  depot,  and  arranged  so  as  to  sweep  all  approaches 
and  internal  communications. 

The  posts  of  class  (6)  will  consist  of  only  one  or  two  of  the 
above  works,  and  their  garrisons  may  vary  from  say  6  to  50 
men. 
Type  of  109.  The  types  of  works  will  necessarily  depend  on  the  nature 

work.  Qf  ^]^Q  probable  attack.     If  the  enemy  is  provided  with  artillery 

deep  trenches  and  splinter  proof  cover  must  be  provided 
(unless  the  ground  affords  adequate  cover  close  at  hand) ; 
against  rifles  only,  walls  or  blockhouses  may  suffice.  Against 
badly  armed  savages  stockaded  enclosures  are  good  enough. 

Invisibility  is  not  essential,  but  every  effort  must  be  taken, 
with  due  regard  to  effective  rifle  fire,  to  protect  the  defenders. 
To  this  end  head  cover  is  necessary,  and  overhead  cover  often 
desirable,  while,  since  the  attack  is  hkely  to  come  from  every 
direction,  enfilade  and  reverse  fire  must  be  considered.  Each 
of  these  closed  works  must  be  self-contained,  the  storage  of 
reserve  ammunition  and  water  is  imperative. 
Design  HQ.  The  construction  of  the  works  will  mainly  depend  on 

construe-  ^^le  materials  locally  available.  South  Africa  produced  corru- 
uorks.  gated  iron  and  shingle  blockhouses  surrounded  by  barbed 
wire  ;  on  the  north-west  frontier  of  India  stone  sangars  are 
the  rule  ;  in  the  Lushai  Expedition  of  1889  bamboo  stockades 
were  made  ;  in  the  Soudan  breastworks  of  sand  and  thorn 
zerebas.  Where  railway  stations  have  to  be  protected, 
blockhouses,  stockades  and  splinter  proofs  made  of  rails  and 
loopholed  buildings  will  predominate,  while  for  a  bridge  the 
piers  and  girders  can  often,  with  a  little  ingenuity,  be  made 
into  good  cover  for  a  small  post. 

In  savage  warfare  the  best  hints  as  to  designs  may  generally 
be  got  from  the  enemy,  who,  in  the  course  of  intertribal  warfare, 
will  most  likely  have  evolved  the  types  of  defence  best  suited 
for  local  materials,  and  to  resist  the  same  form  of  attack  and 
weapons  which  he  will  employ  against  us.  Such  types,  when 
improved  by  the  light  of  our  own  knowledge,  modified  to 


£iiZ££z 


Defence  of  a  Post  on  a  line  of  Communications  . 

{Springfontein  —South  African  iVar/899-OZ .) 

1  nil 

FORU® 


i^^UCvmphmaitfafftflea 


TUjcLc  33 


Defensible       Post 
UcHA  Jawa  1897. 


To  follow  plate  32>. 


I'LuU  34. 

Defensible 

POST. 

Burma 

_K^ 

r.  /. 

Fig,  2^. 


m^- 


JFl^.S 


Profile    of   Stockade 


k 


3a/776>oo  'SfocAa<^e. 


Strong  bamboo j^     ^7>t^^„  „ 

'  to 
around. 


WederiGraham.  'J*   LiHiotondon 

To  f'oVifrw  jjlxxte^  33, 


I'Ujt,  :i5 


Defensible     Post. 

LusHAi    1889. 

(For  section  across  Stockade ^  see  P/ate  ^Z.) 


7'o  foUjn^'  pljoJj^J^} 


pixxju.  se 


welier  6. Graham.  Lf^  brt>o,Loix»«fl 
To  follow  pCaJ^35. 


PUitsSl, 


in 

O 
X 

o 
o 

_» 


CCS 


Q^l 


51 

a: 'I 

°=! 

o 


z 

It  ^ 

^^ 

Ill 
or 

■S   i    ^ 

< 

o 

h- 

"^  ^ 

a 

Hi> 

z 

;i3? 

3 

O 

^r|-^ 

o 

UH 

R  t  ^  "^ 

a: 

vN«. 

^^ 

-  a 

l..1 

.3^ 

'^     i 

it 

■   '-; 

*S»S.ti.ts. 


WtllerSi  Graham.  Lr^  Limo.Ujndon. 

To  folloyv  pla.tR  36 


«i 


1 


MxxtBJS 


SECTION     A.B 


TtoeToTSW. 


Weller&Graham   L"^  L 


61 


JPlxjte  39 


WelleriGraham  '  *.*  Li»t\o.London 

To  foiLo^y  pUf^  38. 


Flrrfe  ^0 


VVcller*  Graham. Ltd    Litho.London 


Tlate  4i. 


7b  foOoM  pl^xte.  4€. 


*? 


Flrite^  42 


Fixed    Rifle  Batteries. 


/%./ 


z.  s 

Caracas   16    -vvvd^t- 


Z'A'  7 slot 


'3lrj7i^  T^fi/Jv  strvn^a 


3  ^  1  /z 


i.... 


4  •6"" 


^curthi\ 


r-*-».,»,^ 


Fvg.2  . 


Elevation  . 
^  y[J.j>l'?ie  z  -^"^  z:_  ,yL  ....>. 


,f^X  B^, 


eloTTfip 


!      S'V/z 


430&  :e 


Wellerjr  Graham,  L?^    Litho.  London, 


h^lcLie, 


foVUm- 


CHAPTER    XI. — DEFENCE    OF   POSTS,    VILLAGES,    ETC.  47 

suit  our  weapons,  and  executed  with  the  aid  of  good  tools 
and  engineering  skill,  will,  as  a  rule,  be  suitable  for  our  own 
use.     For  types  of  such  defence,  see  Pis.  32  to  41. 

111.  Automatic  alarms  and  flare  lights,  worked  mechanically  Alarms 
or  by  electricity,  are  useful  where  night  attacks  may  be  ex-  *^^  flares, 
pected.      They  are   usually  combined  with  obstacles.      One 

of  the  simplest  alarms  is  a  row  of  tin  pots,  each  containing  a 
pebble,  hung  on  a  wire  fence  so  as  to  rattle  when  the  latter 
is  disturbed.  A  piece  of  tin,  2  inches  to  3  inches  in  diameter, 
e.g.,  the  top  of  a  tin  pot,  bent  round  the  wires  answers  the 
same  purpose.  Trip  wires  can  be  arranged  to  fire  a  rifle  or  to 
fire  a  cartridge,  which  in  its  turn  will  ignite  a  flare  {see  PI.  43). 

For  electric  alarms,  see  Part  1, 1.M.E. 

Arrangements  for  automatic  alarm  signals  in  connection 
with  entanglements  or  intermediate  fences,  generally  have  to 
be  improvised  on  the  spot  with  whatever  material  is  available. 

112.  The  spring  gun  shown  in  sketch  (PI.  37)  is  simple  to  fix  Meclmni- 
and  is  reliable  in  its  action ;    another  mechanical  device    is  cal  alarms, 
shown  in  PI.  43. 

113.  Means  of  temporarily  illuminating  the  foreground  will  lHumiua- 
suggest  themselves  according  to  the  material  available.     The  ^^^"  ^^ 
illumination  must  be  arranged  so  as  to  leave  the  defenders  in  ground, 
shadow. 

A  "flare  "  made  of  tow  and  oil  is  described  on  PL  43.  A 
special  illuminant  is  made  in  the  Ordnance  Factories  under 
the  name  of  "  Lights,  illuminating,  wreck."  This  can  be  lit 
with  a  match  or  with  either  instantaneous,  or  safety  fuze. 
The  instantaneous  fuze  should  be  stripped  to  ensure  good 
contact.  The  light  will  illuminate  a  circle  up  to  about  100  yards 
diameter  and  will  burn  for  20  minutes. 

114.  On  a  dark  night  it  is  difficult  to  ensure  the  men's  rifles  Fixed  rifle 
being  aimed  in  the  required  direction.     Any  device  to  assist  i*«st. 
them  in  this  matter  is  useful.      In  the  South  African  war  of 
1899-1902  "  fixed  rifle  rests  "   were  employed  to  fire  along 

the  obstacle.  By  the  arrangement  shown  in  PI.  42,  a  number 
of  rifles  can  be  clamped  in  the  required  direction  and  elevation, 
while  only  one  man,  who  can  be  practically  under  cover, 
is  required  to  load  them;  failing  this,  some  such  device  as  a 
wooden  bar  can  be  arranged  across  the  loopholes,  to  prevent 


48         CHAPTER    XL— DEFENCE    OF   POSTS,    VILLAGES,    ETC. 

a  man  raising  his  rifle  barrel  too  high.  Posts  painted  white 
on  the  defenders'  side  make  a  good  aiming  mark,  if  the  night  is 
not  too  dark. 
Steel  loop-  115.  Loopholes  made  of  sandbags,  sods,  &c.,  unless  very- 
holes,  carefully  made,  do  not  afford  a  good  field  of  view  and  fire 
combined  with  adequate  protection.  To  meet  this  objection 
a  steel  loophole  plate  has  been  introduced  into  the  service.  It 
would  be  specially  useful  for  det?vched  posts.  {See  PI.  18, 
Fips.  1  and  2.) 
Entrances.  H  g.  The  entrances  to  closed  works  must  be  carefully  attended 
to.  They  may  be  closed  by  a  gate,  barbed  wire  or  other 
obstacle.  When  wire  is  used,  a  good  plan  is  to  construct  an 
intricate  winding  approach,  making  access  by  night  difficult. 
In  all  cases  entrances  must  be  covered  by  the  fire  of  the  defence. 
Entrances  to  admit  artillery  require  a  width  of  7  feet. 

Defence  of  Villages. 
Tillages.  117,  Villages  will  very  often  occur  in  or  near  a  defensive 
position,  and  although  they  are  unsatisfactory  for  defence  they 
must  generally  be  occupied,  rather  than  be  left  to  the  enemy. 
They  conceal  the  disposition  and  strength  of  their  garrisons, 
and  afford  a  shelter  from  the  weather,  but  they  take  up  a  large 
number  of  men  who  are  necessarily  scattered. 

A  village  should  be  divided  up  into  well  defined  sections, 
each  held  by  a  tactical  unit.  Each  section  might  have  two 
lines  of  defence.  There  will  be  a  general  reserve  for  the 
whole  under  the  commander  of  the  village,  to  reinforce  a  hard 
pressed  section,  make  local  counter  attacks,  and  furnish  the 
garrison  of  the  central  keep  of  the  village,  if  any. 

1 18.  The  arrangements  of  the  defence  might  therefore  be  as 
follows  : — 

(1)  Clearing  field  of  fire. 

(2)  Making  communications. 

(3)  Providing    or  improving    cover   for   first    line   along 

hedges,  garden  walls,  &c.,  loopholing  walls  of  houses 
as  a  second  line. 

(4)  Placing    obstacles.     This    would   be    partly   done    at 

the  same  time  as  (1). 
i(5)  Preparing  keeps. 


I 


Plcite  ^74. 


Cove^     for*    Oiztposte 


Fia   3 


Trvo/er^G  Cfyvermg  entrccnco 
flpow^  exposed  iScceJ 


COVER  -  LYING      DOWN 


5  0- 


-><■ 


s-  o' 


^> 


^^w        v^;#         %^<?'s 


.#1^ 


# 


hf^p;,;,^  >?i^ 


> 


CHAPTER    XI. — DEFENCE    OF   POSTS,    VILLAGES,    ETC.  49 


Defence  of  Camps. 

119.  When  operating  against  an  enemy  who  is  accustomed  Camps. 
to  make  night  attacks,  the  defence  of  camps  is  a  most  important 
question.     There  are  two  essentials  for  camp  defence  :    the 
first  is  a  well  defined  firing  hne  for  the  defenders,  and  the  second 
is  a  good  obstacle  in  connection  with  it. 

For  a  small  force  the  first  thing  to  be  done  on  arrival  in 
camp  is  to  mark  out  the  positions  to  be  taken  up  in  order  to  repel 
a  night  attack.  If  there  is  only  time  to  do  this  with  a  line  of 
stones,  it  will  give  the  defenders  a  definite  line  of  defence  and 
something  to  hold  on  to. 

For  convenience  in  camping,  troops  should  generally  occupy 
the  same  relative  positions  each  night,  but  this  convenience 
must  be  sacrificed  to  the  arrangements  necessary  for  defence, 
as  it  is  very  important  that  units  should  camp  close  to  the 
ground  which  they  would  have  to  hold  in  case  of  attack. 

In  selecting  a  camp  regard  must,  of  course,  be  had  to  the 
position  of  the  water  supply.  This  should  always  be  under 
effective  rifle  fire,  but  it  must  be  remembered  that  a  good 
position  against  probable  night  attacks  is  one  of  the  first 
considerations. 


Cover  for  Outposts. 

120.  Where  no  natural  cover   exists,  outposts  should    be  Outposts 
entrenched. 

The  guiding  principles  in  the  design  of  the  defences  should 
be  : — 

The  provision  of  an  all-round  field  of  fire  and  the  protection 
of  the  garrison  from  reverse  fire. 

Plate  44,  shows  various  types  of  cover  suitable  for  out- 
posts. Such  works  should,  whenever  possible,  be  surrounded 
with  obstacles.' 

■     (5289)  P 


50         CHAPTER  XI. — DEFENCE  OP   POSTS,   VILLAGES,    ETC. 


Organisation  for  Defence  of  Large  Positions. 

Defensive       121.  In  order  to  ensure  a  good  system  of  command  and 
positions.    orp;anisation,  defensive  positions  should  be  divided  into  well- 
defined  sections,  each  under  a  separate  commander,  to  whom 
should  be  allotted  a  distinct  force,  e.g.,  a  division,  brigade, 
etc.  {see  "  Combined  Training  "). 

Each  section  commander  will  be  responsible  for  the 
occupation  and  preparation  for  defence  of  his  section  in 
accordance  with  the  orders  received.  He  will  either  indent 
on  the  service  or  department  concerned,  or  may  make 
arrangements  by  hire,  contract,  or  requisition  with  the  local 
civil  authorities,  according  to  the  circumstances  of  the  case, 
for  such  extra  labour,  tools  or  materials,  as  may  be  required. 
For  Tables,  giving  roughly  time  required  for  various  works 
and  form  for  working  parties,  which  will  be  found  useful  in 
connection  with  the  above,  see  pp.  120  and  136a. 


51 


CHAPTER  XIL— TEMPORARY  ROADS. 

1 22.  Temporary    communications     by    road    are    usually  Tem- 

required  :—  "  vovnvy 

(a)  In   comiection   with  a   defensive   position  to   enable  '-■°°^™^'^^" 
^    '  ,  -,.■,  -IP  •  cations, 

troops   to   be   readily  moved  irom   one   portion   to 

another. 

{b)  For    the    movement     across    country    of     detached 

columns. 

In  both  cases  provision  will  generally  have  to  be  made  for 
wheeled  vehicles,  while  simple  means  to  enable  the  infantry  to 
pass  dryshod  over  water  should  not  be  neglected.  The  pro- 
vision or  improvement  of  such  communications  can,  as  a  rule, 
be  carried  out  bv  unskilled  labour.  For  more  permanent  work 
see  Chap.  XXII,  Part  II. 

Communications  inside  a  position  will  consist  in  repairing 
existing  roads.  filUng  up  soft  places,  cutting  ramps  in  steep 
ground,  cutting  gaps  through  fences  and  clearing  roads  or 
paths  through  woods. 

The  points  to  be  kept  in  mind  are  :  That  troops  should  be 
able  to  move  on  as  broad  a  front  as  possible,  and  that  troops 
and  messengers  should  be  guided  to  their  destination  by  sign- 
posts, by  "  blazing  "  trees  or  other  means. 

The  work  in  connection  with  detached  columns  will  generally 
consist  in  repairing  existing  tracks  or  fords  and  making  boggy 
or  soft  ground  fit  for  wheeled  transport. 

Since  soft  ground,  even  though  passable,  is  very  trying  to 
draft  animals  and  causes  delay,  a  little  labour,  well  applied,  will 
be  amply  repaid. 

123.  The  best  foundation  for  a  temporary  road  over  boggy  Tem- 
ground  is  a  layer  or  layers  of  fascines  placed  touching  one  porary 
another  ;   the   top  row  must  he  across  the  direction  of  the  ^'^''^^^  o^^'^' 
traffic,  but  when  time  is  not  available  or  suitable  material  not  gpf^nd 
at  hand,   much  can  be  done  by  throwing  down  brushwood, 
heather,  or  even  straw  or  grass,  care  being  taken  that  this, 

like  the  fascines,  is  laid  across  the  road. 

If  there  is  much  wheeled  transport,  a  reserve  of  material 
should  be  collected  to  replace  any  that  gets  worn  through. 
(5289)  D  2 


52  CHAPTER  Xlir.  — KNOTTING    AND    LASHINGS. 

In  very  wet  ground  it  may  be  necessary  to  dig  a  drain  on 
each  side  of  the  road  {see  PL   82,  Fig.  3). 
Corduroy       124.  Where  timber  is  available  and  heavy  traffic  is  expected, 
road.  a  "  corduroy  "  road  may  be  made.     This  is  constructed  by 

felling  trees,  cutting  them  to  the  required  lengths  and  laying 
them  across  the  road  at  right  angles  to  its  direction,  ribands 
being  spiked  to  them  at  either  end  ;  or  the  logs  may  be  held 
together  by  interlacing  with  rope  or  wire. 

The  interstices  between  fascines,  brushwood,  logs,  &c.,  may 
be  fUled  with  small  stones  and  earth  to  make  a  better  surface. 


CHAPTER   XIII.— KNOTTING  AND  LASHINGS. 

Knots  and      125.  The  following  are  the  most  useful  knots  for  bridging 
bitches.       and  lashing  spars,  and  their  principal  uses  : — 

(a)  To  make  a  knot  on  a  rope,  or  to  prevent  the  end  from 

unf raying,  or  to  prevent  its  sUpping  through  a  block  ; 

the    thumb   knot  (Fig.    1,  PL  45)  or  the  fgure  of  8 

(Fig.  2). 
{h)  To  hend  or  join  two  ropes  together.     The  reef  knot 

(Fig.  3)  for  dry  ropes  of  the  same  size  ;    the  single 

sheet  hend  (Fig.   4)  for  dr\^  ropes  of  different  sizes  ; 

the  double  sheet  bend  (Fig.   .5)  for  great  security  or 

for  wet  ropes  of  different  sizes,  and  the  hawser  hend 

(Fig.  6)  for  joining  large  cables. 

(c)  To  form  a  loop  or  bight  on  a  rope  which  will  not  slip. 

The  bowline  (Figs.  7  and  8)  for  a  loop  at  the  end  of  a 
rope,  the  bowline  on  a  bigh^  (Fig.  9)  for  a  loop  in  the 
middle,  with  a  double  of  the  rope. 

[d)  To  secure  the  ends  of  ropes  to  spars,  pickets,  &c.,  or  to 

other  ropes. 
Half  hitch  (Fig.   4,  PL  46)  for  securing  the  loose  ends 

of  lashiDgs,  &c. 
Clove  hitch  (Figs.    1  and  2,  PL  46)  (two  half  hitches) 

generally  used  for  the  commencement  and  finish  of 

lashings. 


:FZjcct^  4-5. 


KNOTS 


:Fiy.5. 


SeiscLrzg 


J^.9. 


J^oWlznje^ 


5186%     OB 


W<ll«r i Graham.  L^o   Litho.Undon. 
OppcsiXs  ptxgfe^S^ 


Plat^46. 


KNOTS. 


ZMaZfJIibch^ 


J^i^.^. 


Z^cd/'JBztoh^es. 


JBervdy 


JY^.S. 


JF^.^. 


(Umzrrfjenc/eciy 


619 f    8.99. 


Weller  &  Graham,  L^  LithaUsiion. 


.I^Jt^  4/7. 


KNOTS 


SFr-^. 


CoctkjPa4y,(m/ 


corrurvenjeedy 


StopptfT 


JVy.S.A 


n 


f^ 


Jjsn^torL^ 


Shirwr/210  ou  Gash/ 


sise.8. 9S, 


#eHer*Oraham.-L!-    Litlw.  Lontfoiv 
To  fbULow  platje  4-G . 


CHAPTER    XIII. — KNOTTING   AND    LASHINGS.  53 

Timher  hitch  (Fig.  3)  for  catching  hold  of  timber,  &c., 

where  the  weight  ^vill  keep  the  hitch  taut. 
Round  turn  and  two  half  hitches  [or  rolling  bend)  (Fig.  5) 
for  belaying  (or  making  fast)  a  rope  so  that  the  strain 
on  the  rope  shall  not  jamb  the  hitches. 
This  will  be  used  for  making  fast  a  rope  to  a  bollard 
or   anchorage.     Should   the   running   end  be   incon- 
veniently long,  a  bight  of  it  should  be  used  to  form 
the  half  hitches. 
Fishermen's  bend   (Fig.  6),  for  making  fast  when  there 
is  a  give-and-take  motion,  e.g.,  for  bending  a  cable  to 
an  anchor, 
(e)  To  fix  a  spar  or  stick  across  a  rope. 

Lever  hitch  (Fig.  7),  for  drawing  pickets  by  a  lever  and 
fulcrum,  fixing  the  rounds  of  a  rope  ladder,  fixing 
bars  to  dragropes,  &c.  v 

(/)  For  forming  a  loop  on  dragropes. 

Man's  harness  hitch  (Figs.  7  and  8),  the  loop  being  of  a 
size  to  pass  over  a  man's  shoulder. 
{g)  To  fix  a  rope  with  a  weight  on  it  rapidly  to  a  block. 
Catspaw  at   the  end  (Figs.  1  and  2,  PL  47)  or   in   the 

middle  of  a  rope  (Fig.  3),  for  hooking  on  a  block. 
Blachvall  hitch  (Fig.  5),  a  simple  hitch  (with  a  pliant 
rope)  which  will  only  hold  as  long  as  the  weight  i^' 
applied. 
(h)  To  transfer  the  strain  on  one  rope  to  another. 

Stopper  hitch  (Fig.  4),  for  use  on  occasions  when  it  is 
necessary  to  shift  the  strain  off  a  rope  temporarily. 

126.  To  sling  a  cask  horizontally.     Make  a  long  bight  with  a  siingmg 
bowline  and  apply  as  shown  in  Fig.  6.  casks. 

To  sling  a  cask  vertically  (Fig.  7).  Place  the  cask  in  a  bight 
at  the  end  of  the  rope,  and  with  the  running  end  make  a 
thumb  knot  round  the  standing  part  of  the  rope.  Open  out 
the  thumb  knot  and  slip  it  down  the  sides  of  the  cask.  Secure 
with  a  bowline. 

127.  A  rack  lashing,  an  article  of  store,  consists  of  a  length  Rack 
of  1  J-inch  rope,  with  a  pointed  stick  at  one  end.      Used  for  lathing, 
fastening  down  ribands  at  the  edge  of  the  roadway  of  bridges. 


54 


CHAPTER  XIII. — KNOTTING    AND   LASHINGS. 


BclaTing. 


Commenced  with  a  thumb  knot  at  a,  Fig.  1,  PI.  48,  the  end 
t\visted  in  the  bight.  The  stick  is  then  put  into  the  bight, 
t^^^sted  against  the  hands  of  the  clock  till  all  is  taut,  and 
finalh^  jammed  in  from  right  to  left  between  the  lashing  and 
the  outside  of  the  riband.  A  rack  lashing  is  readily  impro- 
vised (Figs.  1  and  2,  PI.  48). 

128.  To  belay  a  cable  to  belaying  cleats.  First  take  a  round 
turn  \\ath  the  standing  part  of  the  cable  on  the  belaying  cleats, 
then  as  many  figure  of  8  turns  as  necessary.  Half  hitches  are 
on  no  account  to  be  used  in  belaying  any  rope  which  is  likely 
to  have  to  be  cast  off  quickly. 


Square  or 

transom 

lashing. 


Dingonal 
liisbing. 


Lasliing 
block. 


Lashings. 

129.  To  lash  one  spar  square  across  another,  commence  by  a 
clove  hitch  on  spar  a  below  h,  PI.  48,  and  twist  ends  together, 
carry  at  least  four  times  round  the  spars,  as  shown  in  figure, 
keeping  outside  previous  turns  on  one  spar  and  inside  on  the 
other  ;  two  or  more  frapping  or  cross  turns  are  then  taken,  the 
corners  of  the  lashings  being  well  "  beaten  in  "  during  the 
process,  and  finished  off  with  two  half  hitches  round  the  most 
convenient  spar  (Figs.  3  and  4,  PI.  48). 

When  the  spars  are  the  leg  and  transom  of  a  trestle  or  frame, 
the  clove  hitches  should  be  on  the  leg  below  the  transom, 
and  the  lashings  should  be  finished  off  on  the  transom  outside 
the  leg. 

130.  To  lash  two  spars  together  that  tend  to  spring  apart. 
Begin  with  a  timber  hitch  or  running  bowline  round  both 
spars  and  draw  them  together,  then  take  three  or  four  turns 
across  each  fork  and  finish  with  frapping  turns  and  two  half 
hitches.  (Fig.  5). 

Wedges  with  well  rounded  points  are  often  useful  for  tighten- 
ing lashings.  They  are  generally  used  by  builders  in  scaffolding, 
and  should  be  driven  in  at  the  top  of  the  lashings. 

131.  To  lash  a  block  to  a  spar. — The  back  of  the  hook  is  laid 
against  the  spar,  a  clove  hitch  is  taken  round  the  spar  above 
the  hook,  then  several  turns  round  the  hook  and  spar,  and 
finished  off  with  two  half  hitches  round  the  spar  below  the 
hook  (Fig.  6). 


LASHINGS 


r/aia.48. 


JFz^.^ 


Jtct/*k/  JOcLshinjq 


TUf.S. 


Tig.  4-. 


:Fiff.5 


IWUZB 


JFu/.7.         So7^fciSty 


VVeMe;- J  Graham  L^<?    Jtho.  London. 


To  fctcepaffe .  ^4 


CHAPTER   XIV. — BBIDGES.  55 

132.  The  hook  of  a  block  is  moused  by  taking  some  turns  Mousing 
round  it  with  spun  yarn  or  very  light  lashing,  commencing  ^  block, 
with  a  clove  hitch  on  the  back  of  the  hook  and  finishing  off 

with  one  or  two  frapping  turns  and  a  reef  knot  (Fig.  2,  PI.  47). 

133.  The  end  of  a  rope  is  seized  to  the  standing  part  with  spun  Seizing, 
yarn  or  string,  by  forming  a  clove  hitch  round  one  of  the  ropes 

with  the  spun  yarn  near  its  centre,  taking  each  part  round  both 
ropes  in  opposite  directions,  leaving  one  end  long  enough  to 
take  two  frapping  turns  between  the  ropes,  and  connecting 
the  two  ends  with  a  reef  knot  (Fig.  6,  PI.  45). 

134.  A  picket  used  as  a  holdfast  must  be  driven  into  the  Holdfasts 
ground  at  a  slope  to  meet  the  strain.     If  the  latter  is  great  o^  anchor- 
and  the  pickets  small,  additional  strength  is  gained  by  the  ^^^^' 
methods  shown  in  Figs.  7  and  8,  PI.  48.   In  using  heavy  rope,  three 

or  more  pickets  can  be  driven  in  a  cluster  to  form  a  bollard. 
If  a  large  piece  of  timber  is  used  as  a  bollard,  its  corners  must 
be  rounded  off.  Fig.  9,  PI.  48,  shows  a  method  of  using  a  log 
for  large  strains. 

135.  For  strength  of  rope,  wire  and  lashings,  see  Part  II. 


CHAPTER    XIV.— MILITARY  BRIDGES. 

136.  The  approximate  site  for  a  bridge  will  usually  be  decided  ^i^'«- 
by  the  tactical  requirements  in  selecting  the  exact  position 
over  a  river,  and  regard  must  be  had  to  the  following  points, 
most  of  which  must  also  be  considered  when  an  existing  bridge 
has  to  be  repaired,  viz.  :  The  nature  of  the  banks  and  ap- 
proaches, the  nature  of  the  bed,  width  to  be  bridged,  depth  of 
water,  strength  of  current,  and  the  probability  and  extent  of 
floods.  If  a  tidal  river,  the  rise  and  fall  of  the  tide  should  be 
ascertained.  A  note  should  be  made  of  any  material  near  the 
proposed  site  which  would  help  in  the  construction  of  the 
bridge. 

137.  The  approaches  on  both  sides  of  a  bridge  are  of  the  utmost  Banks 
importance,  marshy  banks  should  be  avoided,  if  ramps  are  ^^^ 
required  the  gradients  should  be  easy.  Moaches. 


56  CHAPTEPw   XIV. — BRIDGES. 

Easy  access  and  a  difficult  exit  is  sure  to  cause  a  crowding 
on  the  bridge. 
Strength        138.  The  simplest  plan  for  measuring  the  velocity  of  a  strea  m 
of  current,  is  to  use  a  light  rod  weighted  at  one  end  so  as  to  float  nearly 
vertically,   with  its  tip  above  water.     Note  the  distance  it 
floats  in  a  given  number  of  seconds  ;    then  seven-tenths  the 
mean  number  of  feet  a  second  gives  the  number  of  miles  an 
hour,  in  which  terms  the  velocity  should  be  stated. 
Materials.       139.  The  materials  usually  available  in  the  field  are  timber  of 
all  sorts  and  sizes,  railway  plant,  hemp  or  mre  rope  and  floating 
material. 

The  different  parts  can  be  fastened  together  with  rope  or 
wire,  iron  bolts  and  nuts,  spikes  and  dogs,  iron  straps,  &c. 

The  simplest  construction  consists  of  round  spars  lashed 
together  with  rope  or  wire,  but  squared  timbers,  e.g.,  timber  as 
used  in  the  construction  of  houses,  and  iron  fastenings,  are  often 
more  easily  obtained  than  spars  and  rope.  Iron  fastenings, 
however,  necessitate  a  few  carpenter's  tools. 
Form  of  \^Q,  The  form  of  bridge  will  vary  according  to  the  materials 
^  ■  available,  the  traffic  expected  and  the  nature,  breadth,  depth, 
&c.,  of  the  span  to  be  bridged. 

When  bottom  can  be  touched  throughout,  a  trestle  bridge 
(PI.  49,  Fig.  1),  or  some  form  akin  to  it,  will  generally  be  the 
moot  economijal  in  material  and  the  easiest  to  make.  The 
method  of  constructing  it  should  be  thoroughly  understood. 
When  there  is  no  available  bottom  the  bridge  becomes  more 
complicated:  Sinlple  bridges  for  small  spans  are  the  single 
lock  bridge,  the  double  lock  bridge,  and  the  cantilever  bridge 
(numbers  used  in  the  North  of  India).  These  are  described  in 
Part  II.  Where  floating  material  is  available  and  depth  of 
water  and  current  are  suitable,  a  floating  bridge  will  be  the 
quickest  and  simplest  to  make.  For  long  spans  where  bottom 
cannot  be  touched,  tension  or  suspension  bridges,  or 
some  form  of  girder  bridge,  may  be  suitable,  but  their 
construction  requires  skilled  labour  and  will  not  be  dealt  with 
here. 

Fig.  3  shows  a  combination  of  frame  and  trestle.  Fig.  4 
of  floating  piers  and  trestle — the  depth  of  the  gap  in  each 
case  necessitating  some  support  other  than  trestle. 


I'lcct^AU 


TYPES     O?    BRIDGES. 


Tia.  7. 


'-"-^ 


jn^.s 


Sf-iff.^-. 


0/ipcs4jC^  ,f>-',£^  SB 


P/^.//?  oO 


s,3e.6.  OS. 


BRIDGES 


Fu/.^. 


Weiler&Gradam.  L!r'  Lirho.London 
OpposLte  pouje  51. 


CHAPTER   XIV. — BRIDGES.  57 

141.  The  same  nature  of  roadway  can  be  applied  to  cacli  Construc- 
type  of  bridge,  and  its  usual  form  is  shown  in  PL  50,  Fig.  1.         ^'^^^  ^^ 

The  planks  or  chesses,  A,  A,  placed  across  the  width  of  ^^^^  ^*^' 
roadway  are  supported  on  longitudinal  baulks  or  road-bearers, 
B,  B,  which  in  their  turn  rest  on  transverse  transoms,  T,  T,  and 
the  method  of  supporting  these  last  depends  on  the  type  of 
bridge.  The  chesses  are  kept  steady  by  two  ribands,  R,  R, 
which  are  secured  to  the  outside  baulks  either  by  rack  lashings 
or  by  lacing,  or  the  chesses  may  be  simply  nailed  down. 

142.  A  width  of  8  feet  in  the  clear — ^.e.,  the  clear  space  between  Width  of 
the  ribands — suffices  for  infantry  in  fours,  for  military  vehicles  in  roadway. 
one  direction,  and  for  c&Yalvj  in.  half -sections — i.e.,  two  abreast; 

but  9  feet  in  the  clear  is  a  better  width,  especially  when  there  is 
likely  to  be  a  sway  on  the  roadway,  as  frequently  happens  in 
the  case  of  floating  and  suspension  bridges. 

The  "  normal  "  width  of  bridge  is  9  feet  in  the  clear. 

Six  feet  will  take  infantry  in  file,  cavalry  in  single  file,  and 
field  guns  passed  over  by  hand ;  IJ  feet  to  3  feet  will  take 
infantry  in  single  file. 

143.  Planks  IJ  inches   to  2  inches   thick  are  sufficient  for  Chesses. 
ordinary  traffic. 

For  continuous  or  heavy  wheeled  traffic  additional  chesses 
should  be  laid  longitudinally,  to  form  wheel  tracks. 

Chesses  can  be  economised,  if  they  are  longer  than  the  width 
of  the  bridge,  by  placing  them  diagonally. 

Hurdles,  short  fascines,  corrugated  iron,  &c.,  can  be  used 
in  lieu  of  planks,  but  are  not  good  for  horse  traffic. 

When  material  is  available,  chesses  may  be  laid  on  the  ground 
on  the  banks  on  each  side  for  a  short  distance,  to  allow  horses 
to  become  accustomed  to  the  noise  before  actually  getting 
on  to  the  bridge. 

1 4  4.  A  handrail  should  be  provided,  especially  for  horse  traffic.  Handrail 
They  must  be  strongly  built.  Screens  on  either  side  are  desirable  and 
for  passing  animals  over  a  bridge,  especially  over  running  water,  ^^^eens. 

145.  In  most  bridges  the  ribands  should  be  fairly  pliant,  in  Ribands, 
order  that  the  rack  lashings  may  press  them  tightly  down  on 
the  chesses  throughout.     In  suspension  and  floating  bridges, 
however,  stiff  ribands  are  desirable,  as  they  tend  to  stiffen 
the  bridge. 


58  CHAPTER   XIV.^-BRIDGES. 

Rack  lashings  should  be  applied  at  intervals  of  4  feet  or 
5  feet. 
Baulks.  146.  The  number  of  baulks  depends  upon  the  size  of  the 

timber  available.     They  should  be  sufficiently  close  together 
to  support  the  chesses. 
Bays.  147.  The  distance  bridged  by  one  set  of  baulks,  i.e.,  the 

distance  between  any  two  transoms,  is  called  a  hay. 

The  length  of  bays  depends  chiefly  upon  the  size  of  available 
baulks  ;   10  feet  to  15  feet  is  a  convenient  length. 

When  the  trestles  are  large,  material  and  labour  should 
be  economised  by  making  the  bay  as  wide  as  the  length 
and  strength  of  the  available  road-bearers  will  allow. 
Strength  148.  Whatever  arm  of  the  service  it  is  constructed  to  carry, 
of  bridges.  ^  bridge  should  be  capable  of  supporting  it  when  crowded 
in  the  formation  for  which  it  is  intended.  Thus  a  bridge 
intended  to  carry  infantry  in  fours  should  be  strong  enough  to 
take  infantr}^  in  fours  when  crowded. 

A  bridge  that  will  carry  infantry  in  fours  crowded  at 
a  check  wiU  carry  field  guns  and  5 -inch  howitzers  and  most  of 
the  ordinary  wagons  that  accompany  an  army  in  the  field. 

Timbers  of  bridges  for  carrying  heavier  weights,  e.g.,  guns 
of  position,  should  be  calculated  {see  Part  II.). 

The  following  approximate  dimensions  for  spars  of  unsdected 
timber  are  necessary  for  carrying  infantry  in  fours  crowded : — 
For    bays   of    15    feet — Road  -  bearing    transoms,    mean 
diameter,  10  inches.     Baulks  (six),  mean  diameter, 
7  inches. 
For  bays  of  12  feet — 1  inch  less  than  above  will  suffice. 
Other  timbers  not  affected  by  length  of  bay  : — 
Ledgers  and  handrails,  mean  diameter,  4  inches  to  6  inches. 
Braces  and  ribands,  3  inches  at  tip. 
Legs,  trestle,  mean  diameter,  6  inches. 
These  dimensions  are  calculated  for  spars  of  rather  weak 
wood,  such  as  larch,  and  allow  for  a  factor  of  safety  of  three. 
Five  road-bearers  are  enough  for  selected  spars. 
Camber.         149.  The  roadway  is  generally  constructed  with  a  sHght  rise 
towards  the  centre  of  the  bridge  to  allow  of  subsequent  settle- 
ment ;  this  is  technically  called  the  camber,  and  should  be  about 
-^\  of  the  span. 


CHAPTER    XIV. — BEIDGES.  59 

150.  RefTulations  for  the  passage  of  troops  over  field  bridges  Precau- 
are  laid  down  in  "  Combined  Training,"  1905,  Sec.  27.  ^ions  to  be 

With  the  officer  in   charge   rests   the  responsibility  of  no  j'^^^  J^^  ^^ 
physical  obstacles  occurring  to  cause  checks  or  crowding  on  bridges. 
the  bridge  itself. 

The  passage  of  troops  o-ff  a  bridge  should  be  always 
expedited,  their  passage  on  to  it  carefully  regulated,  and,  when 
necessary,  checked  by  material  obstacles. 

The  officer  superintending  the  construction  of  a  bridge 
is  responsible  that  it  is  strong  enough  to  support  the  weight 
it  is  intended  to  carry.  To  prevent  it  being  over-strained  he 
should  place  a  signboard  at  either  end,  stating  the  greatest 
permissible  load,  thus  : — 

"  Bridge  to  carry  infantry  in  fours." 

"  Bridge  to  carry  infantry  in  file." 

"  Bridge  to  carry  guns  not  heavier  than  13-pr." 


Trestle  Bridges. 

151.  Trestles  made  of  spars  lashed  together  \vith  rope  or  Lashetl 
wire  may  be  of  three  kinds — two,  three,  or  four-legged.  spar 

The  ordinary  form  of  two-legged  trestles  is  shown  in  PL  50,  *^^^stles. 
Fig.  2. 

152.  To  make  trestles  for  a  particular  bridge  the  centre  line  of  Order  of 
the  bridge  should  be  marked  out  on  either  side  of  the  gap,  and  a  '^ork. 
section  of  the  gap  laid  out  on  flat  ground  showing  the  depth  of 

the  gap  at  each  trestle  (two  sections,  if  the  depth  on  one  side  of 
the  bridge  is  different  to  that  on  the  other).  For  each  trestle 
the  position  of  the  lashing  on  the  transom  is  dependent  on  the 
width  of  the  roadway,  and  the  lashing  on  the  leg  dependent  on 
the  depth  of  the  gap  allowing  an  outward  splay  of  -f-  The 
ledgers  are  usually  lashed  on  about  1  foot  from  the  bottom  of 
the  leg,  parallel  to  the  transom,  their  point  of  lashing  depending 
on  the  length  and  splay  of  the  leg.     For  a  muddy  bottom 


60 


CHAPTER    XIV. — BRIDGES. 


Placing 
and 

bracinn; 
trestles. 


Three- 
legced  or 
tripod 
trestles. 


the  ledgers  should  be  close  to  the  butts,  so  as  to  take  the  mud  ; 
for  a  rocky  bottom  they  should  be  high  enough  up  not  to 
touch. 

Square  lashings  {see  Sec.  129)  must  be  used.  The  braces 
are  put  on  the  frame  with  both  butts  and  one  tip  on  the 
same  side,  the  second  tip  on  the  reverse  side  ;  their  butts 
can  be  lashed  simultaneously  with  the  ledger  and  transom. 
The  frame  must  then  be  squared  by  testing  the  diagonals, 
measuring  from  the  centre  of  the  ledger  lashing  to  the  centre 
of  the  transom  lashing  on  the  opposite  leg,  and  the  frame  must 
be  adjusted  till  these  measurements  are  equal.  The  braces  can 
then  be  lashed  at  the  tips  and  crossing  point. 

If  the  timber  is  weak  both  legs  and  transom  can  be  doubled. 
Ledgers  and  diagonal  braces  can  be  of  light  material,  as  little 
strain  is  brought  upon  them,  but  they  should  be  well  lashed. 

When  the  water  is  very  shallow  the  trestles  can  be  carried 
out  and  placed  by  men  working  in  the  water.  When  the  water 
is  too  deep  for  this  they  can  be  carried  on  to  the  bridge  and 
lowered  feet  first  down  inchned  spars  to  their  final  position, 
or  taken  out  on  rafts  and  by  means  of  guys  taken  to  shore 
tipped  up  into  position. 

Two-legged  trestles  are  kept  upright  by  lashing  the  road- 
bearers  to  the  transoms  and  by  cross-bracing  from  each  trestle 
to  its  neighbour  {see  PI.  49,  Fig.  1),  the  nearest  trestles  to  the 
banks  on  either  side  being  rigidly  connected  thereto  by  light 
spars  lashed  to  the  tips  of  the  legs  and  to  bollards  on  the  bank. 
These  light  spars  are  put  on  before  the  trestle  is  launched, 
and  help  to  get  it  into  position,  they  also  serve  as  handrails 
when  the  roadway  is  placed. 

153.  PL  51.  Fig.  1.  shows  three-legged  trestles,  two  of  which 
are  required  for  the  support  of  a  single  transom  ;  to  make  them, 
it  is  best  to  lash  two  legs  together  by  a  sheer  Ipshing,  open  them 
out,  and  then  add  the  third  leg  or  prypole  (see  Fig.  2)  ;  the 
trestle  must  t'  en  be  up-ended,  the  feet  placed  on  the  angles  of 
an  equilateral  triangle  with  sides  of  about  half  the  height,  and 
thr^e  light  ledgers  attached. 

The  advantages  of  tripod  trestles  are  that  they  utilise  light 
material,  will  stand  without  bracing,  and  admit  of  more  ready 
adjustment,  raising  or  lowering,  of    the  roadw^ay  than  either 


TRESTLES 


PLaJ^iS] 


s/as.s  .OS . 


Wel («r  k  Gr«h««ii.  Lflf  U rte^^^Oon 


Opposite  jJC^Mf^  SO. 


BRIDGING     EXPEDIENTS. 


J^i^.1. 


If^^i.os. 


Opposite  pn^  6/. 


CHAPTER    XIV. — BRIDGES.  ol 

of  the  other  forms  ;  they  are,  however,  unsuitable  for  aa 
uneven  bottom,  and  extremely  difficult  to  place,  excepting  by 
actually  carrying  them  into  position.  They  are  usually 
placed  from  rafts  when  working  over  water,  and  their  legs  must 
be  weighted. 

154.  Fig.  3  shows  a  four-legged  trestle  ;  it  is  made  of  two  Four- 
frames  similar  to  two-legged  trestles,  locked  at  the  transoms,  legged 
and  connected  by  short  ledgers  at  the  feet.     One  frame  must  trestles, 
therefore  be  made  narrower  than  the  other.     The  inclination 

of  the  legs  should  be  such  that  the  breadth  of  the  base  on  which 
the  trestle  stands  should  not  be  less  than  half  the  height.  The 
legs  must  also  have  an  outwards  splay  of  |. 

Four-legged  trestles  can  be  made  of  fairly  light  material,  and 
will  stand  without  bracing.  They  are  consequently  useful 
for  small  bridges  of  two  bays,'  requiring  one  central  support, 
and  as  occasional  steadying  points  in  a  long  bridge  of  two- 
legged  trestles. 

When  a  carpenter's  tools  are  available,  trestles  may  be 
made  with  iron  fastenings  ;  they  are  more  durable  than  those 
made  with  rope.  Figs.  4  and  5,  PL  51  are  examples.  Fig.  5  is 
especially  useful  when  only  light  timber  is  available. 

155.  Communication  may  be  rapidly  established  across  a  gap  BridiJing 
by  the  method  shown  in  PL  51,  Fig.  6.     In  Fig.  6  two  spars  expe- 
are  rested  about  their  centres  on  the  transom  of  a  narrow  <lients. 
light  trestle  and   launched  across.      The  transom  should  be 
lashed  at  such  a  height   that   when   the  trestle   is    inclined 
forward  so  as  to  land  the  tips  of  the  spars  on  the  opposite 

bank,  the  transom  will  be  on  a  level  with  the  two  banks. 
Planks  can  then  be  laid  on  the  spars  to  form  a  foot  bridge. 

156.  In  PL  52  are  shown  various  expedients  which  can  take  Sub- 
the  place  of  regularly  constructed  trestle  bridges.     Fig.  1,  a  ^titutes 
roadway  laid  on  carts.  for  trestle 

Fig.  2,  piers  of  crib  work.     This  is  a  specially  useful  form  of   "  ^^^* 
pier  when  timber  is  plentiful  and  other  stores  deficient.     If 
used  in  water  a  tray  should  be  formed  in  the  bottom  of  the 
crib,  which  latter  can  be  towed  into  position,  weighted  with 
stones  and  sunk. 

Fig.  3,  small  gaps  crossed  by  means  of  brushwood,  in  the 
form  of  gabions  or  fascines. 


62  CHAPTER   XIV. — BRIDGES. 

Fig.  4  shows  a  method  of  roughly  trussing  a  log,  frequently 
used  in  Canada. 

Floating  Bridges. 

157.  In  selecting  a  site  for  a  floating  bridge  it  should  be 
remembered  that  the  bed  of  the  river  should  afiord  good  holding 
ground  for  anchors  if  required. 

The  use  that  can  be  made  of  islands  to  economise  material 
should  be  noted. 
Koad\>ay.  158.  The  roadway  of  floating  bridges  is  similar  to  that 
already  described  in  Sec.  141 ;  wide  roadways  are  preferable 
to  narrow  ones,  on  account  of  their  great  steadiness. 
Buoyancy.  159.  Each  pier  must  have  enough  available  buoyancy  to 
support  the  heaviest  load  that  can  be  brought  on  to  one  bay 
of  the  bridge.  No  extra  allowance  need  be  made  if  the  load 
is  live. 

The  length  of  the  piers  should  be  at  least  tw4ce  the  breadth 
of  the  roadway  for  the  sake  of  steadiness,  and  they  may  be 
connected  together  at  their  ends  by  tie  baulks  or  lashings. 

The  ivaterway  between  the  piers  should  never  be  less,  and 
should  if  possible  be  more,  than  the  width  of  those  piers. 

Floating   piers   may  be   made   from   specially   constructed 
pontoons,   boats,   casks,   or  timber  rafts ;    inflated  skins,   or 
anything  that  w^ill  float,  may  have  to  be  resorted  to  on  emer- 
gencv. 
Boats.  160.  Open  boats  should  not,  except  in  sluggish  water,  be 

immersed  deeper  than  within  1  foot  of  the  gunwale,  and  a 
still  larger  limit  of  safety  wall  be  required  in  rough  water  or  a 
violent  current.  They  should  be  placed  in  bridge  "  bow  on  " 
to  the  current,  and  slightly  down  as  the  stern ;  or  if  the 
river  is  tidal  they  must  be  placed  alternately  bow  and  stern. 

If  the  boats  be  not  each  buoyant  enough  to  form  a  pier, 
they  may  be  used  in  pairs  (Fig.  2.  PL  53).  The  sterns  are 
lashed  together,  and  the  spars  AA^  BB|  are  held  over  the  side ; 
four  2-inch  ropes  at  AB,  CD,  CiDi,  A,Bi,  are  passed  under  the 
boats  and  secured  to  the  poles,  and  four  double  ropes  are 
passed  round  the  latter  at  the  same  points  and  cross  over  the 
boats  ;  these  ropes  are  racked  up  tight.  Crosspieces,  MM,  are 
then  lashed  to  the  poles  and  thwarts,  and  blocks  on  the  thwarts 


I'Uilf.   S3 


BOAT     PIERS 


^^.;. 


^^j^ 


SexitLon.  Jl.JB. 


J^O/.Z. 


^^•10^ 


3 fiddle^  ^eearv 


W^Thj/^'ccyV 


SI  a  6.  B  05. 


W«ller46fah«m.L'*  Lirfto,Lon«Jon. 
Opposite'  pcLge  6Z . 


d 


M 


^,1 


Plate  54 


CASK     PIERS 


rtavruda 


SlUL^S 


-^F3:3ir 


^rTvrrvf  If-  ^:^l  7^ 


Szde  JElevaJturn.   2njg  8         ^^-^ 


Pg^"^ 


^SS.Z.05. 


Welleri  Graham.  L'*  LirhoLondon 

Opposite-  paqC'SS 


CHAPTER   XIV. — BRIDGES.  63 

at  EE  support  the  saddle  beam,  which  is  lashed  to  the  thwarts 
and  to  the  stern  rings  of  the  boats. 

Few  boats,  with  the  exception  of  heavy  barges,  are  strong 
enough  to  allow  of  the  baulks  resting  on  their  gunwales. 
A  central  transom  should  be  improvised,  which  can  generally 
be  done  by  resting  a  transom  on  the  thwarts,  and  blocking  them 
up  from  underneath,  thus  bringing  the  weight  directly  on 
to  the  kelson.     This  arrangement  is  shown  in  Fig.  1,  PI.  53. 

161.  The  available  buoyancy  of  a  boat  may  be  (most  simply)  Buoyancv 
determined  by  loading  it  with  unarmed  men  to  such  a  depth  of  boats, 
as  is  considered  safe,  usually  within  6  inches  of  the  gunwale 

in  sluggish  streams  and  1  foot  in  rapid,  and  multiplying  this 
number  by  160.  The  result  gives  the  available  buoyancy  in 
pounds. 

1 62.  The  usual  method  of  forming  a  number  of  large  casks  Piers  of 
into  a  pier  is  shown  in  Figs.  1,  2,  and  3,  PL  54.     The  casks  are  ca»iks. 
laid  bung  uppermost,  and  Hned,  two  baulks  technically  known  as 
gunnels  (GG)  are   placed  over  the  ends,  and   the  slings  (SS) 

are  secured  under  the  ends  of  the  casks  to  -  the  gunnels. 
Between  each  pair  of  casks,  on  each  side,  a  brace  is  secured 
on  the  shng,  and  is  then  led  round  the  gunnel ;  the  opposite 
braces  are  crossed  and  secured  again  on  their  own  side. 

A  knot  must  be  made  as  shown  near  the  standing  end  of 
the  braces  to  prevent  tbe  crossed  parts  shpping.  Care  must 
be  taken  that  the  braces  are  pulled  taut ;  this  is  best  done 
by  rocking  the  barrels,  at  the  same  time  hauling  in  the 
slack.  For  large  piers  the  shng  should  be  2J-inch  to  3-inch 
rope,  the  braces  can  be  of  IJ-inch  rope.  (For  a  detailed 
description  of  this  method,  see  Part  II.). 

163.  Fig.  4  suggests  a  method  useful  for  smaller  casks. 
Small  piers  of  three  or  more  casks,  aa,  bh,  cc,  being  made  as 
above  described,  and  subsequently  united  by  two  large 
gunnels,  X,  X. 

164.  Figs.  5  and  9,  show  another  method  useful  for  medium- 
sized  casks.  The  braces  are  first  fastened  to  a  gunnel  and 
stretched  out  perpendicularly  to  it ;  the  casks  are  then  placed 
in  two  rows,  end  to  end,  on  each  side  of  the  baulk  and  over  their 
own  braces.  On  the  casks  are  laid  two  gunnels,  loosely  lashed 
together  at  the  ends  and  at  one  or  two  intermediate  points, 


64  CHAPTER   XIV. — BRIDGES. 

the  distance  between  them  being  less  tlian  a  bung  diameter, 
the  braces  are  then  secured  to  the  gunnels  by  two  round  turns 
and  two  half-hitches  ;  the  lashings  connecting  the  gunnels 
are  then  racked  up,  and  finally  the  two  at  the  ends  are  secured 
to  the  underneath  baulk  by  lashings,  which  are  also  racked 
up  taut.  Other  methods  can  be  readily  devised  according  to 
the  material  available,  e.g.,  the  cask  can  be  completely 
enclosed  in  a  wooden  framework,  the  parts  of  which  are 
lashed  or  nailed  together  {see  Figs.  6,  7,  and  8. 
Tie  baulks.  165.  Piers  of  casks  when  in  bridge  should  always  be  rigidly 
connected  to  each  other  at  their  ends  by  tie  baulks,  which  must 
be  lashed  to  both  gunnels  of  each  pier  ;  the  roadway  baulk? 
can  then  be  laid,  without  lashing  if  rectangular ;  they  should 
rest  on  both  gunnels  of  each  pier. 

If,  however,  the  baulks  are  round,  or  there  is  likely  to  be  much 
sway  on  the  bridge,  and  especially  for  animal  traffic,  it  gives 
additional  security  to  lash,  at  any  rate,  some  of  the  baulks 
both  to  each  other  and  their  overlap,  and  also  to  the  gunnels. 
Headless  casks  must  be  enclosed  vertically  in  a  specially 
prepared  framework. 
To  form  166.  To  form  a  raft,  the  logs  should  be  placed  side  by  side, 

a  raft  thick  and  thin  ends  alternating  ;  they  should  then  be  strongly 
secured  with  rope,  and,  if  possible,  by  cross  and  diagonal  pieces 
of  timber  fastened  by  spikes  or  wooden  trenails  ;  or  the  logs 
can  themselves  be  connected  by  dogs. 

If  a  raft  is  to  be  used  as  a  pier  in  a  bridge,  it  will  frequently 
be  necessary  to  place  the  logs  in  two  layers,  to  avoid  obstructing 
the  waterway.  A  central  raised  transom  must  be  used. 
The  up-stream  end  of  the  raft  may,  with  advantage,  be  slightly 
convex. 

Rafts  are  most  easily  put  together  and  manipulated  in  the 
water. 
Anchoring      167.  Anchors  are  of  various  weights.     For  ordinary  bridge 
of  bridges,  work  5G-lb.  anchors,  with  a  reserve  of    112-lb.  anchors,   will 
generally  suffice  for  moderate  streams. 

The  cables  are  generally  of  3-inch  rope.  The  length  of  cable 
"  out  "  should  be  ten  times  the  depth  of  the  stream,  and  rarely 
less  than  30  yards.  The  cable  is  attached  to  the  ring  of  the 
anchor  (PI.  55,  Fig.  1)  by  a  fisherman's  bend  ;   a  buoy  should 


I 


I'/'rt^>  55. 


ANCHORS 


^^.^. 


CrownX — ^ 


IFigr.S 


Fi^.^. 


5/86. S     05. 


Wwlertirfltism.L"  Li>t>ci,Londoo 


Opposite  pcfj^e-  65. 


CHAPTER    XIV. — BRIDGES.  35 

be  attached  to  the  anchor  by  a  buoyline  of  l-inch  rope,  fastened 
to  a  ring  of  the  buoy  by  a  fisherman's  bend,  and  round  the 
crown  of  the  anchor,  with  a  clove  hitch  split  by  the  shank, 
and  two  half-hitches  round  the  shank.  The  use  of  the  buoy  is 
to  mark  the  position  of  the  anchor  and  serve  as  a  means  of 
raising  it. 

As  a  rule  there  should  be  an  up-stream  and  down-stream 
anchor  to  every  second  pier  of  a  floating  bridge. 

If  anchors  are  scarce,  one  may  be  made  to  serve  for  two 
piers  by  attaching  two  cables  to  it  on  the  down-stream  side 
of  the  bridge,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2. 

Care  must  be  taken  before  heaving  an  anchor  overboard  to  see 
that  it  is  carefully  stodced. 

Timber  raft«  and  cask  piers  being,  as  a  rule,  a  greater  strain 
on  anchors  than  boats  or  pontoons. 

In  d  very  rapid  current,  anchors  can  seldom  be  trusted. 
The  bridge  must  then  be  secured  to  a  hawser  stretched  across 
the  river  "  up-stream.*'  Wire  rope  is  convenient  for  the  purpose 
(Fig.  3).  Short  bridges  can  be  kept  steady  by  cables  stretched 
from  the  piers  to  the  banks,  up  and  down  stream  (Fig.  4). 

168.  The  following  are  substitutes  for  anchors  : —  Makeshift 
Two  or  more  pickaxes  lashed  together.                                       anchors. 
Heavy   weights,    such   as    large   stones    or    railwav   irons ; 

the  latter  are  best  when  bent. 

Nets  filled  with  stones— remarka^bly  effective  on  rocky 
bottoms. 

169.  X  bridge  can  be  formed  by  booming  ov.t,  i.e.,  the  head  Methods 
of  the  bridge  already  constructed  is  continually  pushed  out  o''^"o?''^'ng 
into  the  stream,  fresh  materials  being  added  at  the  tail.     This  ?°^^^^° 
method   economises   the  distance  the   materials   have  to  be  BoomiiT^ 
carried,  but  necessitates  a  certain  number  of  men  working  out. 

in  the  water,  and  cannot  be  used  vrhen  the  banks  are  steep, 
and  there  is  deep  water  close  in  shore,  as  for  instance,  in  the 
case  of  a  wharf  wall. 

In  for  thing  up.  material   is  continually  added   to  the  head  Forming 
of   the   bridge,    the   tail   being   stationary.     This    method   is  up. 
uninfluenced  by  the  nature  of  the  banks,  no  men  being  required 
to  work  in  the  water.     Its  only  drawback  is  the  distance  the 
roadway  materials  have  to  be  carried. 

(5289)  T, 


I 


GG 


CnArTER    XIV. — P.TIIDGES. 


Bafting. 


Swinging. 


Forming 
cuts. 


Protection 
of  floating 
bridges. 


Passage  of 

heavy 

artillery. 


Passage  of 
arms  and 
ammuni- 
tion. 


Ferries 
and  flying 
bridges. 


In  rafting,  the  bridce  is  put  toiretlipr  in  difTeront  pcrtionp  or 
■rajt?  along  the  shore,  each  raft  consisting  of  two  or  morn  piers, 
which  rafts  are  successively  warped,  rowed,  or  towed  into 
their  proper  positions  in  bridge. 

This  method  has  the  advantage  that  a  large  number  of  men 
can  be  employed  simultaneously  ;  and  if  secrecy  b?5  an  object, 
the  various  portions  can  be  constructed  at  some  distance 
from  the  eventual  site  of  the  bridge,  and  a  favourable  oppor- 
tunity seized  for  its  construction. 

In  swinging,  an  entire  bridge  is  constructed  alongshore, 
and  then  swung  across  with  the  stream. 

A  long  bridge  can  be  constructed  by  a  combination  of  two 
or  more  of  the  above  methods. 

If  a  bridge  has  to  remain  down  for  some  time,  arrangements 
must  be  made  for  the  passage  of  the  river  traffic,  which  can  be 
done  by  having  two  or  more  rafts,  at  the  centre  of  the  bridge, 
arranged  for  "  forming  cut "  as  required ;  or  the  two  halves 
of  the  bridge  may  be  swung,  to  afford  the  requisite  passage. 

170.  Arrangements  must  always  be  made,  up-stream,  for 
the  protection  of  a  bridge  from  damage  by  floating  substances, 
either  by  a  boat  patrol  or  by  stretching  a  net  or  some  inter- 
cepting obstacle  acioss  the  stream. 

171.  If  heavy  siege  artillery  has  to  be  passed  over  a  broad 
river  it  will  generally  be  most  economical  of  m.atcrial  to  con- 
struct the  bridge  of  only  sufficient  strength  for  the  ordinary 
traffic,  and  to  warp  the  guns  across  on  rafts  constructed  of 
sufficient  strength  for  the  purpose. 

172.  To  keep  rifles  and  am.munirion  dry  when  men  swim 
across  a  river,  small  rafts  can  be  made  of  w;iterproof  kitbags 
filled  with  straw,  blown-out  ma'^aks  (water-skins),  cooking 
kettles  or  any  similar  vessels,  which  should  be  placed  mouth 
downwards. 

The  simplest  form  of  permanent  ferry  consists  of  ropes 
stretched  across  the  river  by  means  of  which  rafts  can  be 
sheered  or  hauled  backwards  and  forwards  from  bank  to  bank. 
If  it  be  not  convenient,  for  the  sake  of  traffic  or  other  reasons, 
to  stretch  a  rone  across  the  stream,  recourse  may  be  had,  if 
the  current  is  rapid  and  regular,  to  a  flying  brid<7e,  which  is  one 
in  which  the  action  of  the  current  is  made  to  move  a  boat  or 


N 


P(xrf€.^e. 


FORDS    &  FLYING     BRIDGES 


^ 


Stream^ 


^^*^ tP- 7^^-^. 


y 


VMIerii&r»t>a«  'C*  li>(M.Lon(ton 


()ppcsxjb&  Jiaxfp^  67, 


CHAPTER    XIV. — BRIDGES.  G7 

raft  across  the  stream  by  acting  obliquely  against  its  side, 
which  should  be  kept  at  an  angle  of  about  55°  with  the  current. 
(PI.  56,  Fig.  3.) 

Long  narrow  deep  boats  with  vertical  sides,  to  which  lee 
boards  can  be  attached,  are  the  best  for  the  purpose,  and 
straight  reaches  the  most  suitable  places,  as  they  are  generally 
free  fiom  irregularities  of  current  or  backwaters. 

The  cable,  which  should,  if  possible,  float,  such  as  coir  rope, 
can  either  be  anchored  in  mid-stream,  in  which  case  the  raft 
can  swing  between  two  landing  piers  ;  or  two  cables  may  be 
used,  one  anchored  on  either  bank,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2.  This 
method  requires  less  skill  in  manipulation,  but  necessitates 
two  cables  and  four  piers. 

The  length  of  a  swinging  cable  should  be  one  and  a  half  to 
two  times  the  breadth  of  the  river,  and  it  will  work  better  if 
supported  on  intermediate  buoys  or  floats  to  prevent  it  from 
dragging  in  the  water. 

Telegraph  wire,  buoyed  up  as  above,  on  meat  tins,  makes 
a  good  swinging  cable.  Another  way  is  to  stretch  a  wire 
cable  across  the  river,  and  arrange  the  raft  so  as  to  travel 
along  it  {see  Fig.  4,  PI.  56). 

173.  The  following  depths  are  fordable  : — •  I'unls. 

For  infantry,  .3  feet. 
For  cavalry,  4  feet. 
Artillery,  2  feet  4  inches. 
Gravelly  bottoms  are  best,  sandy  bottoms  are  bad,  as  the  sand 
gets  stirred  up,  and  the  depth  of  water  thus  increases. 

Fords  should  be  clearly  marked  by  long  pickets  driven  into 
the  river  bed  above  and  below  the  ford,  their  heads  being 
connected  by  a  strong  rope.  It  is  well  to  mark  the  pickets  in 
order  that  any  rise  of  the  water  may  be  at  once  evident. 

The  depth  of  a  river  is  generally  most  uniform  in  straight 
parts  ;  at  bends  the  depth  will  generally  be  greater  at  the 
concave  bank  and  less  at  the  convex.  Thus,  in  PI.  56,  Fig.  1, 
the  depth  will  probably  be  above  the  average  at  C  and  F, 
and  there  will  be  shallow  spits  at  D  and  E. 

For  this  reason  a  river  which  is  not  anywhere  fordable  straight 
across  may  be  found  passable  in  a  slanting  direction  betweer 
two  bends,  as  at  A  B,  Fig.  1. 

(5289)  E  2 


68 

CHAPTER   XV.— CAMPING   ARRANGEMENTS. 
Cooking. 


Field 
kitchens. 


Covered 
kitchen. 


Expedi- 
ents. 


Kettles. 


174.  To  cook  for  a  large  party,  the  most  economical  method 
is  to  dig  or  build  up  a  long  trench  for  the  fire,  place  the  kettles 
on  it  (its  width  not  being  sufficient  to  yllow  them  to  drop  into 
it),  and  cover  up  between  them  with  stones  and  clay,  that  the 
fire,  fed  from  the  windward  end,  may  draw  right  through. 
A  chimney  can  be  built  at  the  other  end  to  increase  the  draught. 

The  section  of  a  typical  trench  for  this  purpose  is  shown  in 
Fig.  1,  PI.  57. 

The  chimney  can  be  built  of  sods,  and  is  supported  where  it 
passes  over  the  trenches,  by  flat  stones,  slates,  wood  covered 
with  clay,  &c.  The  inside  of  the  trenches  and  of  the  chimney 
may  be  plastered  with  clay,  which  makes  them  last  longer. 
Several  such  trenches  may  be  combined,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2, 
to  form  what  is  known  as  the  "parallel  or  rectangular  kitchen, 
or  three  trenches  may  converge  to  one  flue,  as  shown  in  Fig.  3, 
forming  what  is  known  as  the  broad  arrow  kitchen. 

175.  The  gridiron  kitchen  (Aldershot  pattern)  is  shown  in 
PL  58. 

176.  PI.  57,  figs.  4  and  5,  gives  details  of  a  covered  kitchen, 
suitable  for  standing  camps.  The  roof  may  be  covered  with 
tarpauhns,  or  in  the  manner  described  in  Section  193. 

177.  For  a  small  party  the  cooking  may  be  done  by  digging 
a  shallow  trench,  in  the  direction  of  the  wind,  to  contain 
the  fuel.  Small  pieces  of  iron  will  be  found  very  useful  to 
support  the  kettle.  Another  way  is  not  to  excavate  the  ground 
at  all  but  to  build  up  two  rough  walls  of  stones  on  the  top 
of  which  the  kettle  is  placed. 

The  simplest  and  best  arrangement  for  cooking  in  the  field 
for  any  party  over  20,  especially  if  the  stay  in  camp  is  only 
for  one  night,  is  to  place  a  porportion  of  the  kettles  on  the 
ground  in  two  parallel  rows  about  0  inches  apart,  handles  out- 
wards, block  the  leeward  end  of  the  trench  so  formed  w4th 
another  kettle,  lay  the  fire  and  place  over  it  one  or  two  rows 
pf  kettles  resting  on  those  already  placed  in  position  {see  PL  59). 


JPlccte.51. 


KITCHENS. 


riy.z 


Seotvo 


RECTANGULAR 


CvoJcj  f»f     V'.ft-i     BROAD 


3 A?  ftten. 


ARROW 


COVERED      KITCHEN 


\f^'\\     Tr^.^.     i'^:^!^ 


Ti^.5 


WeU«r«,«ireh««.L'*  liH>O.U>«««r 


Opposite  pciqe  S8, 


J^lat^5ti 


GRIDIRON     KITCHEN 


I'Zjr^.?. 


up!'^^  a 


^/ 


¥:r  ii 


A^ 


.^f1 


p 


^!-f-'?---:-jf-*'---^-'ii 


1 — n 


/\   /\   /\   /\   /\   /\   / 


\J\ 


^rervchy  36  '^2'' X  7  'S  oi&^pff 


JPVy.^. 


ALDERSHOT     OVEN 


J^z^.S 


cae  8  OS 


welter &€r«h4n.L"  LitftoLondon 

7h  foZlcnv plate 37. 


Plate  f  3. 


COOKING  IN  THE  FIELD 


Fiff.l. 


>.^^>    -^'■ 


™.^.'-.  "  -~>tK*/ 


V/eller<<CrBtiafn  L"    LirNc  lor.do'^ 

2«  foUcrrv pluJ:^SS 


FIELD       OVENS 


^iff.4: 


Sectlorv  CU 


>--->■ 


•^jTjjr.^. 


>; 


-i* ♦,' 


^^-? 


:Pljajv 


-i 


j^.S. 


«« g- 


Wef1tr«i6f«h«m,  L'f  Lirho.Lon^on 
To  fblZo^  plate 59. 


CHAPTER  XV. — CAMPING  ARRANGEMENTS.        69 

Mess  tins  can  be  arranged    similarly,  but  in  their  case  not  Mess  tins, 
more  than  eight  should  be  used  together. 

178.  The  simplest  form  of  a  field  oven  consists  of  a  hearth  Field 
sunk  below  the  ground  surface,  with,  an  arch  formed  by  a  hurdle  o^^^ns. 
or  sheet  iron  {see  ?1.  60).      The  two   gable  ends   are  formed 
with   sods.     The  whole  of  the  interior   of   the   oven   is    well 
plastered  with  cowdung  and  clay.     The  hurdle,  well  plastered 

on  the  outside  with  cowdung  and  clay  so  as  to  leave  an  arch 
when  it  burns  away,  is  covered  with  earth  from  the  excava- 
tion. The  entrance  to  the  oven  is  closed  either  by  a  hurdle 
plastered  with  '^]ay  or  simply  by  sods. 

This  oven  is  specially  suitable  for  making  bread,  and  will 
bake  for  about  150  men  at  a  time. 

Figs.  5,  6,  and  7  show  an  oven  with  a  flue  underneath  an 
iron  hearth.  The  oven  is  first  heated  by  lighting  a  fire  inside 
it,  and  this  is  afterwards  raked  out  and  pushed  into  the  flue 
below  to  maintain  the  heat.  It  is  a  very  useful  oven  for 
baking  or  keeping  men's  dinners  warm.  The  service  oven, 
Aldershot  pattern,  should  be  fixed  up  without  the  flue,  but 
placed  on  a  prepared  flattened  site. 

Latrines. 

179.  Latrines  should    be   made  as  soon  as  troops  arrive  on  Latriues. 
the  ground  ;   a  small  shallow  trench  will  suffice  for  one  night ; 

and  should  be  invariably  filled-in  in  the  morning,  before  the 
troops  march  oS.  In  standing  camps  latrines  may  be  made 
with  seats,  the  seat  being  a  pole  (see  Figs.  1  and  2,  PI.  61)  ; 
additional  comfort  may  be  given  by  adding  a  top  pole 
to  form  a  back,  as  shown.  Other  forms  are  shown  in 
Figs.  6  and  7. 

In  order  to  keep  out  flies  latrines,  where  practicable,  should 
be  closed  in  and  made  as  dark  as  possible. 

Latrines  should  be  constructed  to  seat  if  possible  at  least 
5  per  cent,  of  the  troops,  1  yard  per  man  being  allowed. 
The  trenches  must  be  narrow  and  deep  to  prevent  the  contents 
being  blown  about.  When  natives  are  employed  special 
latrines  for  them  are  necessary. 


70        CHAPTER  XV. — CAMPING  ARRANGEMENTS. 

It  is  very  important  that  a  couple  of  inches  of  the  driest 
earth  obtainable  should  be  thrown  over  the  soil  twice  daily  ; 
this,  if  carefully  done,  will  prevent  all  smell  and  tend  to 
prevent  flies  collecting.  The  earth  may  be  dried  by  pihng  it 
close  to  the  trenches  of  the  field  kitchens.  Lime  or  charcoal 
may  also  be  used  to  deodorise  the  soil  in  the  trenches. 

On  leaving  camp  the  site  of  latrines  should  be  carefully 
marked. 

Too  much  care  cannot  be  bestowed  in  selecting  the  site  of  the 
latrines;  since  flies  are  very  active  agents  in  propagating 
diseases,  latrines  must  be  placed  well  aw^ay  from  cook-houses. 
Care  must  be  taken  that  no  filtration  from  them  may  reach  the 
water  supply. 

Water  Supply. 

Wator  180-  Each  man  requires  for  drinking  about  3  to  4  pints  per 

supply.       diem;  for  drinking  and  cooking,  3  to  4  quarts;  for  drinking, 
cooking,  and  washing,  3  to  4  gallons. 

Each  horse  requires  for  drmking  5  to  10  gallons,  according 
to  work  and  chmate,  soft  water  being  the  best ;  for  cleaning, 
6  to  8  quarts  (which  may  be  salt).  Each  mule  or  ox  drinks 
G  to  8  gallons  ;  each  sheep  or  pig  6  to  8  pints.  These  are 
minimum  quantities. 

Horses  drink  about  I J  gallons  at  a  time. 
In   calculating   troughing,    allow   each   horse   five   minutes 
at  the  trough. 

^.B.—See  also  "  Combined  Training,"  1905,  Sec.  43. 
One  cubic  foot  of  water  =  G^  gallons  (a  gallon  =  10  lbs.). 
Pleasure-        1 81.  The  rough  average  }4eld  of  a  stream  may  be  measured  as 
iiient  ot      follows  : — Select  some   12  yards   or   15  vards   of  the  stream 

..;  -.1 .1  ... 

where  the  channel  is  fairly  uniform,  and  there  are  no  eddies. 
Take  the  breadth  and  average  depth  in  feet  in  three  or  four 
places.  Drop  in  a  chip  of  wood  and  find  the  time  it  takes  to 
travel,  say,  30  feet.  Thus  obtain  the  surface  velocity  in 
feet  per  second.  Four-fifths  of  this  will  give  the  mean  velocity, 
and  this  multiplied  by  the  sectional  area  in  square  feet  will 
give  the  yield  per  second  in  cubic  feet  of  water. 


quantity 
ivquiivd 


yield. 


rCucteGJ 


LATRINES 


S'  0 3 0 rr 


-^ 


.  4-.  M 


38 


Z 


ss 


J-^g.5. 


Section^    6/./^. 


"sias  8.0S 


Opposite  p<^^  70 


CHAPTER  XV. — CAMPING  ARRANGEMENTS.         71 

The  source   of  the  water    supply  should   be    carefully    in-  Source, 
vestigated,  and  measures  tiiken  to  prevent  the  pollution  of  the 
water  en  route  to  the  drinking  supply. 

182.  In  the  field  the  supply  is  usually  obtained  from  sources 
which  are  at  once  available,  such  as  streams,  ponds,  or  existing 
wells.  In  default  of  these  it  may  be  necessary  to  sink  wells 
and  make  reservoirs. 

Surface  springs  should  be  sought  for  in  hollows,   at  the  Surface 
foot  of  hills,  where  the  earth  is  moist  or  where  the  grass  is  springs, 
unusually  green,  where  the  thickest  mists  rise  in  the  mornings  or 
evenings,  &c. 

183.  If  the  supply  be  from  a  lake,  pond,  or  stream,  separate  Protection 
watering-places  for  men  and  animals  must  be  marked  out  and  <^t"  tlie 
sentries  posted.     Stagnant  water,  as  in  a  pond,  is  apt  to  be  ^^^^^^^  ^' 
contaminated  by  large  numbers  of  animals  going  in  to  drink ; 

and  even  in  a  stream,  when  many  animals  are  drinking,  those 
below  get  foul  water.  If  possible,  therefore,  the  water  should 
be  drawn  from  the  source  and  run  into  drinking  troughs  ; 
these  are  best  made  of  canvas  or  of  boards  ;  but  trenches  lined 
with  puddled  clay  answer  the  purpose. 

1 84.  The  overflow  from  the  troughs  must  be  carried  ofi  with 
the  surface  drainage.  The  sites  of  the  troughs  should,  if 
possible,  be  paved  and  drained  for  a  width  of  10  feet,  and  should 
be  so  arranged  that  the  animals  may  move  to  and  from  them 
without  confusion  or  crowding,  arriving  from  one  direction 
and  leaving  in  another. 

Each  horse  occupies  laterally  4  feet ;  if  possible,  all  the  horses 
in  a  camp  should  be  able  to  be  w^atered  in  an  hour. 

When  troughs  cannot  be  made,  the  banks  should  be  cut 
down,  and  a  hard  bottom  formed  on  the  ramp  to  prevent  the 
animal  from  sinking  in.  A  barrier  may  be  placed  in  the  pond 
to  prevent  them  from  going  out  too  far.  The  water  should  not 
be  less  than  5  inches  or  6  inches  deep  where  beasts  are  to  drink. 

185.  In  a  stream  the  men  should  draw  w^ater  above  the  place  Supply 
for  the  animals  ;    while  washing,  &c.,  should  be  done  below,  ^'"'^"^ 
and  drainage  should  enter  below  the  others  as  far  down  stream  ^  '**''^"^*- 
as  possible. 

Barrels  sunk  in  the  bed  of  a  small  stream  afford  convenient 
dipping  places. 


from 
spring 


72  CHAPTER    XV. — CAMPING    ARRANGEMENTS. 

Supply  186.  If  the  supply  be  from  springs,  each  springhead  should  be 

opened  up  and  surrounded  by  a  low  puddled  wall  to  keep  out 
surface  water.  Casks  or  cylinders  made  of  brushwood,  like 
gabions,  make  good  linings  for  springs.  After  they  are  placed, 
puddled  clay  may  be  worked  down  between  the  banks  and  the 
cask  or  cylinders.  The  overflow  may  be  received  into  a  suc- 
cession of  casks  or  half  barrels  (which  may  with  advantage 
have  their  insides  charred)  let  into  the  ground  close  together, 
the  overflow  from  the  first  passing  into  the  second,  and  so  on  ; 
or  deep  narrow  tanks  with  puddled  sides  may  be  constructed 
to  catch  the  overflow. 

Water  from  small  ponds  and  shallow  wells  should  be  avoided, 
if  there  be  a  choice. 
P^-  187.  The  lift  and  force  pump  is  in  most  general  use  in  the 

service.  It  is  worked  by  two  men.  It  can  lift  water  from  a 
depth  of  20  feet  to  28  feet,  and  force  the  water  to  a  height  of 
60  feet  from  its  former  level,  dehvering  12  gallons  per  minute. 


Purifying  Water. 

Boiling.  188.  The  best   method   of   purifying   water  is  by  boiling. 

It  gets  rid  of  temporary  hardness,  renders  dissolved  organic 
matter  harmless,  and  when  carried  out  effectually  practically 
destroys  all  micro-organisms.  The  water  should  be  kept  at  the 
boil  for  at  least  five  minutes. 

Boiled  water  should  be  aerated  before  use.  This  can  be  done 
by  passing  through  a  sieve.  Improvised  methods  can  be 
arranged  according  to  the  means  at  disposal.  Empty  biscuit 
tins  pierced  with  small  holes  suspended  over  a  storage  tank 
do  very  well  for  this  purpose. 

Care  is  necessary  to  prevent  the  addition  of  fresh  impurities 
during  aeration  and  distribution, 
riltraiion.      189.  As  it  is  not  always  possible  to  provide  means  of  boiling 
water  on  a  large  scale,  filtration  must  be  resorted  to. 

Formerly  mechanical  filtration  only  was  attempted  and  a 
clear  sparkling  water  was  considered  good.     Efforts  are  now 


CHAPTER  XV. — CAMPING  ARRANGEMENTS.         73 

directed  to  remove  meclianical  and  chemical  impurities  as 
well  as  micro-organisms.  Several  filters  have  been  brought 
before  the  public,  all  claiming  to  effect  these  purposes.  The 
type  most  familiar  is  the  "  Berkefeld  "  filter.  These  filters, 
if  treated  with  care  and  strict  attention  to  detail,  work  satis- 
factorily. Their  chief  defect  is  a  very  slow  dehvery  when  water 
containing  a  large  percentage  of  suspended  matter  is  used. 
The  porcelain  candles  become  almost  impervious  when  coated 
with  fine  mud  and  constant  cleaning  is  necessary.  This, 
however,  is  an  easy  process. 

Dirty  water  should  be  strained  before  filtering.  A  good 
method  is  to  tack  a  sheet  on  to  a  wooden  frame  so  as  to  form  a 
bag  or  basin ;  put  a  couple  of  handfuls  of  wood  ashes  in  the 
bottom,  and  then  pour  on  the  water,  allowing  it  to  percolate 
into  a  receptacle  beneath. 

190.  Chemicals  are  sometimes  added  either :  {a)  to  precipitate  Addition 
suspended  matters  ;    [b)  to  remove  hardness  or  ;   (c)  to  oxidise  ^^ 
organic  impurities,    {a)  Muddy  water  may  be  cleared  by  adding  ^  ^^^^^^^  ^• 
alum.     Six  grains  of  crystallised  alum  per  gallon  is  sufficient. 
It  should  be  added  some  hours  before  the  water  is  required. 
[b)  Water  can  be  softened  by  the  addition  of  Hme water  for 
drinking  and  carbonate  of  soda  for  washing  purposes.     The 
latter  is  unsuitable  for  drinking  water  as  it  gives  an  unpleasant 
taste,     (c)   Permanganate  of  potash  (Condy's  fluid)   removes 
offensive  smell  from  water  and  to  some  extent  oxidises  dissolved 
organic  matter.     It  should  be  added  until  a  faint  tint  remains 
permanent.     It  has  not  a  disagreeable  taste. 


Shelters  and  Huts. 

191.  Bivouacs  are  but  seldom  resorted  to  except  in  the  neigh-  Bivouacs, 
bourhood  of  an  enemy,  when  miUtary  rather  than  sanitary 
considerations  are  of  primary  importance.      The  following  are 
the  chief  points  to  borne  in  mind  in  determining  the  sites 
for  bivouacs  : — 

In  the  presence  of  an  enemy,  tactical  considerations,  e.g.,  Choice  of 
favourable  ground  for  defence  in  the  event  of  attack,  conceal-  ground 


74         CHAPTER  XV. — CAMPING  ARRANGEMENTS. 

ment,  facilities  of  protection,  and  consequently,  economy 
in  outposts  are  of  the  first  importance.  The  comfort  of  the 
troops,  in  conjunction  with  sanitary  conditions,  is  the  next 
consideration. 

A  good  water  supply  is  essential,  but  considerations  of 
safety  may  necessitate  a  camp  or  Livouac  being  placed  at 
some  distance  from  it.  Other  points  to  be  considered  are  the 
facilities  which  a  site  offers  for  obtaining  shelter,  fuel,  forage 
and  straw. 

The  site  for  a  camp  or  bivouac  should  be  dry,  and  on  grass 
if  possible.  Steep  slopes  should  be  avoided.  Large  woods 
with  undergrowth,  low  meadows,  and  newly  turned  soil 
are  apt  to  be  unhealthy.  Clay  is  usually  damp.  Ravines 
and  watercourses  are  dangerous  sites,  as  a  sudden  fall  of 
rain  may  convert  them  into  streami.s. 

If    the    occupation    is   to    be  of  a  permanent    nature,    as 
in  investment  warfare  and  the  defence  of    strategical  points, 
the  men  ought  to  be  hutted. 
Tem-  192.  PI.  62  suggests   methods  of  forming  simple   shelters, 

porarv  Yis.  1.  Two  forked  sticks  driven  into  the  ground  with  a  pole 
restmg  on  them  ;  branches  are  then  laid  resting  on  the  pole, 
thick  end  uppermost,  at  an  angle  of  about  45"^,  and  the  screen 
made  good  with  smaller  branches,  ferns,  &c. 

A  hurdle  may  be  supported  and  treated  in  a  similar  way. 

Fig.  2.  A  waterproof  sheet,  blanket,  or  piece  of  canvas 
secured  by  poles  and  string. 

Fig.  .3.  A  tent  (Tabri  for  four  men,  formed  with  two  blankets 
or  waterproof  sheets  laced  together  at  the  ridge,  the  remaining 
two  blankets  being  available  for  cover  inside. 

Fig.  4.  A  wall  of  straw  or  reeds  nipped  between  two  pairs 
of  sticks,  tied  together  at  intervals. 

Figs.  5  and  7.     Sentry  box  for  standing  camps. 

When  no  other  materials  than  earth  and  brushwood  are 
available,  a  comfortable  bivouac  for  12  men  can  be  formed 
by  excavating  a  circle  with  a  diameter  of  18  feet,  or  there- 
abouts, and  piling  up  the  earth  to  form  a  wall  2  feet  or  3  feet 
high.  The  men  lie  down,  like  the  spokes  of  a  wheel,  with  their 
feet  towards  the  centre.  Branches  of  trees,  or  brushwood  stuck 
into  the  wall,  improve  the  shelter. 


shelters. 


L     V 


^W^ex^ 


BIVOUACS. 


:Fzff.i. 


SFig.Z'. 


STteZce?^   Terut 


:Fcgr.3. 


^^■^' 


^rv:>7ft.  of  T-ourLdySooo 


sias  3.  as 


Opposi/^.  page  74 


Plojte  63. 


HUTS. 


^7^anrk4s. 


THATCHING 


?ra^ 


siee  i  .OS. 


Plate  ^4 


HUTS 


\^^  :  ^'.'n    <■ '   -"',  f-,    f  I  -*  ■? -, »  '    -r^  '^'^ 


pieces 


-?'"Y<y.  ^. 


JLoq.  SuJ(> 


J±^Z,ou7y 


SIB9.  a.os. 


WcilerAGratiam.  LH  Litho. London. 


CHAPTER  XV. — CAMPING  ARRANGEMENTS.         75 

193.  The  materials  of  which  huts  are  made  depend  upon  the  Huts, 
resources  of  the  locality,  and  are  principally  brushwood,  logs, 
straw,  reeds,  clay,  turf,  and  stones. 

The  best  form  of  hut  is  generally  rectangular  in  plan,  with  Plan, 
sufficient  width  for  two  rows  of  beds,  and  a  passage  down  the 
centre,  but,  where  the  material  available  is  of  small  size, 
one  row  of  beds  may  be  provided,  or  the  hut  may  be  made  of 
circular  form.  A  width  of  at  least  G  feet  should  be  allowed  for 
each  row  of  beds,  and  the  passage  may  be  from  2  feet  to  i  feet 
wide. 

The  accommodation  may  be  calculated  on  active  service  Accommo. 
at  one  man  per  foot  in  length  of  the  hut,  when  there  are  two  ^^^^o"- 
rows  of  beds,  and  one  man  to  every  2  feet  when  only  one  row 
on  beds. 

Fig.  1,  PI.  63,  shows  how  the  ordinary  6-foot  hurdles  may 
be  arranged  to  form  a  hut.  A  fascine  at  the  ridge,  with  thatching 
of  straw,  reeds,  &c.,  may  be  used  as  roofing. 

Hurdles  may  be  made  of  special  dimensions  for  hutting  Hurdles, 
purposes.  Fig.  2  shows  how  a  hurdle  10  feet  long  (measured 
on  the  curve)  may  be  made  into  a  hut.  The  hurdle  is  constructed 
on  a  curve  slightly  flatter  than  that  it  is  intended  to  have, 
so  that  it  is  necessary  to  spring  it  together  to  get  it  into  position. 
It  is  then  secured  with  pickets,  and  covered  with  sods,  or  daubed 
with  clay  in  the  manner  described  in  Sec.  195.  The  ground 
forming  the  floor  of  the  hut  may  be  sloped  as  shown  before 
putting  on  the  hurdles. 

Hurdles  for  hutting  purposes  should  have  the  ends  of  the 
pickets  cut  off  as  close  to  the  web  as  possible,  so  as  to  leave  no 
gaps  between  them. 

194,  When  brushwood  of  2  inches  or  3  inches  diameter  and  Brush- 
14  feet  or  15  feet  long  is  available,  a  hut  for  a  double  row  of  wood, 
beds  may  be  made  as  in  Figs.  3  and  5. 

The  section  of  the  hut  being  decided  on,  is  laid  out  on  the 
ground ;  from  this  the  length  of  the  rafters  is  obtained. 
Each  side  of  the  roof  is  then  made  separately  on  the  ground 
as  follows  : — 

Poles  of  2  inches  to  3  inches  diameter  are  laid  on  the  ground 
parallel  to  each  other,  from  18  inches  to  2  feet  apart,  as  aa, 
in  Fig.  4,  PL  63.     These  form  the  rafters.     On  the  slope  of  the 


76 


CHAPTER    XV. — CAMPING    ARRANGEMENTS. 


ixiaterial. 


Passa*. 


rafters,  and  at  right  angles  to  them,  hght  rods  or  laths,  hh. 
from  -J  inch  to  I  inch  thick  are  laid,  the  uppermost  one  being 
at  such  a  distance  from  the  bottom  of  the  poles  as  will  allow 
the  frames^  when  made,  to  lock  at  the  desired  height  above  th^^. 
ground,  the  lowermost  one  being  within  a  few  inches  of  the 
bottom,  and  the  interval  between  being  divided  according  to 
ll-e  length  of  the  thatching  or  covering  material.  The  distance 
apart  of  these  laths  should  be  slightly  less  than  half  the  length 
of  the  covering  material,  so  that  the  latter  may  be  supported 
i.t  three  points.  With  good  wheaten  straw  the  !nterv:il  may 
be  from  12  inches  to  1^  feet.  At  each  point  of  crossing  the 
laths  and  rafteis  are  secured  by  a  short  length  of  one  strand 
of  spun  yarn,  and  the  frame  thus  made  is  afterwards  stiffened 
by  diagonals  lashed  underneath. 

The  roofing  material,  which  may  be  unbroken  straw,  rushes, 
long  ferns,  &c.,  Is  now  put  on.  Commencing  at  the  bottom, 
a  layer  4  inches  or  5  inches  thick  is  equally  laid  over  the  three 
lowest  laths,  ears  or  tops  downwards  ;  it  is  here  secured  by 
a  light  rod  or  thatching  piece  tied  with  spun  yarn  at  intervals 
of  2  feet  or  3  feet  to  the  second  lath  from  the  bottom.  A  second 
layer  is  now  put  on  one  lath  higher  up,  and  is  secured  in  a 
similar  w^ay  to  the  third  lath  from  the  bottom,  and  so  on 
until  the  top  is  reached ;  the  last  layer  projecting  over  the 
top  lath,  so  that  when  the  frames  are  locked  the  ends  may 
be  twisted  together  to  keep  out  wet  (Fig.  6,  PI.  63).  When 
both  frames  are  ready  they  are  raised  and  locked,  as  in  Fig.  3. 
Forked  uprights  and  a  ridge  piece  may  be  added  to  stiffen  the 
roof. 

Each  side  of  the  roof  may  be  made  in  one  piece,  or  if  large 
and  inconvenient  to  move,  in  two  sections.  The  ends  of  the 
laths  should  project  about  2  feet  beyond  the  extreme  rafters, 
and  are  supported  by  the  framework  forming  the  Gable  ends, 
Fig.  5.  The  latter  are  made  and  thatched  in  a  similar  way  to 
the  roof,  and  simultaneously  with  it,  an  opening  being  left 
for  a  door. 

In  order  to  give  additional  headway,  the  passage  may  be  sunk 
as  in  Fig.  3,  with  steps  at  each  end,  the  earth  being  thrown 
to  the  eaves  as  additional  protection,  and  to  give  more  head 
room  when  lying  down.  In  very  cold  weather  the  whole 
interior  of  the  hut  may  be  excavated,  fireplaces  constructed 


CHAPTER    XV. — CAMPING    ARRANGEMENTS.  77 

as  in  Fig.  1,  PI.  CA,  and,  if  the  rafters  be  strong,  some  of  the 
excavated  earth  may  be  thrown  on  to  the  top  of  the  roof, 
a  collar  tie  being  added  to  strengthen  it. 

Huts  may  also  be  thatched  by  forming  the  straw  or  grass  into  Panels. 
panels.     The   straw   in   moderately  thick    layers   is   doubled 
and  nipped  near  the  centre  between  two  rods,  one  above  and 
one  below,  which  are  tied  tightly  together  at  the  ends  and  at 
intervals  of  about  6  inches. 

The  panels  formed  thus  are  tied  on  to  the  roof,  being  placed 
so  as  to  overlap  hke  large  slates. 

195.  Walls    may  be   constructed  of  ivattle   and  daub,  i.e.,  Wattle 
continuous  hurdle  work  daubed  over  on  one  or  both  sides  with  «^f^  daub 
clay,  in  which  is  a  proportion  of  any  fibrous  substance,  such  ^'^*^'^' 

as  straw,  grass,  horse  hair,  &c.,  chopped  into  short  lengths 
to  prevent  the  clay  cracking  and  opening  as  it  dries.  This 
mixture,  which  should  be  kneaded  into  the  consistency  of  a  stiff 
paste,  should  be  worked  in  with  the  hands.  The  sides  should 
be  strutted  at  intervals  to  resist  wind,  and  the  roof  mav  be 
carried  on  a  ridge  pole,  which  may  be  strengthened  by  uprights 
in  the  centre,  Fig.  3,  PL  64. 

196.  When  timber  is  abundant,  log  huts  maybe  constructed  Log  huts, 
as  shown  in  Fig.  4,  PI.  64.     No  fastenings  are  required  beyond 

some  trenails  (wooden  pegs)  to  secure  the  rafters  to  the  top 
logs.  The  roof  may  be  made  as  already  described,  or  the 
covering  material  may  be  of  slabs  of  wood,  bark  of  trees,  &c. 

Bark  may  be  got  off  trees  in  large  strips  by  cutting  round 
the  tree  with  a  knife  at  intervals,  say,  of  4  feet ;  then  cutoff 
width  required,  and  beat  with  a  flat  piece  of  wood  to  detach 
the  bark  from  the  tree. 

197.  When  straw  is  issued  for  the  troops  to  he  upon,  it  may  Straw 
be  made  up  into  mats  in  the  manner  shown  in  Pis.  65  and  66.       "^at?. 

To  make  the  mat  shown  on  Fig.  1,  pickets  are  driven  into 
the  ground,  the  outside  pickets  being  at  a  distance  apart 
about  6  inches  less  ttan  the  width  of  the  required  mat.  A 
crossbar,  AB,  is  fixed  about  2  feet  from  the  ground.  Several 
lengths  of  spun  yarn  are  then  taken  and  made  fast,  about  their 
middle,  to  the  crossbar,  AB,  at  a  distance  of  5  inches  or  6  inches 
apart,  and  their  ends  made  fast  to  the  bar,  CD,  and  to  the 
other  pickets,   as  shown  in  the  figure.     Handfujs  of  straw 


70  CHAPTER    XVI. — HASTY    DEMOLITIONS. 

rather  longer  than  the  width  of  the  mat  are  taken  and  pushed 
in  between  the  yarns,  and  the  bar,  CD,  being  alternately 
raised  waist  high  and  depressed  to  the  ground,  and  passed 
inside  and  outside  the  end  pickets,  so  as  to  form  a  hitch. 
Finally,  the  sides  of  the  mat  are  trimmed  to  the  right  size 
by  a  sharp  pair  of  scissors  or  a  knife,  and  the  yarns  finished 
off  at  either  end  with  reef  knots. 
Straw  The   mat  shown   in    Figs.  2   and  3  is  formed  by  making 

ropes.  straw  ropes  and  interlacing  them  on  pickets  driven  into  the 
ground.  If  the  straw  ropes  are  carefully  made,  this  makes  a 
more  durable  mat  than  the  previous  one.      (PL  67.) 


CHAPTER   XVI.— HASTY  DEMOLITIONS   WITH 
EXPLOSIVES. 

Explosives. 

Explosives      198.  The  service  explosives  available  for  hasty  demoHtions 
th^Tlrf"   in  the  field  are  guncotton,  gunpowder,  cordite  ;  guncotton  being 
specially  carried  for  this  purpose.     Dynamite  may  also  some- 
times be  obtained  locally. 
Coin-  For  hasty  demohtions  guncotton  is  by  far  the  best  of  the 

parison  of  service  explosives.  Its  chief  advantages  over  gunpowder 
Guncotton  ^^^  *^^^  ^^^  equivalent  effects  a  guncotton  charge  takes  up 
and  much  less  room,  and  does  not  require  the  same  amount   of 

powder.      tamping* ;   it  is  therefore  much  more  easily  and  quickly  placed 
and  fired,  which  is  an  important  point  in  hasty  demohtions. 

*  "Tamping"  is  covering  tha  charge  over  with  earth  or  other  material 
so  as  to  confine  the  gases  at  the  commencement  of  the  explosion,  and  thus 
develop  their  force  more  fully. 


Plate.    65. 


STRAW        MATS 


MALAY    HJTCH 


STRAW    ROPE     MATS 


^^J7-  ^ 


^^.3. 


J*Lckjsts  G'apccrt. 


"VTsr. 


WielleriCrabam.Qf    Utho.Loftdon. 


Plaix.66, 


MAKING     STRAW    MATS 


jBfeM 


Wel'erA Graham  L^r    Litho,London. 
To  foUvyv  j>hx±c.  S5 


^Zcote,   67 


MAKING       STRAW     ROPE 


*&g     i    •S. 


Welier fc Graham.  Lff  Lirti6.Loodon 

Tc  fellow  pLocte  6^ 


CHAPTER  XVI. — HASTY  DEMOLITIONS.  79 

Guncotton  is  also  safer  in  transport  and  handling. 

Cordite  and  dynamite  are  nearly  as  powerful  as  guncotton,  Cordite 
and  have  the  above  advantages  over  gunpowder,  but  are  not  ^"^ 
so  safe  m  transport. 

Where  a  lifting  and  shaking  effect  is  required,  gunpowder  is 
best. 

Where  a  cutting  or  shattering  effect  is  required,  which  is 
most  likely  in  hasty  demolitions,  guncotton,  cordite  or 
dynamite  are  best. 

Guncotton. 

199.  Guncotton,    if  steeped   in  water,    will    absorb  about  ProporMes 
30  per  cent,  of  its  weight.  ^^  ^^'©t 

Wet  guncotton  does  not  ignite  easily,  and  requires  the  ex-  ^^"^^^^  °"' 
plosion  of  a  very  large  amount  of  detonating  substance,  such 
as  fulminate  of  mercury,  in  contact  with  it  to  detonate  it. 

Dm  guncotton  will  not  detonate  in  the  open  in  small  quantities  Properties 
if  a  light  be  set  to  it,  nor  if  a  bullet  strikes  it  when  not  heated.  °^  ^^^ 

It  will  detonate  if  it  is  struck  between  two  hard  substances.  ^"^°° 

If  dry  guncotton,  especially  when  finely  divided  in  the  shape  Sensitive 
of  fluff,  becomes  heated  in  any  way  (through  friction  or  the  T^^^I^. 
heat  of  the  sun)  it  is  much  more  sensitive  to  percussion. 

If  a  small  quantity  of  detonating  substance  such  as  fulminate  Means  of 
of  mercury  be  exploded  in  contact  with  dry  guncotton,  it  will  detonating 
detonate  with  great  violence,   and  also  cause   the  complete  ^^^ 
detonation  of  any  wet  or  dry  guncotton  with  which  it  is  in  ^^^^^ 
contact. 

The  explosive  force  of  wet  guncotton  is  slightly  greater  than 
that  of  dry. 

So  that  for  safety  in  transport,  &c.,  in  the  field,  the  bulk  of  Carried 
guncotton  is  carried  and  used  wet  in  the  shape  of  "  slabs^  ^®^- 
For  detonating  this,  dry  guncotton  is  also  carried  in  the  shape 
of  small  discs   called   "  primers'''      The  following  table  gives  Primers, 
the  dimensions  of  the  slabs  and  primers  for  land  service  : — 

Slabs  are  issued  in  two  sizes,  about  6  inches  square,  weighing 
1}  and  14  lbs.  respectively. 

Primers  are  also  issued  in  two  sizes,  weighing  1  oz  and  2  ozs. 
respectively. 


80  CHAPTER   XVI. — HASTY    DEMOLITIONS- 

The  slabs  have  two  holes  in  them,  one  to  fit  the  1  oz.  primer 
and  the  other  the  2  oz.  primer. 

Cavalry  pioneers  carry  special  1  lb.  slabs. 
Primers  are  carried  dry  in  airtight  tin  cyhnders. 
Use  of  wet      For  auger  holes  and  for  necklaces  round  timber,  dry  gun- 
and  dry      cotton    primers   form   the   charge.     Otherwise    the   charge  is 
S"^^^"'^"- always  of  wet  slabs. 

Details.  The  slabs  can  be  cut  without  danger  with  a  sharp  knife  or 

saw,  care  being  taken  to  press  the  guncotton  between  boards 
whilst  it  is  being  cut  to  prevent  it  flaking  away.     There  is 
a  special  clamp  in  the  R.E.  equipment  for  doing  this.     The 
guncotton  should  be  kept  damp. 
]\reans  of        A  charge  of  wet  guncotton  is  detonated  by  means  of  the 
detona-       explosion  of  a  dry  primer  in  close  contact  with  it.     The  primer 
*'^®°'  is  exploded  by  means   of  a   "  detonator,"   the  detonator  is 

detonated  by  means  of  either  "  safety "   or  "  instantaneous 
fuze,"  which  is  lit  by  a  fusee  or  other  means.     (For  details 
of  detonators,  fuzes,  see  Sec.  205   and  onward.) 
Tinpro-  If  dry  primers  are  not  available,  a  piece  of  wet  guncotton 

rised  can  be  dried  hy  exposure  to  the  sun,  and  used  instead, 

primer. 

Connect.        200.  A  charge  is  connected  up  for  detonation  as  follows  : — 
ing  up  for      '£\iq  fuze  (safety  alone  or  safety  wdth  instantaneous)  is  cut 
to  the  required  length.     The  end  to  be  ignited  is  cut  on  a  slant 
to  expose  as  much  of  the  composition  as  possible. 

The  end  to  be  inserted  in  the  detonator  is  cut  straight  across. 
The  straight  cut  end  is  then  gently  inserted  into  the  open 
end  of  No.  8  detonator,  from  which  the  paper  cap  has  been 
torn.  This  end  of  the  detonator  is  then  slightly  bent  (or  with 
new-pattern  detonator,  pinched)  to  make  it  grip  on  the  fuze 
and  so  prevent  its  being  withdrawn. 

(Cavalry  pioneers  carry  detonators  with  a  short  length  of 
safety  fuze  ready  fixed,  the  fuze  having  a  piece  of  quickmatch 
added  to  the  end  to  facilitate  lighting.) 

The  primer  having  been  placed  in  close  contact  with  one  of 
the  slabs  of  the  charge,  either  in  one  of  the  holes  or  tied  to  a 
slab  (see  that  the  primer  is  dry),  the  small  end  of  the  detonator 
is  gently  inserted  into  it  so  as  to  fill  the  entire  length  of  the 
hole.     If  the  hole  is  too  large,  a  piece  of  paper  or  grass  must 


detoiia 
tion. 


CHAPTER   XVI. — HASTY  DEMOLITIONS.  81 

be  wrapped  round  the  detonator  to  make  it  fit  tight ;  if  too 

small,  it  must  be  enlarged  with  the  rectifier*  or  piece  of  wood,  Rectifiers. 

but  not  with  the  detonator. 

The  charge  must  he  in  dose  contact  ivith  the  object  to  he  de-  Arrange- 
molished,  and  all  the  slabs  must  he  touching  each  other.  n^ent  of 

Where  the  charge  is  a  very  long  one,  more  than  one  detonator  "  ^^^S®- 
should  be  used. 

The  charge  must  extend  across  the  whole  length  of  the  object  placing  of 
to  be  cut.  charge. 

Arrangements  must  be  made  to  prevent  sparks  from  the 
fuze  falling  on  it  and  so  setting  it  alight  instead  of  detonating  it. 

For  calculation  of  charge,  see  Chapter  XXI.  Amount  of 

charge. 


Gunpowder. 

201.  Gunpowder  is  not  so  suitable  for  hasty  demolitions  as  Details, 
guncotton.  and  the  larger  the  grain  of  the  gunpowder  the  less 
suitable  it  is,  owing  to  its  slow  burning. 

Except  the  larger  grained  prism  and  moulded  powders, 
which  are  packed  in  cases,  it  is  usually  carried  in  barrels, 
the  powder  being  contained  in  a  waterproof  bag  inside  the 
barrels. 

Powder  is  usually  fired  by  safety  or  instantaneous  fuze.       Ignition. 

A   gunpowder   charge   should  be  made    up  in  as  compact  Making  up 
a  form  as  possible,  and  if  sandbags  filled  with  earth  are  used  t!iechargf. 
to  tamp  it,  the  charge  should  be  of  the  same  shape  as  the  sand 
bags. 

A  service  sandbag  will  hold  about  40  lbs.  of  gunpowder, 
which  is  about  as  much  as  a  man  can  carry  conveniently. 
When  a  charge  has  to  be  placed  under  fire,  and  the  amount  is 
greater  than  this,  it  should  be  divided  amongst  several  bags, 
as  required,  rather  than  put  into  one  large  one.  In  this  case 
only  one  bag  need  be  fuzed. 

*  Eectifiers  arc  boxwood  implements  supplied  for  enlarging  tlie  per- 
forations in  guncotton  primers  so  as  to  take  the  shanks  of  detonators. 

(5289)  V 


82  CHAPTER    XVI. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS. 

Connet-  A  gunpowder  charge  should  not,  as  a  rule,  be  spread  evenly 
ing  up  along  the  whole  breadth  of  the  object  to  be  destroyed,  but 
'"■■'^'*  should  be  divided  up  into  portions,  which   may  generally  be 

ignition       ^^  ^  distance  apart  of  twice  the  thickness  of  the  object.     The 

several  portions  must  be  fired  simultaneously. 

In  the  case  of  a  stockade  or  fort  gate,  one  concentrated 

charge  will  make  a  breach  wide  enough  to   admit  of  easy 

entrance. 
Amount  of      For  the  amount  of  charges  suitable,  see  Chapter  XXI. 
fharge. 


Cordite. 

Supply.  202.  Cordite  can  be  used  instead  of  guncotton  or  dynamite. 

It  may  be  obtained  from  gun  cartridges,  and  would  only  be 

used  where  no  other  explosive  is  available. 
Making  up      It  must   be  detonated  with  a  guncotton   primer,    and   the 
charge.       cordite  should  be  tied  up  in  a  tight  bundle  with  the   primer  in 

the  centre. 

The  primer  being  connected  up  with  No.  8  detonator  and 

fuze  as  described  for  guncotton. 

Its  successful  detonation  is  rather  uncertain. 
Placing  As  with  guncotton,  the  charge  must  be  in  close  contact  with 

charge.       the  object  to  be  demohshed. 

The  cordite  must  be  covered  up  with  fresh  grass  or  leaves 

to  prevent  the  sparks  from  the  fuze  setting  it  alight,  which 

happens  very  easily. 
Amount  of      As  for  guncotton,  see  table,  Chapter  XXI. 
charge. 

Dyxamite. 

Supply.  203.  D}Tianiite,  where    procurable,  can   be  used  instead  of 

guncotton. 

For  military  purposes  the  only  advantage  that  dynamite 
has  over  guncotton  is,  that  being  plastic  it  is  easier  to  fit  into 
narrow  and  irregular  holes  such  as  are  used  for  blasting  rock. 


CHAPTER    XVI. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS.  83 

For  demolishing  masonry  it  is  not  so  good  as  guncottom,. 
as  its  action  is  even  more  local. 

It  cannot  be  used  after  exposure  to  wet,   which  separates  General 
the  nitro- glycerine  and  makes  it  dangerous.  properlies. 

It  freezes  at  40°  F.,  and  remains  frozen  at  higher  tempera- 
tures. Frozen  dynamite  can  be  distinguished  by  being 
harder  than  unfrozen,  by  being  more  brittle  than  plastic,  and 
being  of  a  slightly  lighter  colour. 

Frozen  dynamite  should  if  possible  be  thawed  before  use. 
It  cannot  be  usad  when  frozen  as  it  will  not  detonate  readily, 
though  it  will  explode  bv  simple  ignition. 

IT  MUST  NOT  BE  THAWED  NEAR  A  FIRE,  but  by 
the  warmth  of  warm  water,  in  some  apparatus  like  a  common 
glue  pot,  where  the  dynamite  can  be  kept  dry  while  surrounded 
by  warm  water  not  hotter  than  the  wrist  can  bear. 

It  is  usually  obtained  in  2  oz.  cartridges  wrapped  in  parch- Supply, 
ment  paper. 

It  can  be  detonated  by  fuze  and  No.  8  detonator,  or  by  Detona- 
fuze  and  cap.  tion. 

No.  8  detonator  is  unnecessarily  strong. 

When  cold  weather  is  likely,  dynamite  should  be  buried  a  Storage. 
foot  or  two  underground. 


hN 


Dynamite  Charges. 


204.  If  a  No.  8  detonator  be  used,  this  is  connected  up  with  Connecb- 
fuze,  as  described  for  guncotton,  and  the  end  inserted  into  one  J^g  ^^P 
of  the  cartridges  for  about  2  inches  and  tied  in.  ^^'^^        ^ 

•1  •  11  -1  itj^ix  means  oi 

If  a  commercial  cap  is  used,  the  straight  cut  end  oi  the  luze  oietona- 
having  been  gently  inserted  into  the  mouth  of  the  cap  till  tion. 
it  touches  the  fulminate,  the  mouth  of  the  cap  is  squeezed  to 
hold  the  fuze  in  place. 

(5289)  F  2 


84  CHAPTER   XVI.— HASTY    DEMOLITIONS. 

The  cap,  with  the  fuze  attached,  is  then  inserted  into  one  of 

the  dynamite  cartridges  almost  as  far  as  its  length,  and  tied 

into  position. 
Arr.in2e-         For  a  bore  hole  for  blasting,  or  an  auger  hole  in  timber,  as 
inent  of      many  cartridges  as  necessary  are  inserted,  and  each  squeezed 
cimrge.       -^^  separately  with  a  wooden  rammer  {see  Fig.  7,  PI.  68).     Iron 
Boreholes,  must  not  be  used  to  ram  with,  and  the  ramming  should  be 

gently  done. 

The  cartridge  with  detonator  or  cap  for  firing  should  be  the 

last, 
ri icing  For  other  charges  the  dynamite  should  be  tied  up  in  as 

.thiirges.      compact  a  parcel  as  possible,  and  placed  tight  against    the 

object,  the  means  of  detonation  being  in  one  cartridge. 

All  the  cartridges  of  a  charge  must  be  in  contact. 

Hole  for         Holes  for  detonators  or  caps  must  be  made  with  the  rectifier 

f-^P-  or  a  piece  of  wood. 

'lamping.       The  tamping  of  a  bore  hole  may  be  sand,  clay,  or  water, 

but  in  the  latter  case  the  cap  must  be  kept  dry. 
Ciiccldite.       A  new  explosive  called  cheddite  is  coming  into  use;  it  has 

about  the  same  explosive  effect  as  dynamite,   and  has  the 

advantage  of  not  freezing  at  so  high  a  temperature.     It  would 

be  useful  in  blasting  work. 
Use  under      For  use  under  water  dynamite  and  similar  explosives  should 
uater.         \jq  ^ied  in  a  waterproof  bag  {see  PI.  68,  Fig.  8)    . 


Means  of  Detonation  and  Ignition. 
Detonators. 

Dctoua-  205.  There  are  two  kinds  of  detonators  in  the  service  for 

tors  for      detonating      guncotton ;     only   one   will   be   here   described, 
gunootton,  y^^.,  that  called  "  Detonator  No.  8  for  safety  fuze  "  ;    the 

other,  which  requires  electrical  firing  apparatus,  being  beyond 

the  scope  of  this  manual. 
Iso.  3  Fig.  1,  PI.  68,  gives  a  section  of  this  detonator.     It  consists 

dcionalor.  ^f  ^  brass  tube  painted  red,  the  small  end  of  which,  A,  contains 


PlCLte  f'8 


HASTY      DEMOLITIONS 


Irq.  J. 


0Ti-Lrky^)lLCfj"7t 


Ft^    9. 


■Jbi 


^^•7' 


s/ee.  4,05. 


Sot/et^'  fiae^s^J 


TrkjfLe  Commfn^rJ /fT    C/tp 


?oz  d^y  disc^ 


Tz^.S, 


7r 


(pr'im.eif^j 


^W 


.6. 


^^  7oz  7>rii 


SFi^.S. 


weiiera.GfiMtam.Lr!'  urhoxenden. 

Opposite  pct^if  S4 


CHAPTER   XVI. — HASTY   DEMOLITIOMS  85 

t"he  detonating  compound  (fulminate  of  mercury)  ;  above  this 
is  a  wooden  plug  with  a  hole  in  it,  through  which  passes  a 
piece  of  quickmatch.  The  upper  end  of  the  tube  is  empty, 
for  the  insertion  of  the  fuze,  and  is  closed  by  a  small  paper  cap. 
These  detonators  are  packed  in  tin  sealed  cylinders  painted 
red,  which  contain  25.  A  new  pattern  No.  8,  with  a  short 
shank,  will  shortly  be  introduced. 

No.  8  detonator  will  detonate  dry  guncotton,  but  it  will  not 
detonate  wet  guncotton  or  cordite  without  a  primer.  Both 
safety  and  instantaneous  fuze  can  be  connected  to  it. 

Where  dynamite  is  obtained  a  smaller  kind  of  detonator  Com- 
used  in  civil  works  will  often  be  available  and  should  be  used  in  mei-ciai 
preference   to  No    8  detonators   as   being  more   economical.  *^''^'^^^ 
This  is  the  "  commercial  cap,"  which  is  made  of  copper,  and 
contains  less  fulminate  than  the  No.  8  service  detonator,  see 
Fig.  9,  PI.  68. 

These  caps  vary  slightly  in  size  and  strength.  To  detonate- 
dynamite,  trebles  are  used  as  a  rule.  The  weaker  sorts  cannot 
be  counted  on  to  detonate  guncotton  primers,  but  "sextuples" 
are  strong  enough. 

They  can  be  connected  up  to  safety  or  instantaneous  fuze. 

Detonators  must  be  stored  apart  from  explosives  ;    when  Storage- 
attack  is  likely  they  should  be  protected  from  bullets. 


Fuzes. 


206.  The  present  pattern  of  safety  fuze  is  known  as  "  Safety,  Safety 
No.  9."  i"2s- 

This  consists  of  a  train  of  fine  gunpowder  enclosed  in  jute 
yarn,    covered   with     guttapercha   and   waterproof   tape.     It 
is  packed  in  tin  cylinders  containing  8,  24,  or  50  fathoms. 
It  is  coloured  black. 

Safety  fuze  will  burn  under  water.  Bnmin^ 

under 
water. 


86  CHAPTER    XVT. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS. 

Bate  of  For  practical  work  the  rate  of  burning  can  be  taken  as  3  to 

burning.     4  feet  per  minute. 

Old  fuze.  Old  fuze  should  have  its  rate  of  burning  tested  before 
being  used.  Fuze  which  has  been  more  than  six  months  or  so 
in  a  tropical  climate  should  be  very  carefully  examined. 

Lighting  It  is  difficult  to  light  safety  fuze  with  a  match  or  flame.  A 
portfire  or  vesu\'ian  (fusee)  is  best,  but  in  the  absence  of  such 
means  of  ignition,,  the  head  of  a  match  inserted  in  the  fuze  and 
lit  by  another  match,  forms  a  good  method  of  lighting.  A 
glowing  cigar,  cigarette  or  pipe  is  also  good  for  the  purpose. 

Instantaneous  Fuze. 

Instanta-         207.  Consists  of  two  strands  of  quick  match  enclosed  in  flax 
neous  and  several  layers  of  guttapercha  and  waterproof  tape, 

fuze.  j^  burns  at  the  rate  of  30  yards  a  second,  or  practically  in- 

stantaneously ;  it  is  packed  in  sealed  tins  holding  100  yards. 
It  is  coloured  orange. 

It  can  be  distinguished  in  the  dark  from  safety  fuze  by 
feeUng  the  open  crossed  thread  snaking  outside  it. 

Joining  Fuzes. 

Joining  208.  In  firing  charges  with  instantaneous  fuze,  a  piece  of 

fuses.  safety  fuze  should  be  joined  on  for  hghting,  in  order  to  allow 

time  for  getting  away,  except  in  special  cases  where  the  instan- 
taneous fuze  used  is  long  enough  to  admit  of  being  ht  from 
a  safe  place. 
Joining  To  join  safety  and  instantaneous  fuze,  cut  the  instantaneous 

safety  and  f^ze  on  the  slant  so  as  to  expose  the  quickmatch  for  a  short 
instanta-     igng^ji   ^Iso  the  safetv  fuze  in  the  same  wav,  takino;  care  that 

DCOU.S  O        '  •  ^^   ?  o 

fuze.  the  composition  is  well  laid  open. 

Join  these  two  surfaces  together  and  bind  up  tight.     A  small 
'^'    ■       piece  of  wood  is  useful  as  a  splint,  and  if  handy,  a  little  powder 
or  quickmatch  can  be  put  between  the  two  fuzes  (Fig.  2,  PL  68). 
Joining  To  join  two  lengths  of  instantaneous  fuze,  slit  the  outer 

^^°  covering  of  each  piece  of  instantaneous  fuze  at  the  end,  it 

if"?   t        ^^^  ^^^^  ^^  turned  to  expose  the  quickmatch  ;  the  strands  are 
neous  then  twisted  together,  the  outer  covering  made  to  overlap  the 

fuze.  joint,  and  firmly  fixed  with  twine. 


en  AFTER    XVI.  — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS.  87 

Joints  in  fuze  can  be  made  waterproof  by  wrapping  them  Water- 
round  tight  with  indiarubber  tape  smeared  with  indiarubber  pf'^ofing 
solution,    which   aro   articles   of   K.E.    equipment.     Ordinary  ■'^"^  ^' 
tape  and  tallow  would  do  for  a  short  time  against  damp. 

Simultaneous  Charges. 

209.  Charges  are  best    fired   simultaneously  by  electricity.  Simulta- 
When  this  is  not  available,  it  may  be  done  as  shown  in  Fig.  3,  ^^"^ 
PL  68,  by  using   equal   lengths  of  instantaneous  fuze,  "  6c,"        '° 
which  are  ignited  at  "  6  "  by  a  length  of  safety  fuze,  "a?>." 

The  joint  at  "  b  "  can  be  made  with  a  small  bag  or  box 
of  gunpowder,  into  which  the  end  of  the  piece  of  safety  fuze 
and  the  ends  of  the  instantaneous  fuze  are  led,  the  quick- 
match  in  the  latter  being  exposed. 

Care  must  be  taken  that  the  lengths  of  instantaneous  fuze 
are  equxil,  irrespective  of  the  distance  from  the  powder  box  to  the 
charges. 

Substitutes  for  Service  Fuzes. 

210.  When  service  fuzes  are  not  available,  means  of  firmg 
must  be  improvised. 

"  Mealed  powder  "  (which  is  very  fine),  moistened,  or  ordinary  Mealed 
gunpowder  ground  into  a  fine  paste  with  water  between  two  powder, 
pieces  of  wood,  can  be  pressed  into  a  tube  and  used  instead 
of  safety  fuze. 

Tliis  burns  at  the  rate  of  2  feet  per  minute,  or  slower,  depend- 
ing on  the  dampness  of  the  powder. 

Powder   hose,  made  up  by   filling    tubes   of    strong   linen  Powder 
with  fine  powder,  can  be  used  instead  of  instantaneous  fuze,    ^^o^^- 

The  tubes  can  be  from  -J  inch  to  1  inch  in  diameter,  made 
from  one  strip  of  stuff  ;  they  are  loaded  in  lengths  up  to  20  feet 
through  a  funnel.     The  lengths  can  afterwards  be  joined. 

It  burns  at  the  rate  of  from  10  feet  to  20  feet  per  second. 

Precautions. 

211.  For  amount  of  explosive  required,  see  Chapter  XXI.        General 
For  cordite  and  dynamite  use  slightly  more  than  is  required  ^^^^' 

for  guncotton. 


88 


CHAPTER    XVI. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS. 


Storage  of 
(letonators 
iu  cam}3. 

Connect- 
ing up 
detona- 
tors. 


Connect- 
ing up 
caps. ' 

Protec- 
tion to 
detona- 
tor for 
lamping. 


When  possible,  tamp  all  charges.  If  guncotton  charges 
are  tamped,  one-half  the  charges  given  in  the  table  are  sufficient. 

For  demohtions  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  increase  the 
calculated  charges  by  50  per  cent. 

Detonators  should  be  buried  to  prevent  being  exploded  by 
stray  bullets. 

When  connecting  up  No.  8  detonators  with  fuze,  the  de- 
tonating ends  of  the  fuze  should  not  be  pointed  at  anybody. 

When  carried  out  under  fire,  take  every  precaution  against 
a  possible  failure  ;  detail  spare  men  to  carry  the  stores  to 
replace  casualties,  and  see  that  every  man  with  the  party  has 
tl'^^  mean."  of  lighting  the  charge. 

For  large  charges  of  all  sorts  which  cannot  easily  be  got  at 
after  tamping,  and  for  demolition  work  where  certainty  and 
rapidity  are  essential,  it  is  a  good  rule  to  insert  two  fuzes  (and 
detonators  if  required)  in  the  charge  in  case  one  should  prove^ 
faulty. 

When  pinching  or  bending  the  mouth  of  a  detonator  or  cap 
to  grip  the  fuze,  care  should  be  taken  not  to  squeeze  the 
detonating  end. 

When  tamping  a  guncotton  charge  with  earth,  stones,  &c.,, 
the  detonator  should  be  protected  from  being  knocked. 

Make  arrangements  to  prevent  sparks  from  the  fuze  causing 
premature  explosion  of  gunpowder  charges,  or  setting  fire  to 
guncotton. 


Brickwork  and  Masonry. 
General.  212.  For  the  demolition  of  brickwork  or  masonry  with  gun- 
cotton,  the  charges  worked  out  by  the  formulae  in  the  table- 
will  sometimes  be  too  small  to  allow  the  whole  length  of  th& 
breach  to  be  cut,  being  covered  with  whole  slabs  touching  each, 
other.     In  such  a  case  : — 

(a)  If  guncotton  is  available,  do  not  divide  slabs,  but  add 

extra  slabs  till  the  whole  length  to  be  cut  is  covered 

by  slabs  touching  each  other. 
(6)  If  plenty  of  guncotton  is  not  available,  cut  some  of 

the  slabs  so  as  to  make  the  charge  stretch  right  across. 

Smaller  pieces  than  thirds  of  slabs  should  not  be 

used. 


PlaU^  69. 


Ttq.3. 


PREPARING     CHARGES 


Tx^.4-: 


^^■o. 


^o^vd&r 


-4  14      'i^  ^ 

MB  /  5^  no/ hag    holds  about   50  lbs  of  Gunpotvder. 


We»l<riS/»l»*iJi.  L'f  UWW.Lon^OO. 


Y^jo.^it^  pa^f^  s^. 


CHAPTER   XVI. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS.  89 


213.    Where  there  is  a  series  of  arches,  as  in  a  viaduct,  the  Brick  anca 

best  result  is  got  bv  cutting  the  piers  and  so  bringing  down  two  masonry 

arch 
b  rid  "res. 


arches  for  each  charge,  but  in  hasty  demolitions  this  can  only  ^ 


be  done  when  the  piers  are  thin  and  high. 

214.  The  best  explosive  to  use  for  this  purpose  is  guncotton.  High  and 
The  charge  should  be  placed  w^here  the  section  of  the  pier  is  thin  piers, 
smallest,  and  if  possible  a  groove  should  be  cut  in  the  pier  to  G"""- 
place  the  charge  in  ;  this  reduces  "T"  and  also  to  some  extent  co*^*^<^^' 
tamps  the  charge.     Otherwise  the  charge  should  be  tied  in  a 
continuous  strip  along  a  board,  and  this  fixed  on  to  the  pier  with 

the  guncotton  next  it  (PL  70,  Fig.  1,  and  PL  69,  Figs.  1  and  2). 

215.  The    piers   cannot   be  satisfactorily  demolished   with  Gun- 
gunpowder  in  haste,  as  the  speediest  method  of  placmg  the  powder, 
charge  would  take  some  time  ;    it  would  generally  be  better 

to  attack  the  arches. 

The  following  is  the  quickest  Avay  of  attacking  piers  : — 
Divide  the  whole  charge  into  two  or  three  parts,  and  as  the 
chambers  cannot  be  cut  in  the  pier,  place  the  charges  in  pits 
dug  in  the'  ground  close  alongside  each  pier.  Tamp  with  earth 
and  fire  simultaneously.  If  the  piers  are  in  water  the  above 
cannot  be  done. 

216.  The  amount  of  guncotton  and  gunpowder  for  cutting  Short  and 
short  and  thick  piers  is  prohibitive,  and  the  arches  should  be  thick 
attacked.     The  best  method  of  doing  this  is  to  place  a  charge  P^^''^- 

at  eacJi  "  haunch  "  of  the  arch.  This  ensures  a  much  larger  gap 
being  made  than  if  only  one  charge  were  placed  at  the  "  crown." 

217.  If  guncotton  be  used,  a  trench  must  be  dug  down  to  the  G-un- 
back  of  the  arch  ring  at  each  haunch.     Then  the  slabs  (tied  to  cotton, 
a  board  if  possible)  should  be  laid  all  along  the  trench  on  the 
back   of   the   arch   ring.     If   it   is  desired   to   economise  the 
explosive,  tamping  maybe  used,  but  it  is  not  essential  (PL  70, 

Fig.  4). 

218.  If  gunpowder  be  employed,  the  charge  for  each  haunch  Gun- 
should  be  divided  into  equal  parts,  which  should  be  placed  powder, 
about  twice  the  thickness  of  the  arch-ring  apart  from  each 
other,  the  outside  ones  being  placed  twice  the  thickness  of  the 
arch-ring  from  the  side  walls,  to  avoid  the  charges  blowing 

out  through  the  side  walls.  A  pit  must  be  dug  for  each 
portion  of  the  charge  down  to  the  back  of  the  arch,  and  tamping 
is  necessary  equal  to  twice  the  thickness  of  the  arch. 


unaer 
arch. 


90  CHAPTER    XVI. — HASTY    DEMOLITIONS. 

In  all  cases  the  charges  at  both  haunches  should  be  fired 
simultaneously. 

When  there  is   not  enough  time  to   reach  the   haunches, 
the  crown  {a)  may  be  attacked  in  a  similar  way,  but  the  result 
is  not  so  satisfactory  (PI.  70,  Fig.  4). 
6iin-  219.  Where  time  presses,  small  arches  can  be  cut  by  gun- 

cotton  cotton  at  the  crown  without  digging  through  the  roadwav.  The 
charge  to  cut  through  the  arch  can  be  tied  in  a  continuous 
strip  along  a  plank,  and  this  hold  up  underneath  the  arch 
by  ropes  from  the  parapet  at  the  qtovhi,  vdXh.  the  guncotton 
next  the  arch.  These  ropes  should  be  windlassed  up  tight 
so  as  to  ensure  contact  between  the  guncotton  and  the  arch. 
The  plank  should  be  supported  or  trussed  to  prevent  sagging 
in  the  middle. 
Walls.  220.  To  demolish  a  wall  by  guncotton,  a  groove  should  be 

cut,  if   possible,  for  the  charge  in  the  wall ;     if  not  possible, 
Gun-  the    charge    should  be  laid   against  the   wall.       {See   PL  70, 

cotton.        pi^g_  2  and  3.) 

Gun-  With  gunpowder  the  total  charge  should  be  di\dded  up  into 

powder.  parts,  each  part  being  placed  from  the  next  a  distance  equal 
to  twice  the  thickness  of  the  wall.  Earth  tamping  should 
be  used. 

To  bring  down  the  top  of  a  wall,  the  length  of  the  breach 
cut  must  be  not  less  than  the  height  of  the  wall. 
Houses  221.  For  weakly-built  houses,  place  a  charge  in  the  centre  of 

and  huts.  ^^^^  room,  shutting  all  doors  and  windows.  If  possible,  fire 
charges  simultaneously  by  electricity.  The  amount  of 
explosive  required  depends  on  the  size  of  the  rooms  and  the 
nature  of  the  walls.     Mud  huts  up  to  18  ft.  square,  with  walls 

2  feet  thick  at  the  bottom,  have  been  destroyed  by  about 
4  lbs.  of  guncotton  placed  inside  the  hut  in  one  corner,  all 
openings  being  closed;  6  to  12  lbs.  of  guncotton  will  probably 
destroy  a  four-roomed  cottage.  For  strongly-built  buildings 
it  mav  be  necessary  to  attack  the  walls. 

Towers  of      222.    Towers  such  as  those  in  the  North- West  Frontier  of 
stone  and    j^^^^^  ,^^^  usually  15  feet  to  20  feet  square  in  plan,  with  walls 

3  feet  or  4  feet  thick,  solid  up  to  a  height  of  15  feet  to  20  feet. 
Gun-  "Yi^Q  walls  consist  of  stone  and  mud.  \^'ith  layers  of  brushwood. 
CO  ton.        rp^  blow  down  one  of  these,  a  tunnel  should  be  made  into  the 

centre  of  the  tower  under  a  layer  of  brushwood  (which  keeps 


PlctJbe  70. 


HASTY       DEMOUTIONS. 


J-t^.7. 


^P^-3. 


I 


J^^.^, 


SI  9  e. 8. 05. 


WeilerA Graham,  L»^    Li tho. London. 
Opposifje  pcuge  90. 


CHAPTER    XVI. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS.  '  91 

the  roof  from  falling  in),  and  guncotton  charges  placed  at 
the  ends  of  the  tunnel,  the  whole  being  tamped. 

223.  Charge  for  a  tower  with  a  solid  base  of  15  feet  side  is  Charges, 
about  16  lbs. 

Charge  for  a  tower  with  a  solid  base  of  25  feet  side  is  about 
24  lbs. 

For  hollow  towers  charges  of  6  lbs.  of  guncotton  placed  inside 
the  tower  at  one  corner,  and  in  the  centres  of  two  adjacent 
sides,  fired  simultaneously,  will  generally  be  effective. 

Timber. 

224.  It  is  more  economical  to  destroy  baulks  of  timber  by  Tin^b^r 
cutting  them  down  or  burning  them  than  by  explosives,  which  uprights, 
would  only  be  used  when  time  presses. 

225.  Of   explosives    guncotton    is    the    best,   and  is  most  G-un- 
economically  used  when  placed  in  auger  holes  bored  horizon-  ^'otton  in 
tally  at  the  required    height   for   cutting.      For   baulks   up  ^^^^^ 
to    18   inches   diameter  one  auger  hole  will  suffice,  bored  to 

just  beyond  the  centre,  the  centre  of  the  charge  being  in 
the  centre  of  the  timber  (PI.  68,  Fig.  4). 

For  larger  baulks  two  or  more  holes  will  be  needed,  bored 
alongside  each  other,  the  intervening  portion  of  wood  being 
cut  away. 

The  whole  charge  should  consist  of  primers  :  2-oz.  primers 
in  a  2-inch  auger  hole,  or  1-oz.  primers  in  a  It-inch  auger  hole, 
earth  or  clay  being  used  for  tamping.  The  fuze  may  be  hung 
on  a  nail  or  splinter  to  take  the  weight  off  the  detonator. 

226.  Dynamite  can  be  used  in  a  similar  manner.     It  must  Djnamite. 
be  carefully  and  gently  rammed  to  fit  the  auger  hole. 

227.  To  save  the  wood  rom  being  splintered,  or  where  great  ^^eck!ace 
haste  is  necessary,  the  demolition  can  be  done  with  a  necklace  of  g""- 
of  guncotton  primers  ;    but  this  method  is  very  wasteful  of  ^°*^°" 
explosive,  and  can  only  be  used  for  small  timbers,  and  is  not  1^^^°^^"' 
even  certain  then. 

Sufficient  primers,  threaded  on  a  string,  to  reach  all  round  the 
timber,  each  f rimer  touching  the  next  and  the  timber,  are  hung 
on  nails.  The  detonator  may  be  inserted  in  one  of  these 
or  in  an  extra  primer  tied  to  one  of  the  others. 

Timber  may  also  be  blowm  down  by  a  charge  of  guncotton 
in  slabs.     In  this  case  a  niche  may  be  cut  for  it  to  decrease  "  T." 


92  CHAPTER   XVI. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS. 

Timber  may  be  made  to  fall  in  any  required  direction  hy 
getting  a  strain  on  it  beforehand  with  a  rope. 
Timber  or       228.  The  most  convenient  way  to  place  a  guncotton  charge 
timber  and  against  a  stockade,  so  as  to  ensure  contact  between  the  slabs, 
^f  ,    ,       is  to  tie  them  beforehand  on  to  a  board,  and  to  carry  this  up 
with  the  guncotton  attached;    a  hole  must  be  cut  in  the  board 
for  the  detonator  and  fuze  (PL  69,  Figs.  1  and  2). 
Gun-  The  board  is  placed  with  the  guncotton  next  the  stockade, 

cotton.  j^jjjj  ^^yQ  pici^ets  can  be  driven  into  the  ground  to  keep  it  there, 
or  a  couple  of  nails  driven  into  the  stockade,  to  which,  the 
charge  may  be  hung. 

The   length  of   the   board   and  the  charge  must  equal  the 
breadth  of  the  breech  to  be  made. 
Gun-  229.  A  gunpowder  charge  can  be  made  up  as  follows  (PI.  G9, 

powder.      j'igg  3^  4^  and  5)  :— 

Making  up      The  powder  should  be  placed  in  a  well  tarred  sandbag,  or 

tlie  charge,  faihng  that,  in  one  sandbag  inside  a  second  one.     About  half 

the  powder  is  first  poured  into  the  bag,  and  then  the  safety 

fuze,  knotted  round  a  stick  to  prevent  its  being  pulled  out,  is 

Connect-     inserted,  a  piece  of  stout  wire  or  a  withe  being  also  attached 

ing  up        ^^  ^j^g  stick,  to  help  to  support  the  fuze  after  it  leaves  the 

means  of     mouth  of  the  bag.     The  rest  of  the  powder  is  then  poured  into 

ignition,      the  bag.  and  the  mouth  is  secured  with  spun  yarn  as  shown,  so 

as  to  make  it  more  easy  to  carry,  a  last  seizing  of  the  spun 

yarn  being  made  round  the  fuze  so  that  any  pull  on  it  wiD 

fall  on  the  spun  yarn  and  not  on  the  fuze  iteslf . 

The  fuze  will  almost  invariably  ignite  the  charge  by  burning 
through  its  wrapping  as  soon  as  it  reaches  the  powder.  The 
necessary  lengths  of  fuze  should  therefore  be  measured  from 
outside  the  mouth  of  the  bag. 

Instantaneous  fuze  in  addition  to  safety  fuze  should  not  be 
used  where  there  is  only  one  charge,  as  it  increases  the  liability 
to  missfire. 
Placing  230.  To  place  a  bag  against  a  gate  or  stockade,  the  precau- 

tliechavgc.  tions  mentioned  in  Sec.  211  should  be  observed,  and,  in  addition,, 
the  men  carrying  the  tamping  bags  should  be  thoroughly 
drilled  as  to  how  the  charge  and  tamping  is  to  be  placed. 
The  man  carrying  the  powder  bag  on  his  shoulder  leads  the 
way,  and  placing  the  bag,  fuze  down- wind,  and  so  that  the  fuze 
does  not  curl  up  against  the  charge,  against  the  stockade^ 


CHAPTER    XVI. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS.  93 

prepares  to  light.  The  other  men,  each  carrying  a  bag  in  the 
same  way,  successively  drop  them  so  as  to  place  them  as  shown 
in  Fig.  5,  PI.  69.  The  fuze  is  then  lighted,  and  all  get  away  as 
quickly  as  possible. 

For  a  gap  5  feet  to  6  feet  wide,  a  charge  of  60  lbs.  to  80  lbs., 
roughly  tamped  with  sandbags,  as  shown  in  Fig.  5,  PI.  69,  will 
suffice. 

231.  The  gate  of  a  fort  may  be  treated  as  a  very  strong  Fort  gate, 
stockade.     As  the  thickness  cannot  usually  be  known,  a  good 
margin  in  the  amount  of  the  charge  should  be  allowed. 

For  guncotton  50  lbs.  will  usually  be  enough,  either  placed  Gun- 
on  the  ground  or  hung  to  the  gate  on  a  nail  carried  for  the  cottou. 
purpose  and  driven  in. 

For  gunpowder  a  charge  of  200  lbs.,  tamped  with  sandbags,  Gun- 
should  suffice.  powder. 

Railways. 

232.  On  railways,  the  easiest  parts  to  attack  in  hasty  demoli-  Bridges, 
tions  are  the  bridges. 

233.  Masonry  arch  bridges  should  be  attacked  as  described  Masonry 
already.  bridges. 

234.  Iron  and  steel  bridges  can  be  destroyed  with  small  ex-  iron  and 
penditure  of  explosive.  steel 

The  girders  maij  be  destroyed  by  placing  charges  of  gun-  bridges, 
powder  or  guncotton  beneath  the  ends  at  the  supports  ;"but  Gun- 
by  far  the  quickest  may  is  to  actually  cut  the  girders  them-  cotton, 
selves  with  guncotton. 

Nearly  all  girders  consist  of  a  top  and  a  bottom  "  flange  "  or  Girders. 
"  boom,''  cr^nnected  by  a  "  web,''   which  may  either  consist 
of  continuous  plating  or  of  open  cross  bracing. 

All  girder  bridges  have  at  least  two  main  girders  which  Usual 
carry  the  flooring  and  go  right  across  the  span,  and  these  main  arrange- 
girders  alone  need  be  attacked.  "^^"'^  '^^ 

As  a  rule  the  best  effect  will  be  produced  by  cutting  a  girder  bridges. 
near  a  point  of  support,  and  this  course  will  be  economical  p^g-^i^^  q£ 
of  explosive,  as  the  flanges  are  usually  slighter  at  the  ends  than  charge, 
at  the  centre.     In  the  case  of  a  girder  continuous  over  several 
spans,  the  point  selected  should  be  in  the  first  or  last  span,  at 
the  end  awav  from  the  shore. 


1 


94  CHAPTER   XVI  — HASTY    DEMOLITIONS. 

If  there  is  any  doubt  about  the  efiect  of  one  charge,  the  girder 
should  be  cut  at  each  end  of  a  span. 

In  the  case  of  girders  buiit  on  the  arch  principal,  two  charges 
should  always  be  employed,  with  the  object  of  blowing  away 
a  segment  of  the  arch.  (PL  71,  Fig.  5.)  In  girders  with  an 
open  web,  the  top  and  bottom  flanges  should  be  cut.  In 
girders  with  a  plate  web  (unless  this  is  very  thin  relatively  to  the 
flanges)  both  flanges  and  web  should  be  cut.  When  there  is 
a  lack  of  explosive,  the  bottom  flange  is  the  most  important  to 
cut. 
Charge?.  The  arrangement  of  the  charges  will  depend  on  the  section 
of  the  girder  ;  to  simplify  the  firing  arrangements,  they  should 
be  divided  up  as  little  as  possible.  The  charge  for  the  top 
flange  will  generally  be  placed  on  the  top,  and  that  for  the 
bottom  flange  underneath.  In  each  case  they  will  be  most 
easily  fixed  if  fastened  to  a  board.  The  charge  for  the  web, 
if  any,  should  be  tied  to  a  board,  the  ends  of  which  can  be  wedged 
up  between  the  flanges. 

Where  there  is  a  choice  between  masonry  and  iron  girder 
bridges,  the  girder  bridge  ought,  as  a  rule,  to  be  attacked,  as 
the   demolition  of  the   girder  bridge  will  be   much   quicker, 
and  will  save  guncotton  {see  PI.  71). 
RmIs.  235.  Two-thirds  of  a  lb.  of  guncotton  is  necessary  to  destroy 

heavy  rails.  Two-thirds  of  a  lb,  is  most  conveniently  got  by 
cutting  a  l|-lb.  slab  into  thirds,  as  this  size  fits  into  the  web 
of  the  ordinary  sized  rail. 

Six  2-oz.  primers  (with  the  detonator  in  one  of  them)  will 
also  do,  but  is  not  so  convenient  to  fix.  Where  the  charge 
can  be  wedged  between  the  rails  at  points  or  a  crossing,  a 
less  charge  will  do  this,  as  this  tamps  it. 

On  the  straight  line  the  slab  should  be  tied  tight  into  the 
web  of  a  rail  close  to  a  chair  on  the  same  side  as  the  key. 
Lead  strips  are  provided  for  fixing  the  slabs  to  the  rail,  but 
string  suffices  (PL  72,  Figs,  2  and  3),  or  the  key  may  be 
removed  and  the  charge  put  in  its  place.  In  the  hasty 
demolition  of  a  railway  fine  care  must  be  taken  that  the  break 
J6  sufficiently  broad,  or  the  rails  displaced,  so  as  to  ensure  the 
stopping  of  traffic. 

An  effective  way  of  damaging   a  railway  line  is  by  firing 


I>lat^    IL 


GIRDER    BRIDGES 


VrT\  I  I  I 


Wedged 


J^osztioTLr  o/"  CTiccnaes  21X, 


ope 


Clip 


JfooderL 

riifu 


GirdLer'  -itztA  plate. 


-^^. 


•pT'znczpZe-  sTvcnvrLhy  ciott&d^ 


Fi^.^. 


Ti^6 


CTtaarffe-TrL 


FToTLof ytrdeT^ 


S/8€.  8  <tS. 


Opposite  pcLge  94, 


CHAPTER    XVI. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS.  95 

charges  under  the  rail  joints.  This  will  bulge  the  rails 
vertically  and  make  traffic  impossible.  This  method  however 
requires  a  large  amount  of  explosive.  If  alternate  joints  are 
attacked  every  rail  mil  be  damaged. 

236.  Blowing  in  tunnels  is  a  very  good  way  of  stopping  traffic,  Tunnels, 
but  to  be  effective  requires  a  large  quantity  of  explosive. 

Gunpowder  is  best  for  this.  Gun- 

The  points  attacked  should  be  some  distance  w^ithin  the  powder.  , 

tunnels,  and  it  is  better  to  blow  dowm  one  long  tunnel  in  several 
places  than  several  tunnels  in  one  place  only. 

The  crown  or  the  haunches  should  be  attacked  as  in  cutting  I 

arches,  and  the  lining  should  be  brought  dowm  for  some  distance 
along  the  length  of  the  tunnel. 

In  hard  soil  it  will  not  do  much  harm  to  cut  the  lining  only, 
as  very  little  of  the  soil  may  fall. 

The  charges  should  be  placed  as  far  back  from  the  interior  Placing 
surface  of  the  arch  as  time  and  explosive  available  will  allow,  charges, 
and  twdce  as  far  from  each  other  as  from  the  surface.  ^ 

For  calculating  the  charge,  T  should  be  taken  as  the  total  Amount  of  J 

distance  from  the  surface  of  the  lining  to  the  charge.  ^  arges.  ig 

The  charges  should  be  in  chambers  branching  off  the  gallery  ^^ 

dug  in  from  the  surface  of  the  tunnel. 


Instructions  for  the  Destruction  of  Guns. 

237.  (1.)  A  shell  having  been  loaded  in  the  ordinary  w^ay,  the  Field  and 
guncotton  charge  necessary  for  the  destruction  of  the  gun  ^i^gi?  guns 
should  be  packed  in  behind  it  so  as  to  be  in  close  contact  wdth 
the  shell  and  with  the  sides  of  the  chamber.     After  the  insertion 
of  the  primer,  sods,  earth,  paper  or  other  material  that  may  be 
at  hand  should  be  used  to  keep  the  guncotton  in  position. 

(2.)  The  breech  block  should  then  be  swung  to  as  far  as 
possible,  just  allowing  room  for  the  safety  fuze  or  electric  leads 
for  igniting  the  charge. 

(3.)  The  charges  required  for  guns  from  3-inch  to  (3-inch 
caUbre  are  given  by  the  following  rule  : — 


J 


CO  CHAPTER    XVII.— HASTY   DEMOLITIONS. 

*'  For  a  3-inch  gun  use  2  lbs.,  and  double  the  charrrc  for 

every  inch  increase  in  calibre,  e.g.,  for  a  4-inch  gun 

use  4  lbs.,  and  for  a  o-inch,  8  lbs." 

(4.)  A  shell  is  not  absolutely  necessary  for  destroying  a  gun 

l)v  the  above  method,  but,  if  available,  its  use  increases  the 

effect. 

(For  B.L.  guns,  if  a  crowbar  or  heavy  hammer  is  available, 
much  damage  can  be  done  by  opening  the  breechblock 
and  smashing  the  block  and  screw  threads  in  the  breech,  thus 
saving  explosive.) 

Heavy  M.L.  guns  can  be  demolished  by  placin,^  4  lbs.  of 
guncotton  at  the  bottom  of  the  bore  and  tamping  with  sand  or 
water. 


Demoli- 
tion of 
rail  WOTS. 


ijlation?, 
buildingsi, 


CHAPTER  XVII.— HASTY  DEMOLITION  OF  RAILWAYS 
AND  TELEGRAPHS  WITHOUT  EXPLOSIVES. 

RaUways. 

238.  When  a  demolition  is  contemplated,  all  unnecessary 
rolling  stock  should  first  be  withdrawn.  Simultaneously  with 
this,  all  reserves  of  railway  plant  and  the  most  important 
technical  tools  should  be  removed  from  the  station,  as  well 
as  all  individuals  entrusted  with  the  working  of  the  railway  ; 
and  the  signals,  first  the  electric  and  then  the  visual,  should  be 
destroyed.  The  permanent  way  should  be  attacked,  and  either 
destroyed  or  removed  altogether,  the  most  important  item 
being  the  destruction  of  as  many  points  and  crossings  as 
possible  ;  and  the  engineering  works,  such  as  the  bridges, 
tunnels,  embankments,  and  cuttings,  would  also  be  important 
items  in  the  demolition  if  the  abandoned  line  could  be  of  use  to 
the  enemy  alone. 

239.  Buildings  not  being  indispensable  to  the  traffic,  are 
seldom  worth  destroying. 

The  different  workshop  fittings  should  be  taken  away  alto- 
gether, telegraphic  appt'-ratus  and  batteries  removed  and 
handed  over  to  the  Director  of  Telegraphs,  and  stationery 
engines  made  unserviceable  by  taking  out  the  piston,  &c. 


U 


PlaX^    72 


HASTY    DEMOLITIONS 


^  <^. 


Fi^.S. 


fdse.6 .  OS. 


WellerAGrahaw.LW  Litha  Undort. 


i). 


CHAPTER    XVII.  — HASTY    DEMOLITIONS.  97 

The  water  supply  of  a  line  should  invariably  be  attacked,  Water 
and  the  more  complete  the  destruction  of  tanks  and  pumps  supply. 
the  better. 

240.  The  rolHng  stock,  if  it  cannot  be  removed  to  the  rear,  Rolling 
may  be  rendered  unserviceable  by  burning  ;  or  trains  may  stock. " 
be  run  against  each  other  at  full  speed  on  the  same  line,  or 

they  may  be  run  over  an  embankment  by  turning  a  rail. 

Locomotives  may  be  rendered  useless,  but  still  repairable, 
by  taking  oft  the  inj  ector,  or  the  connecting  rods  on  each  side 
of  the  engine,  or  the  piston  or  safety  valve. 

In  carriages  the  springs  may  be  removed  so  as  to  let  the 
body  of  the  carriage  fall  on  the  wheels  and  axles,  or  the  axles 
themselves  may  be  cut  through  by  guncotton. 

241.  The  method  in  which  the  permanent  way  is  attacked  Perma- 
must  depend  greatly  on  the  extent  of  damage  desired,  the  time  ^^ent  way. 
at  disposal  of  the  demohshing  party,  and  the  strength  of  that 

party. 

<:\  simple  method,  when  explosives  are  not  used,  is  to  remove 
portions  of  the  hue  at  intervals,  especially  at  curves,  remove 
switches,  &c.,  and  carry  them  away.  To  remove  the  rails, 
unscrew  the  fish-plate  nuts  w-ith  a  spanner,  if  available,  if  not, 
they  may  generally  be  broken  ofi  by  hammering.  The  enemy 
will  find  considerable  difficulty  in  fitting  in  rails  of  the  right 
length  in  the  demohshed  portions,  but  if  this  method  is  adopted 
on  a  double  hne,  at  least  one  line  of  rails  must  be  entirely 
removed,  and  the  other  partially  so,  otherwise  an  adversarv 
might  renounce  the  advantages  of  a  double  Hue  for  a  time,  and 
employ  the  material  from  one  line  of  way  to  complete  the 
partially  destroyed  one. 

242.  A  second  method,  used  where  many  men  are  available, 
and  where  the  time  is  short,  and  the  plant  not  required  elsewhere, 
is  to  attack  the  Une  at  several  point  at  once,  tear  up  the  per- 
manent way  and  render  it  useless  on  the  spot. 

Labourers  are  employed  in  preparing  sleepers  in  piles  for  burn- 
ing, placing  rails  upon  them,  and  then  twisting  them.  If  the  rails 
are  only  bentthey  can  bebent  back  and  used  again,  but  if  twisted 
they  must  be  sent  to  regular  workshops  to  be  re-rolled  before 
they  can  be  utihsed.     The  chairs  should  be  broken  by  a  sledge 

(5289)  G 


98  CHAPTER    XVII.  — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS. 

hammer.  A  variety  ol  this  style  of  demolition  is  to  lift  up  and 
turn  over  whole  portions  of  the  railway,  together  with  the 
attached  sleepers.  This  method  is  specially  useful  on  high 
embankments.  The  men  are  formed  along  a  rail  in  single  rank, 
outside  of  it  and  facing  inwards,  the  rails  at  both  flanks  are  dis- 
connected and  at  a  signal  they  seize  the  rail,  lift  it  up  ^vith  the 
sleepers  attached,  and  turn  it  over.  Of  course  the  ballast 
must  be  previously  removed.  Teams  of  horses  or  oxen  can  be 
hooked  on  to  the  rails  and  used  in  Uke  manner. 

243.  Another  method  is  to  di\'ide  the  destropng  party  into 
squads  of  ten  men  each,  and  to  equip  each  party  with  two  iron 
hooks  (Fig.  5,  PI.  72),  two  axes,  and  two  ropes,  each  six  yards 
long  and  two  levers.  The  irons  are  then  fixed  as  shown.  The 
ropes  attached  to  the  ends  of  the  levers  are  hauled  on,  the  rails 
twisted  and  the  chairs  destroyed,  one  end  of  the  rail  being 
pre\4ously  disconnected.  Each  rail  requires  about  five 
minutes'  work,  so  that  in  one  hour  a  squad  can  destroy  twelve 
lengths  of  rail. 

244.  A  fourth  method  of  demolition  is  to  take  up  the  perma- 
nent way  and  remove  it  bodily  in  wagons.  Where  there  is  a 
double  fine,  the  first  line  is  removed  by  packing  it  into  the 
wagons  which  are  alongside  on  the  other  line  ;  but  the  second 
line  has  to  be  packed  into  wagons  which  have  been  run  up  close 
to  the  end  of  the  second  line  itself.  This  is  the  most  satisfactory 
of  all  styles  of  demolition,  but  requires  much  time,  and  careful 
arrangement  of  the  necessarily  large  working  parties. 

Tdegraj)hs. 

Demoli-  245.  The  amount  of  damage  that  can  be  done  in  a  short  time 

tion  of  ^Q  a  line  of  telegraph  depends  chiefly  on  the  number  of  separate 
oralis  wires  running  parallel  to  each  other  on  the  same  poles  in  the 
°  *  case  of  an  aerial  line,  or  the  number  of  separate  cables  con- 
tained in  the  same  set  of  pipes  in  a  subterranean  line.  These 
forms  are  by  far  the  most  likely  to  be  encountered  on  service. 
The  case  of  a  subaqueous  line,  which  may  sometimes  be  met 
with,  will  be  discussed  later. 

246.  It  is  assumed  that  the  line  to  be  destroyed  lies  in  a 
country  occupied   by  the  enemy,  to  which  access   has  been 


CHAPTER    XVII. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS.  99 


obtained  for  a  short  time  by  a  raid ;  since  if  any  part  of  the  line 

lay  in  a  part  of  a  country  from  which  the  enemy  had  been 

expelled  it  would  be  of  course  easy  either  to  disconnect  the  . 

wires  and  appropriate  them,  or,  leaving  the  lines  intact,  to  "3 

interpose  instruments,  and  thereby  read  any  messages  sent  by  * 

the  enemy. 

247.  The  poles  can  be  readily  cut  or  blown  down,  the  easiest  Destruc- 
and  safest  poles  to  attack  being  those  that  have  stays.  tion  of 

A  rope  should  first  be  fixed  to  the  top  of  the  pole  or  thrown  ^^^'^^^  '^'^^• 
over  the  wires  in  order  to  put  on  a  strain  tending  to  overthrow 
the  pole. 

The  pole  should  then  be  partly  cut  through  at  about  i  feet 
from  the  ground.  All  hands  should  then  commence  to  strain 
on  the  rope,  except  one  man,  w^ho  should  cut  the  stay  through 
with  a  file  or  pliers.  The  men  on  the  rope  must  be  sufficiently 
far  from  the  pole  to  be  well  clear  of  the  wires  when  they  fall. 

The  destructive  effect  will  be  increased  by  previously 
cutting  partly  through  the  adjacent  poles  on  each  side,  and, 
if  several  adjacent  poles  are  also  stayed,  cutting  their  stay  at 
the  same  time. 

Cast  iron  poles  can  easily  be  broken  with  a  sledge  hammer. 

Having  brought  down  as  much  as  possible  of  the  line  in  this 
way,  the  wires  should  be  cut  at  each  end  as  far  as  can  be  reached, 
and  twisted  up  so  as  to  be  rendered  useless.  The  insulators 
should  also  be  broken. 

Any  damage  of  this  sort,  however,  can  be  quickly  repaired  by 
the  enemy  using  cable,  and  even  the  complete  restoration  of 
poles  and  wires  w411  not  take  very  long  to  accomplish. 

248.  Probably  an  equal  amount  of  delay  could  be  occasioned  Faults, 
with  less  trouble   by  skilfully  placing   what   are   known  as 

"  faults  "  on  the  Une. 

Faults  consist  of  "  disconnections,"  "leaks,"  and  "contacts." 

"  Disconnections  "  are  partial  or  complete  breaks  in  the 
continuity  of  the  conductor. 

"  Leaks  "  are  partial  or  complete  connections  of  the  conductor 
to  earth.     A  complete  connection  is  known  as  "  dead  earth." 

"  Contacts"  are  formed  by  one  wire  touching  another  or  being 
put  in  connection  with  it  by  some  conductor.  They  are  very 
troublesome  faults,  since  they  affect  two  Hues,  and  cannot  be 
(5289)  G  2 


100 


CHAPTER   XVII. — HASTY   DEMOLITIONS. 


Durcage 
done  to  an 
office. 


Destruc- 
tion of 
subter- 
ranean 
line. 


Destruc- 
tion of 
subaque- 
ous line. 


overcome,  as  other  partial  faults  can  be,  by  increasing  the 
battery  power. 

All  artificial  faults,  however,  to  be  successful  as  causes  of 
delay  require  to  be  skilfully  made,  and  the  description  of  the 
methods  of  making  them  is  too  technical  to  be  suitable  for 
inclusion  in  this  book. 

249.  If  possession  can  be  obtained  of  an  office,  wires  can  be 
discomiected.  Any  papers  connected  with  the  working  of  the 
line  and,  if  possible,  the  instruments,  should  be  sent  to  the 
officer  in  charge  of  the  field  telegraphs. 

Records  of  messages  should  be  sent  at  once  to  the  Head- 
quarters. 

250.  A  subterranean  line  is  naturally  more  difficult  to 
discover  than  an  aerial  one  ;  for  this  reason  among  others  they 
are  now  extensively  emploved  in  countries  liable  to  invasion. 
In  England  they  are  rarely  met  with  except  in  large  towns, 
where  overhead  wires  are  dangerous. 

The  existence  of  such  a  line  being  known  or  suspected, 
marks  should  be  searched  for  at  equal  distances  apart,  indicating 
the  position  of  test  boxes. 

These  marks  are  usually  about  100  yards  apart,  and  generally 
consist  of  blocks  of  wood  or  stone  numbered  in  succession. 
They  would  very  probably,  however,  have  been  removed  by 
the  enemy. 

If  not  to  be  found  where  the  line  is  known  to  exist,  a  cross- 
trench  should  be  dug  at  right  angles  to  the  probable  direction 
of  the  fine,  about  2  feet  deep,  and  in  this  way  the  pipes  may  be 
discovered.  These  can  then  be  dug  up  as  far  as  possible,  and 
bent  or  otherwise  destroyed  if  means  are  available,  the  wire 
being  pulled  out  and  cut  to  pieces. 

If  possible  the  trench  should  be  carefully  filled  in  and  all 
traces  removed. 

251.  A  subaqueous  line  is  rarely  employed  except  for 
crossing  seas  or  big  rivers,  but  in  time  of  war  they  may  be 
laid  along  the  course  of  the  rivers  to  connect  towns  on  their 
banks,  as  was  done  at  Paris  in  the  Franco- German  war. 

To  destroy  such  a  line  it  should  be  grappled  for  with  a 
grapnel,  and  when  caught  as  large  a  piece  as  possible  cut 
out  of  it ;  the  piece  should  then  be  cut  into  smaller  pieces  and 
thrown  into  deep  water. 


PART   II. 


CHAPTER  XVIII.— STRENaTH   OF  MATERIALS 
AND   BUOYANCY. 

Cordage. 

252.  The  word  "  rope  "  is  now  officially  u?3d  to  denote  steel  Kopes  and 
or  iron  wire  rope,   while  hemp  and  fibre  ropes  are  termed  cordage. 

"  cordage."     Colloquially    "  rope "    is    still    used    to    denote 
both  classes. 

The  size  of  a  rope  is  denoted  by  its  circumference  in  inches, 
and  its  length  is  given  in  fathoms.  (A  fathom  is  6  feet.)  Cord- 
age is  usually  issued  in  coils  of  113  fathoms,  and  steel  wire 
ropes  in  coils  of  100  fathoms. 

253.  The  breaking  strain  of  ordinary  sound  cordage  is  obtained  Strength 

Q2  of  cordage. 

with  fair  accuracy  from  the  formula  17  tons,  where  C  is  the 

circumference  in  inches. 

For  field  purposes  C-  cwts.  has  been  laid  down  as  the  safe 
working  load  for  all  cordage,  but  this  may  be  increased,  for 
good  cordage  in  good  condition,  to  a  maximum  of  2C-  c^vts. 

254.  The  strength  of  wire  varies  greatly  :  as  a  very  rough  Strength 
rule  it  may  be  taken  that  the  breaking  weight  in  pounds  of  wire, 
equals  three  times  the  weight  per  mile  in  pounds.     This  rule 

holds  good  for  iron  and  hard  drawn  copper  wire,  while  steel 

wire  may  be  taken  as  about  twice  as  strong  as  iron  wire. 

The  breaking  strain  in  tons  of  iron  wire  rope  is  about  equal  Strength 

to  the  square  of  the  circumference  in  inches.     Steel  wire  rope  of  wire 

rope. 


102 


CHAPTER    XVIII. — STRENGTH    OF    MATERIALS,    ETC. 


StrengUi 
of  chain. 


is  from  2  to  2J  times  as  strong  as  iron  wire  rope.     Wije  rope 
can  be  worked,  for  field  service,  up  to  half  its  breaking  strain. 

255.  The  following  table  gives  the  strength  and  weight  of 
ordinary  crane  chain,  obtained  chiefly  by  experiment  (ordinary 
commercial  iron  chain  is  not  verv  reliable)  : — 


256.  The  strength  of  a  lashing  may  be  taken  as  4  of  the 
number  of  returns  from  the  object  lashed,  e.g.,  a  square 
lashing  with  four  turns  has  a  holding  power  of  i  x  16  x 
strength  of  rope  ;  in  the  case  of  a  hook  lashed  to  a  spar  with 
four  turns  it  is  4  x  8  x  strength  of  rope. 

When  using  wire  in  lashings,  multiply  by  |  instead  of  4. 

Timbers  of  Bridges. 
Sfcrengtli         257.  The  following  are  the  maximum  weights,   which   are 
of  bridges,  brought  on  by  the  passage  of  troops  in  marching  order,  per 
lineal  foot  of  bridge  : — 

Infantry,  in  file,  crowded  at  a  check,  2J  cwts. 

„         in  fours  ,,  „  5        ,, 

Cavalry,  in  single  file,  crowded  at  a  check,  If  cwts. 
,,       in  half-sections         ,,         ,,  3i    ,, 

258.  Maximum  weight  brought  on  a  bridge  by  howitzers, 
guns  of  position,  &c.  : — 

5-inch  B.L.  howitzer  and  E.A.  ammunition 
wagons,  Mark  II  with  limber.  Maximum 
concentrated  weight  in  one  bay  =  30  cwts. 

4*7 -inch  Q.F.  guns  of  position  wdth  limber,  on 
travelling  carriage.  Maximum  distributed 
weight  =85     „ 


CHAPTER  XVIII. — STRENGTH   OF  MATERIALS,  ETC.  103 

259.  A  bridge  that  will  carry  infantry  in  fours  crowded  at  a 
check  will  carry  any  of  the  field  guns  and  m.ost  of  the  ordinary 
wagons  that  accompany  an  army  in  the  field. 

260.  A  good  rough  formula  for  calculating  the  necessary  sizes  Formula 
for  road   bearers  and  transoms  is  given  below.      The  formula  ^^^  ^ect- 
includes  a  factor   of   U   for   live  load,  and  gives  a  factor  of  ^^S^^^'* 
safety  of  3  ;   it  also  allows  for  the  weight  of  superstructure. 

Unselected  rectangular  beams — 

W=:^^xK {A) 

Where  W  ■=■  actual  distributed  weight  in  cwts.  (superstructure 
not  to  be  included). 
h  =  breadth  of  beam  in  inches. 
d  —  depth  of  beam  in  inches. 
L  =  length  of  span  in  feet. 
K  =  a  variable  quantity  for  different  timbers  (see  below). 

261.  Uuselected  round  spars —  Formula 

Vr=^x^:xZ iB)  i-T"' 

The  S3mibols  being  the  same  as  for  formula  (.4),  h  and  d 
being-  here  equal,  and  round  spars  being-  only  about  -5^0  as 
strong-  as  square  beams  of^  the  same  depth. 

262.  For  larch  and  cedar  ..  ..  ..      K=l      Yaluea 

„    Baltic  fir  K  =  l      oiK. 

„    American  yellow  pine  . ,  . .      A^  =  f 

„    beech  and  English  oak  . .  . .      A"  =  -^ 

In  the  above  formula,  W  is  the  distributed  weighty  such  as 
that  of  troops,  on  any  span. 

263.  If  it  is  wished  to  use  these  formulae  for  a  concentrated  Concen- 
weight,  such  as  a  gun,  the  actual    weight  on  the  gun  wheels  irated 
must  be  multiplied  by  two  to  reduce  it  to  the  equivalent  ^°^^^- 
distributed  load,  when  it  can  be  substituted  for  W.     When, 

as  in  the  case  of  a  transom,  there  are  concentrated  loads  at  Transoms, 
more  than  four  points  along  the  span,  it  will  be  sufficient  to 
take  the  total  as  being  distributed. 

264.  With  several  baulks  under  a  roadway,  the  two  outer  Baulks, 
ones  can  be  assumed  as  taking  only  half  as  much  of  the  weight 

as  the  inner  ones. 


104  CHAPTER   XVIII. — STRENGTH   OF    MATERIALS,    ETC. 


the  outer  baulks  each  bear  ^ 


Arrange- 
menrs  of 
baulks. 


Formula 
for  can- 
tilever 
bridge. 


total 
(In  calcu- 


Thus,  with  five  baulks 
weight,  the  inner  baulks  each  bear  J  total  weight 
lating,  the  greater  weight  must  be  worked  to.) 

Rectangular  beams  are  stronger  on  edge  than  on  the  flat, 
and  should  be  always  used  on  edge. 

265.  In  calculating  the  strength  of  a  tapering  spar  when 
used  as  a  baulk,  d  is  to  be  taken  at  the  centre  of  the  spar. 

Experiment  has  proved  that  such  baulks,  when  supported 
at  both  ends  and  overloaded,  will  break  in  the  centre,  and 
not  at  the  small  end. 

Knowing  h,  d  and  L,  from  formula  (A)  or  (B)  we  can  find 
TT^,  the  safe  distributed  load,  for  these  data.  Knowing  \]\ 
and  choosing  L,  a  convenient  length,  we  can  find  b  and  d^ 
the  necessary  section  of  the  beam. 

266.  A  rough  formula  for  strength  of  cantilevers  is  as 
follows  : — 

W  =  ^  --r-  X  K  for  square  timbers. 

W=  the  total  live  load  which  can  be  brought  to  bear 

on  the  end  of  the  cantilever  in  cwts. 
L  =  the  length  of  the  cantilever  in  feet. 
h  =  breadth  1  -     •     i 
,i  =  depth     I'^-n^l^e^-        ■ 

/C  =  a  variable  quantity  according  to  the   tree  for 
values,  see  Sec.  2G2. 


Formula 
J  or  round 
spars. 


Weiglit  of 
•water. 


For  round  spars  : — 


X  K, 


These  formultB  .c^ive  an  allow^ance  for  superstructure  an( 
factor  of  safety  of  3. 

267.      Useful  facts- 
One  cubic  foot  of  water  =  GJ  gallons; 


One  gallon  weighs  10  lbs. 


Buoyancy. 

Buoyancy       268.  In  using  closed  vessels  like  casks  for  floating  piers,  the 
of  casks,     gafe  buoyancy  for  bridging  purposes  may  be  taken  at  y%  the 
actual  buoyancy. 


CHAPTER    XVIII. — STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS,  ETC.  105 

269.    The  buoyancy  of  closed  vessels  can  be  determined  Closed 
by  the  following  methods  : —  vessels. 

(a)  When  the  contents  are  known — 

Multiply  the  contents,  in  gallons,  by  10,  and  take  -^^  of 
this,  which  will  give  safe  buoyancy  in  pounds. 


(6)  For  casks,  when  the  contents  are  not  known — 

A  cfval  buoA'ancy  =  oC^L  —  AV  lbs. 
Safe  buoyancy     =  yV  {5C-L  -  W}  lbs. 

Where  C  is  the  circumference  of  the  cask,  in  feet,  halfway 
between  the  bung  and  the  extreme  end  ;  L  is  the  extreme 
length,  exclusive  of  projections  along  the  curve,  in  feet  ; 
W  is  the  weight  of  the  barrels  in  pounds. 


Collins* 
rule. 


270.  The  following  are  the  dimensions,  weight  and  buoyancy  Table  of 
of  certain  casks  : —  casks. 


i 

CD 

§    • 

S 

1 

If 

0. 

^ 

Name  of  cask. 

1 

_2 

be 

■&2 

5  '** 

M 

c5 

G 

3 

^ 

5>% 

< 

ins. 

ft. 

ft. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

£ 

Heager          

170 

38-5 

4-52 

9-33 

252 

1,736 

"5 

butt 

108 

33-3 

3-97 

8-09 

174 

1,125 

t 

puncheon   

72 

30-7 

3-20 

7-57 

140 

773 

« 

hogshead    

54 

28*6 

2-76 

7-05 

119 

.'i67 

5- 

barrel          

36 

25-3 

2-42 

6-23 

88 

382 

half  hogshead       

2G 

22*7 

2-12 

5-61 

65 

269 

rg 

kilderkin 

18 

20-3 

1-81 

5-02 

49 

185 

« 

small  cask 

14 

18-3 

1-76 

4-49 

32 

146 

'^  l      „      

6 

13-8 

1  -37 

3-40 

20 

60 

I'owder  f  whole  barrel 

barrels  \  quarter    ,, 



IT -5 

1-58 

4-26 

28-5 

115 

— 

14 

1-17 

2 '93 

8-5 

39 

fton     

Commissariat  i  5  ton 

— 

40 

3-2 

9-96 

95 

1,477 

— 

32 

3-2 

8*69 

74 

1,134 

vats             1  —ton 

— 

31 

3-3 

7-75 

67 

903 

Ls-lon 



27 

2-5 

6-61 

51 

499 

Water  cask        

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

60 

106         CHAPTER    XVIII. — STRENGTH    OF    MATERIALS,  ETC. 


Buoyancy       271.  The  buoyancy  of  a  log  can  be  obtained  by  multiplying 
^     ^^  ^^'  its  cubic  content  by  the  difference  between  its  weight  per 
cubic  foot  and  that  of  a  cubic  foot  of  water,  viz.,  62|  lbs. 

The  actual  flotation  then  of  the  log  given  below,  if  it  were 
pine,  would  be  : — 

95  X  (62J  -  40) 
or  95  X  22^" 

=  2,137i  lbs. 

As,  however,  timber  absorbs  a  great  deal  of  water,  only  |  of 
the  above  can  be  safely  relied  upon. 

This  available  buoyancy  will  then  be — 
I  X  2J37|  =  1,781  lbs. 

272.  The  contents  in  cubic  feet  of  an  unsquared  log  of  timber 
can  be  found  by  the  following  rule  : — 

L 

^  (D-  +  Dd  +  d-). 

Where  L  =  length  of  log-  in  feet, 
D,  d  =  diameter  at  ends. 

Thus,  if  the  log-  is  3  feet  and  2  feet  in  diameter  at  the  ends 
and  20  feet  Ion  or — 


Bridges  of 
rafts  of 
timber. 


the  cubic  contents  = 


20 
95  c.f. 


W^eightof       273.  The  follow 

ving  are  approximately  the  w 

imber.       foot  of  different  kinds  of  timber  :— 

Ash,  English 

..     46  lbs.     Pine      .. 

Beech     . . 

..     43    „       Poplar 

Chestnut 

..     41     „       Sycamore 

Elm 

.,     37    ,,       Teak,  Indian 

Fir 

..     33     ,.          „     African 

Larch     . . 

..     33    „       Yew     .. 

Maple     . . 

..     32    „       Walnut 

Oak,  English 

. .     57    „       Blue  Gum 

Willow   . .         . .     25  lbs. 

40  lbs. 


36 
51 
61 
41 
38 
63 


M 


J'late  73. 


Opposi  te.  jjcLtye  70. 


107 


CHAPTER    XIX.— BLOCKS   AND    TACKLES— USE    OF 

SPARS. 

274.  Blocks  are  used  for  the  purpose  of  changing  the  direction  Blocks 
of  ropes  or  of  gaining  power.  and 

They  are  called  single,  double,  treble,  &c.,  according  to  the  tac'des. 
number  of  sheaves,  which  are  of  metal   or  hard    wood,  and 
revolve  on  the  pin,  which  should  be  kept  well  lubricated. 

Snatch  blocks,  Fig.  1,  PI.  73,  are  single  blocks  with  an 
opening  in  the  shell  and  strap  on  one  side,  to  admit  a  rope 
without  passing  its  end  through. 

The  rope  with  which  tackles  are  rove  is  called  a  fall.  To 
overhaul  is  to  separate  the  blocks.  To  round  in  is  to  bring  them 
closer  together.  When  brought  together  the  blocks  are  said 
to  be  chock. 

275.  A  tackle  is  rove  by  two  men,  back  to  back,  6  feet  apart ;  KecTing. 
the  blocks  should  be  on  their  sides  between  the  men's  feet, 
hooks  to  their  fronts,  and  the  coil  of  rope  to  the  right  of  the 
block  at  which  there  are  to  be  the  greater  number  of  returns. 
Beginning  with  the  lowest  sheaf  of  this  block,  the  end  of  the 

fall  which  is  to  be  the  standing  end  is  passed  successively 
through  the  sheaves  from  right  to  left  and  then  made  fast. 

276.  In  using  tackle  great  care  must  be  taken  to  prevent  the  Pre. 
tackle  from  twisting.     The  best  method  is  to  place  a  handspike  cautions 
between  the  returns,  close  to  the  movable  block,  with  a  rope  ^^^^■^ 
to  each  end,  by  means  of  which  it  can  be  steadied.     New  rope 

must  be  uncoiled  and  stretched  before  using  it  as  a  "  fall." 

Crane  chain,   when  used  as  a  fall,   should  be  thoroughly  Crane 
soaked  in  oil.  cliain. 

277.  Various   tackles   are   sho\sTi   in  PI.   73.      The   power  Power. 
necessary  to  raise  a  weight  W  is  W  -f-  number  of  returns  at  the 
movable  block  -f-  about  10  per  cent,  per  sheaf  for  friction. 

278.  The  fall,  in  lifting  heavy  weights,  can  rarely  be  worked  Machines, 
by  hand,  but  has  to  be  "  led  "  to  either  a  capstan  or  winch, 

by  which  power  is  gained  and  a  steady  pull  ensured. 


108  CHAPTER   XIX. — BLOCKS    AND   TACKLES,  ETC. 

Carrying  279.  In  carrying  spars,  the  party  should  be  equally  divided 
spars.  on  either  side  of  the  spars,  facing  it,  and  sized  from  one  end. 
The  spar  should  then  be  lifted,  in  two  motions,  on  to  the  inner 
shoulders,  the  party  facing  one  way.  In  lowering  a  spar,  the 
party  should  slowly  face  inw^ards,  and  lower  the  butt  end 
first  to  the  ground,  and  afterwards  the  tip. 

Derricks.  280.  A  derrick  (Fig.  G,  PI.  48)  is  a  single  spar  set  up  with 
four  guys,  secured  with  clove  hitches.  A  tackle  is  lashed  to 
the  head,  and  the  derrick  can  be  used  for  raising  and  swinging 
a  w^eight  into  any  position  within  its  reach,  which  is  about 
one-fifth  of  its  height.  The  anchorages  for  the  guys  should  be 
at  a  distance  from  the  foot  of  the  derrick  equal  to  twice  its 
height.  The  foot  should  be  let  into  a  hole  in  the  ground  to 
prevent  its  slipping. 

In  Fig.  6,  PI.  74,  a  derrick  is  shown  in  the  act  of  raising  a 
pair  of  sheers. 

Fig.  8  show^s  a  swinging  derrick. 

Sheers.  281.  Sheers  (Fig.  4)  require  only  two  guys— a  "  fore  "  and 

"  back  "  guy.  They  should  be  fastened  to  the  legs  above  the 
crutch  by  clove  hitches,  the  back  guy  to  the  fore  spar,  and 
vice  versa,  so  that  their  action  may  tend  to  draw^  the  spars 
closer  together  and  not  strain  the  lashing.  The  minimum 
distance  of  the  anchorages  should  be  double  the  height. 
The  upper  block  of  the  tackle  is  hooked  to  a  sling  of  rope  or 
chain  passed  over  the  crutch.  Sheers  can,  as  a  rule,  be  used 
for  heavier  weights  than  derricks,  but  can  only  move  them  in  a 
vertical  plane  passing  between  the  legs.  The  feet  of  sheers 
must  be  secured  or  let  into  holes  in  the  ground.  The  distance 
apart  of  the  legs  should  not  be  more  than  one-third  the  length 
of  the  leg  up  to  the  crutch,  and  the  sheers  not  to  be  heeled 
over  more  than  one-fifth  of  their  height. 
Sheer  282.  The  legs  of  the  sheers  are  laid  side  by  side  on  a  skid,  and 

lashing.  j-ept  2  inches  apart  by  a  wedge.  The  lashing  is  commenced 
with  a  clove  hitch  on  one  spar,  carried  six  or  more  times 
upwards  round  both  spars  without  riding,  then  tw^o  Trapping 
turns,  and  finished  off  w^ith  two  half  hitches  round  the  other 
spar.     (Figs.  1  and  2,  PI.  74.) 


I*lcOte  '74 


Fi^.L 


USE     OF    SPARS 


jtiq.Z. 


Fry.  3 


STveei^s 


ybte. .  JBiflFiff.  S.  fyctf^pTiriff  turns 
ar^  cT/oMed' so  us  to  s?to\^ 


WellerAGratwm.LH  Litho.LofxJon. 


CHAPTER   XX. — FRAME    BRIDGES,  ETC.  100 

283.  Gyns,  Fig.  5,  require    no  guys,  and  are    good  for   a  Gyns. 
vertical  lift,  such  as  dismounting  gans. 

The  three  legs  of  the  gyn  are  placed  as  shown  in  Fig.  3, 
resting  on  a  skid,  and  2  inches  apart.  The  lashing  is  com- 
menced with  a  clove  hitch  on  an  outside  spar,  and  carried 
upwards  over  and  under  loosely  and  without  riding  six  times. 
Two  frapping  turns  are  taken  in  each  interval,  and  the  whole 
finished  off  with  two  half  hitches  round  one  of  the  spars. 

Iron  chain  is  better  than  rope  for  these  lashings,  as  it  admits 
of  fewer  turns,  which  allows  the  legs  to  be  more  easily  opened. 

284.  In  using  tackles  with  sheers,   gyns,   or  derricks,  the  Leading 
running  end  of  the  fall  should  always  be  led  through  a  "  leading  blocks, 
block,"  lashed,  as  a  rule,  to  one  of  the  spars  a  few  feet  above  the 
ground ;  a  snatch   block  is  most  convenient  for  the  purpose. 

(Fig.  7,  PI.  74.) 


CHAPTEK  XX.  —  CANTILEVER  BRIDGES,  FRAME 
BRIDGES,  FRAMED  TRESTLES,  SUSPENSION 
BRIDGES,   AND    CASK   PIERS. 


285.  Pis.    75  and   7G    show  various   types   of    cantilever  Cantilever 
bridges  as  used  in  Northern  India.  bridges. 

From  the  smallest  to  Ihe  largest  span  the  method  of  con- 
struction is  practically  identical.  A  site  is  chosen  where  a 
large  rock  or  rocks  rise  out  of  the  stream  or  a  pier  is  con- 
structed of  dry  stone  work  and  wooden  bindings.  On  the 
top  of  tliese  are  laid  a  number  of  stout  beams,  ««,  projecting 
over  the  stream,  with  the  projecting  end  somewhat  higher 
than  the  shore-ends.  The  number  of  beams,  their  length  and 
amount  of  projection  depend  on  the  span.  The  shore-ends  of 
each  row  of  cantilevers  should  be  covered  with  planks  or  like 
material.  Stones  are  then  packed  round  these  ends,  and  the 
v/hole  weighted  down.  It  is  also  desirable  to  lash  the  top 
iayers  to  the  bottom  ones  as  shown  in  Figs.  5  and  G. 


no 


CHAPTER   XX. — FRAME    BRIDGES,    ETC. 


Frame 
bridges. 


Single- 
lock 
bridge. 

Double- 
lock 
br.due. 


Supposin^!^  that  the  central  span  is  too  lar.i^e  for  available 
timbers,  then  more  rows  of  cantilevers  are  placed  on  the  first 
row  aa,  two  more  transoms  tt  are  placed  near  the  projecting" 
ends  and  the  roadbearers  rr  are  placed  in  position.  There  are 
<ienerally  more  cantilevers  in  the  bottom  row  than  in  the  row 
above  and  so  on.     Figs.  5  and  G. 

The  step  from  top  row  of  cantilevers  to  top  of  central  road- 
bearers  can  be  avoided  by  lashing  the  top  transom  underneath 
the  ends  of  the  top  rov/  of  cantilevers  instead  of  placing-  it  on 
the  top,  or  an  extra  row  of  roadbearers  may  be  added  above 
the  top  row  of  cantilevers.  In  the  case  of  a  long  bridge  a 
few  wire  ties  are  a  great  improvement,  as  they  stiffen  the 
bridge  greatl3\     Fig.  7. 

286.  The  following  are  simple  types  of  frame  bridges  : — 

{a)  Single  Lock. — Supporting   one    central   transom,  and 
sufficing  for  a  span  up  to  30  feet. 

(6)  DouUe  Lock. — Furnishing  two  transoms,  span  up  to 
45  feet. 

They  are  not  so  generally  useful  as  trestle  bridges. 

The  span  of  a  frame  bridge  is  the  horizontal  distance 
between  the  footings  of  the  frames,  and  is  independent  of  any 
increase  of  span  due  to  sloping  banks  or  bays  of  trestles. 

287.  A  single-lock  bridge  (Pi.  77)  consists  of  two  frames 
locking  together ;  one  frame  must  therefore  be  narrower  than 
the  other. 

288.  A  double-lock  bridge  (PI.  77)  consists  of  two  frames 
held  apart  by  distance  pieces.  The  frames  must  therefore  be 
the  same  width. 

The  frames  are  nearly  identical  with  two-leg-ged  trestles 
{Fig.  2.  PL  50).  but  the  slope  of  the  legs  is  not  so  great,  ^~- 
generally  suflricing,  and  the  transom  and  ledger  are  lashed  on 
on  opposite  sides  of  the  legs,  transom  on  the  shore  side  so  as 
to  bear  on  the  legs,  ledger  on  the  outer  side  so  as  not  to 
interfere  with  the  footings.  Before  lowering  the  frames  into 
their  places  footings  must  be  prepared,  holdfasts  driven,  fore 
and  back  guys  attached  to  the  top  of  each  leg,  and  foot  ropes 
attached  to  tach  leg  below  the  ledger.     The  frames  are  then 


J^Utte^  75. 


CANTILEVER    BRIDGES 


J^i^.7 


JSZei/atioTh 


S/g6  Bc$. 


W«lt«riGreh«m.L'^  lifho  Lonoon 

To  fcLcepa^B  JfO. 


'Pl^fte  76 


To  faWjnv  plate  75 


J 


Flat^>  n. 


LOCK     BRIDGES. 


a.  road  boarers, 

b.fork  tranaoai. 

c.  frame  transom. 

d.  shore  transom. 
e„  legs. 
f.  djAgonal  bra(»3 


SINGLE    LOCK. 


g.     ledger. 

"•     footings. 

i.  anchorage  for 

f potropes . 
J.  chesses, 
k.  ribands. 


a.  read  bearer. 

b.  road  transom. 

c.  frame  transom. 

d.  shore  transom, 
legs. 

f .     diagonal  braces 


g.     ledger. 
n.     footings, 
i.     footropes^ 
j,     chesses. 

ribands . 

distance  pieces 


Note  J  Pootrofes  are  removecT  after  franies  are   locked. 


■iiec  9  05 


WdlerAGraham.  Lri*  UHio.London. 
To  f'olZcw  Ptoute  76. 


CHAPTER   XX. — FRAME    BRIDGES,    ETC.  Ill 

lowered,  and  if  a  single-lock  bridge,  locked  ;  if  a  double-lock 

bridge,  held  back  by  the   guys    a  little   higher   than    their 

ultimate   position.     A   single-lock  bridg'e  is  then  completed 

with   the   usual   roadway :    for    a    double-lock    bridge    two  ^ 

distance  pieces  must  be  placed  across  the  ends  of  the  frame 

transoms,  as    shown   in   the    diagram   and   the    road-bearing 

transoms  lashed  across,  as  shown.     The  back  gu^'s  can  now 

be  eased,  and  the  bridge  allowed  to  lock.     The  roadway  is 

completed  as  usual. 

In  order  that  the  parts  of  frame  bridges  may  fit  together, 
considerable  accuracy  is  necessary  in  taking  the  measure- 
ments and  marking  the  positions  for  the  lashings.  To  this 
end  a  section  of  the  gap  and  proposed  bridge  should  be 
marked  out  on  the  ground,  allowing  for  camber.  The  spars 
for  the  legs  must  now  be  laid  on  this  section  in  the  exact 
positions  they  will  occupy  when  in  bridge,  and  marked  to  show 
proper  positions  for  lashing  on  ledgers  and  transoms. 

289.  The  following  approximate  dimensions  of  timbers  for  Dimen- 
single  and  double  lock  bridges  are  necessary  for  carrying  ^1*^"^  °^ 
infantry  in  fours  crowded  :  — 

Legs         . .  7  inches  at  tip. 

Frame  transoms,  mean  diameter        . .       6  inches. 
Distance  pieces  ,,  ,,  ..     11  inches. 

Other  spars  as  for  trestle  bridges. 

290.  Plates  78,  79  and  80  show  examples  of  heavy  trestles  Framed 
made  of  timbers  framed  together  and  fastened  by  iron  dogs,  t^^^^^^^* 
spikes,  bolts ^  etc.     They  are  specially  useful  for  hasty  railway 
bridges  (see  also  Chap.  XXIII)  and   for  road  bridges  where 
heavy   traffic    is   expected.      Skilled    labour   is   required  for 
their  construction. 

These  trestles  usually  consist  of  groundsills,  capsills,  uprights, 
struts,  and  diagonal  braces  and  stringers  connecting  the  trestles 
in  the  line  of  the  bridge. 

The  uprights  should  be  as  far  as  possible  arranged  under  the 
road-bearers,  so  as  to  support  the  weight  directly.  When 
they  can  be  got  of  sufficient  length,  it  is  best  to  make  the  trestles 
in  one  tier  only,  however  high  the  bridge,  taking  care  of  course 
that  they  are  properly  braced  both  ways  to  prevent  buckling 
(PI.  78,  Fig.  1  and  PI.  79,  Fig.  1). 

When  the  material  is  not  long  enough,  the  trestles  must  be 


^ 


112 


CHAPTER  XX. — FRAME    BRIDGES,   ETC. 


Struts. 


Bra( 


Corbel. 


Pasten- 
inss. 


made  in  two  or  more  tiers.  In  this  case  the  upper  tiers  must 
not  be  made  too  heavy,  or  they  will  be  very  difficult  to  hoist 
into  position.  The  groundsills  of  the  lower  tier  must  be  strong 
enough  to  support  and  distribute  the  weight  of  the  uprights. 
Where  the  soil  is  firm  and  can  be  levelled  to  an  even  bed,  no 
other  foundation  than  the  groundsill  is  necessary  ;  where  the 
soil  is  soft  a  low  crib  pier  may  be  made  to  distribute  the  weight. 
The  adjoining  capsill  and  groundsill,  where  one  trestle  rests 
on  another,  need  not  be  very  strong.  A  3-inch  plank  will  suffice 
for  each,  and  may  be  spiked  to  the  uprights.  In  this  case 
the  uprights  may  be  fixed  in  position  with  cleats,  and  dogged 
to  each  other  (PL  78,  Fig.  2). 

291.  The  inclination  of  the  struts  depend  to  some  extent 
on  the  height,  width  and  length  of  the  bridge.  They  are  not 
essential  for  wide  bridges  of  no  great  height. 

Struts  for  railway  bridges  must  have  a  greater  inclination 
than  for  ordinary  bridges  to  provide  for  wind  pressure  on  the 
side  of  the  train  tending  to  overturn  the  whole  structure. 
This  is  especially  the  case  when  the  bridge  is  high  and  long. 

292.  For  the  arrangement  of  the  diagonal  bracing,  see 
Plates  78  and  79. 

The  ends  of  struts  should  not  be  notched  into  uprights  unless 
the  latter  have  a  considerable  margin  of  strength  and  stiffness. 
Uprights  and  struts  should  be  notched  into  groundsills  and 
capsills  when  possible  ;  but  when  time  presses  and  few  car- 
penters are  available,  a  careful  arrangement  of  dogs  will  suffice, 
without  notching. 

293.  PI.  78,  Fig.  4,  shows  a  corbel,  an  arrangement  for  giving 
a  wider  bearing  at  the  top  of  a  trestle  ;  and  Fig.  5  an  alternative 
method,  which  also  helps  to  fix  the  capsill. 

294.  Dogs,  spikes  and  bolts  are  the  most  useful  fastenings 
for  framed  trestles.  The  position  of  each  dog  should  always 
be  considered  with  a  definite  object  of  preventing  a  possible 
distortion  of  the  frame.  They  should  be  on  both  sides  of  the 
trestle.  Dogs  should  not  be  driven  within  3  inches  of  the  edge 
of  a  timber,  or  within  4  inches  of  its  end. 

Spikes,  when  used  in  pairs,  should  be  driven  inchning 
towards  each  other.  They  run  5  inches  to  10  inches  in 
length. 


J>laJbe78 


Fig1 


rRAMED      TRESTLE 

Squared     Timber 


f-^'SX-A 


Tt^  2 


7\ 


Fi^  3 

Jl 


wrong  position^ 
for  dog. 


Fj^,^ 


Fvg  6 


^ 


.a 


^ 


n;^ a a 

Composite  roadhearers 
wittcplxviks  fhreaJujiq  Joint 


■Welleri Graham  L!f  Lirtw. London 

C)j)posvte  page  J^-^ 


ricute    79 


FRAMED     TRESTLES 

Sleepy      j.,se'.^ 


Fistcp 
5  coaxifv  scTt 

Tresile    with.    \' 
ilsTv  phite  g-^^^ 
rastemn^s 


t  boU 


Vf'drvri%oUs  ''^gdrU'-ii'olts        ''/a'^drift  l>oUs 


-^M '  m^ 


FICLTV 

Trestle  of  Flouaks 


CapsilL  ^^J-ron  stiiap. 


Wel!er46raham.l'*  Liffto, London. 
JhfoUxfyy  pZate  78: 


PlcLte  SO 


FRAMED       TRESTLE 

Round   Timbers 


"'''      ""    ~"    •*" '  •''T^rfiiTr-ff^r4r;7-;;iri7r 


Fi(j.  2 


ELe\'aJLiorv 


To  foll<ryv  pbxte  79 


CHAPTER   XX. — FRAME    BRIDGES,   ETC. 


113 


295.  When  round  timbers  are  used  the  groundsills  and  capsills  Framed 
must   be   adzed  to    give    a   square   bearing   surface   for   the  trestles  of 
uprights.  I'pund 

When  there  are  two  or  more  tiers,  it  will  be  best  for  the  ^^  ^^' 
upper  tiers  not  to  have  groundsills.  The  uprights  may  rest 
directly  on  the  capsills  of  the  tier  below  {see  PI.  80. 
They  should  be  wedged  up  after  fixing  ;  to  keep  the  trestle 
together  while  it  is  being  raised,  a  light  timber  or  board  may 
be  spiked  to  the  sides  of  the  uprights  near  their  feet. 


296.  Formula  for  Use  in  Suspension  Bridges. 


Suspen- 
sion 
bridges. 


Length  of  cable  between  piers  =   a  +- — 


W  cr 


W=.  uniform 
dead  load  on 
y    cables     per 
un  of 


Tension  in  cable,  Tq 

Tension  at  piers,  Tg 

Pressure  on  piers  =  W  a  J 

Height  of  frame  d  •=  -\-  h'  (length  of  centre  sling)  +  camber  (1  in  30) 


For  a  concentrated  load,  such  as  that  brought  by  a  traveller,  without 

Ad 
roadway,  safe  load  on  the  cable  =  —  x  working-  strength  of 

cable. 


(5289) 


u 


lU 


CHAPTER    XX. — FRAME    BRIDGES,    ETC. 


297.  The  followinf;^  table  will  be  found  useful  for  calculating  stresses 
due  to  uuiform  loads  on  suspension  bridges  ;  in  it  the  load  is  \Vx  a  : — 


1- 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

Dip. 

Tension  at 
lowest  point. 

Tension  at 
highest 
pcint. 

Length  of 
cable. 

Depression  at 

centre  due  to 

an  elongation 

of  cable  of 

1  inch. 

Ta^ue  of 
JK. 

a 
10 

1-25  X  lead 

1  -346  X  load 

1  -027   X   span 

1  -875    inches 

2o      SK 

a 
ll 

1  -375       „ 

1  -49 

1  -022 

2  -0625       „ 

2-75       „ 

a 
12" 

1-0 

1  -58 

1  -0185 

2  -25 

3-0 

a 
13 

1  -625       „ 

1-7 

1  -0158 

2  -4875       ,, 

3  •25       „ 

a 
14 

1  -75        „ 

1  -82        „ 

1  -0136 

2-65 

3-5         „ 

a 
15 

1  -85 

1  -94        „ 

1-012 

2  -815 

3  -75 

298.  For  length  of  slings^  =  -^  x~. 

a  =  span. 

cl  =  dip. 

y  =  length  of  sling, 

X  —  distance  from  lowest  point  in  fee. 

Anchor-  299.  Pull  on  anchorage  =  tension  in  cables  at  piers, 

age.  Strength  of  log  anchorage  (Fig.  9.  PI.  48)  =  holding  power 

of  the   anchor   face,  and  can  be  obtained  from  the  following 


CHAPTER   XX. — FRAME   BRIDGES,    ETC. 


115 


table,  showing"  the  holding   power    of   dry    loam  at  varioiuj 
depths  and  inclinations  of  cable  ; — 


Mean  depth  of  Face  of 

Anchorage  below 

Surface. 

Inclination  of  the  force  drawing  the  anchorage 
(in  a  direction  perpendicular  to  its  face), 
and   corresponding   ultimate   resistance   in 
lbs.  per  square  foot  of  anchor  face. 

2  feet       

3  „         .. 

4  „ 

5  »         

1: 

2,700 

4,400 

8,000 

22,000 

3,880 

5,860 

10,660 

29,330 

4,032 

6,160 

11,200 

30,800 

i 

4,370 

6,750 

12,260 

33,730 

300. 


jS'ature  of  Soil. 

Relative  Holding 
Power. 

Compact  loam,  rammed  (dry)   . . 

Hard  compact  gravel,  rammed  (dry)   . . 

Wet  river  clay  (below  subsoil  water  level),  rammed 

Incoherent  river  sand,  not  rammed  (damp)    . . 

1 

0-9 
0-5 
0-5 

301.  A  3.  2.  1.  holdfast,  made  of  5  feet  park  pickets,  driven 
2  feet  6  inches  to  3  feet  in  the  ground,  should  stand  a  strain 
of  2  tons  [vide  PI.  48). 

302.  The  following  detail  shows  the  most  convenient  way  Cask  piers. 
of  making  cask  piers  with  large  casks,  see  PI.  54. 

The  gunnels  should,  for  a  pier  of  the  size  shown  in  the  figure  G-unnels. 
(the  casks  used  being  butts),  be  21  feet  by  4  inches  by  5  inches. 

The  slings  of  2J-inch  rope,  6  fathoms  long,  with  an  eye  splice  Slings. 
1  foot  long  at  one  end. 


(5289) 


H  2 


116  CHAPTER   XX. — FRAME   BRIDGES,  ETC. 

Braces.  Braces  of  IJ-inch  rope,  3  fathoms  long,  a  small  eye  splice 

at  one  end,  and  a   figure  of  8   knot  1  foot  5  inches  from  the 
eye. 

Ways.  The  pier  being  made,  is  launched  into  the  water  by  means  of 

a  sledge  called  the  ways. 

Forming         To  make  a  pier  the  number  of  men  required  is  two  more  than 

piers.  double  the  number  of  casks,  or  2  n  +  2,  where  n  is  the  number 

of  casks. 

Four  men  stand  at  the  ends  of  the  gunnels,  the  remainder 
opposite  the  intervals  between  the  casks  on  either  side.  The 
gunnels  being  in  position,  the  gunnel  men  at  one  end  place  the 
eyes  of  the  slings  over  the  gunnels  ;  the  gunnel  men  at  the  other 
end  secure  the  slings  to  their  ends  of  the  gunnels  with  a  round 
turn  and  two  half  hitches.  The  brace  men  keep  the  slings 
under  the  casks  with  their  feet,  and  as  soon  as  they  are  secured 
adjust  the  braces  as  follows,  the  men  working  simultaneously 
by  word  of  command. 

The  eye  of  the  brace  is  passed  under  the  sling  in  the  centre 
of  the  interval  between  two  casks,  the  end  passed  through  the 
eye  and  hauled  taut,  the  sling  being  kept  steady  with  the  left 
foot.  The  brace  is  then  brought  up  outside  the  gunnel  im- 
mediately over  the  eye,  and  a  turn  round  the  gunnel  taken  to 
the  left,  the  foot  is  removed  from  the  sling,  and  each  man  then 
hauls  up  the  standing  part  of  his  brace  with  the  left  hand, 
holding  on  to  the  turn  with  the  right ;  as  soon  as  the  brace 
is  taut  the  turn  is  held  fast  with  the  heel  of  the  left  hand,  and 
the  remainder  of  the  brace,  in  a  coil,  is  placed  on  the  cask 
to  the  left.  Each  man  then  takes  his  opposite  neighbours 
brace  from  the  cask  on  the  right,  and  passes  it  between  the 
standing  part  of  his  brace  and  the  cask  on  his  left,  then  back 
between  his  brace  and  the  cask  on  his  right,  keeping  the  bight 
so  formed  below  the  figure  of  8  knot  on  his  own  brace,  and 
placing  the  end  on  the  cask  to  his  right.  Each  man  then  takes 
back  his  own  brace  from  the  cask  on  his  left,  passes  it  under 
the  gunnel  to  the  left  of  the  standing  part,  places  his  foot  against 
the  gunnel,  and  hauls  taut.  The  pier  is  then  rocked  backwards 
and  forwards,  all  the  brace  men  taking  in  the  slack  of  their 
braces  and  hauling  taut  until  the  word  steady  is  given^  when 


CHAPTER    XX. — FRAME    BRIDG^ES,    ETC.  117 

they  take  a  round  turn  round  the  gunnel  to  the  left  of  the  previous 
turns,  and  make  fast  with  two  half-hitches  round  the  two 
parts  of  their  own  brace  close  to  the  gunnel,  drawing  the  two 
parts  close  together  and  placing  the  spare  ends  of  their  brace 
between  the  casks.  The  pier  is  then  turned  up  on  one  side, 
and  the  sling  adjusted  below  the  third  hoop  of  the  casks,  and 
a  breast  line  attached  to  the  slings  at  each  end  :  it  is  tlien  lowered 
and  turned  up  on  the  other  side,  the  other  sling  adjusted,  the 
vmys  brought  up  into  position^  and  the  pier  lowered  on  to  them 
ready  for  launching. 


118 


CHAPTER   XXI.— DEMOLITION   FORMULA. 

CHARaES   FOR   HASTY  DEMOLITIONS. 

Note. — The  charge  is  in  lbs.      B  =  length  to  be  demolished  in  feet. 

T  =  thickness  to  be  demolished  in  feet. 
i  =  thickness  to  be  demolished  in  inches  (in  the 
case  of  iron  plate  only). 
In  the  presence  of  the  enemy  increase  the  charges  bj  50  per  cent. 


GUNPOWDER  (Tamped). 


Object  attacked. 


Brick  arch — one  haunch 
Brick  arch— crown    . . 
Brick  wall 
Wood  stockade — hard  wood 


Stockade    of    earth   between 
timber  up  to  3  ft.  6  in.  thick 


lbs. 


Fort  gate 
Tunnels 


fBT^ 
|BT2 
|BT2 

40  to  100 


60  to  80  per 
5  ft. 


200 
tT3 


Remarks. 


'  Total  amount  divided  into 
charges  placed  apart  about 
twice  the  thickness  of  brick- 
work. 


One    charge.     Soft    wood   half 
this. 


One  charge. 


One  charge. 


Where  T  =  total  distance  from 
the  surface  of  the  lining  to 
the  charge. 


no 


Note. 


CHAPTER   XXI.— DEMOLITION  FORMULAE. 

CHAEGES  FOE  HASTY  DEMOLITIONS. 

-The  charge  is  in  lbs.     B  =  length  to  be  demolished  in  feet. 

T  =  thickness  to  be  demollsbcd  in  feet. 
t  =  thickness  to  be  demolished  in  inches  (in  the 
case  of- iron  plate  only). 
In  the  presence  of  the  enemy  increase  the  charges  by  50  j^er  cent. 


aUNGOTrON  (Untamped). 

If  the  charge  is  tamped,  decrease  by  one  half. 

Obje<;t  attacked. 

lbs. 

Eemarks. 

Brick  arch— haunch  or  crown.. 

fBT= 

Continuous  charges. 

Brick  wall— up  to  2  ft.  thick  . . 
Brick  wall— over  2  ft.  thick    . . 
Brick  pier           . . 

2  per  foot 
1BT2 

1  Length  of  breech  B  not  to  be  less 
)■      than  the  height  of  the  wall  to  be 
brought  down. 

Hard  wood — stockade  or  single 

3BT2 

In  a  single  charge  outside.     For"^  .« 
a  round  timber  charge  =  ST^.     :g 

Hard  wood — necklace  . . 

3BT2 

Trees  up  to  12  ins.  diameter.  For  !  ^ 

a  round  timber  charge  =  3T^  j  "o 

o 

Hard  wood — auger  hole           , . 

Stockade  of  earth  between  tim- 
ber up  to  3  ft.  6  ins.  thick 
Heavy  rail  stockade 

|T2 
4  per  foot 
7  per  foot 

Where  the  timber  is  not  round,     ^S 
T  =  smaller  axis.                     J  ^ 

1 

)■  Single  charge. 

1 

Fort  gate 

50 

1 
J 

Breechloading  guns 

For  S-inch  gun  use  2  lbs.     Double 
the  charge  for  every  inch  increase 
in  calibre.    To  be  placed  in  breech. 
The  gun  should  be  loaded  with  a 
shell  if  possible. 

First  class  rail    . .          . . 

— 

PA  third  of  a  If -lb.  slab  against  the 
\   web  near  a  chair  if  those  are  used. 

Iron  plate 

|B^ 

t  is  in  INCHES. 

Iron  girders       . .          * . 

fBjf2 

r  Calculate   as    for    iron    plate,  given  . 
<       thickness  of  flange  to  be  measured 
[      where  it  joins  the  web. 

Frontier  tower,  stone  and  mud 

16  to  30 

In  one  charge  in  centre  of  tower. 

Wire  cable 

C2 

24 

■  "  C "    being   the    circumference  in 
inches. 

1 

120 


WORKING 


Nature  of  Work. 


Dimensions. 


No.  of  lien. 


1 

.  Felling  trees        

2 

.  Cutting  brushwood        

3 

Clearing  plantation  of  brush- 
wood, with  trees  up  to  12  in. 
diameter;  sorting,  binding, 
carting 

4 

Cutting  hedge      

5. 

Making  fascines 

6. 

Gabions      

7. 

Band  gabions       

8. 

Hurdles      

9. 

Cutting  sods         

10. 

Loophole  in  wall,  two  bricks 
thick 

Jl. 

Notch,  two  bricks  thick 

12. 

Abatis,  roughly  constructed    ... 

13. 

Low  wire  entanglement 

14. 

High    „            „           

Up  to  1  ft.  diameter 


Up  to   about  1|"  di- 
ameter 


Time. 


100  yds.  X  40  yds.       !  1  company  (100 
men) 


Wood,  ^"  to  2"  diameter 
18'  long,  9"  diameter 


1  man 

5  men 


2'  9"  high,  2'  external 
diameter 


2'  9"  high,  2'  diameter 
6' long,  2'  9"  high 

18"  X  9"  X  41" 


50  yds.  deep 


3    „ 
1  man 


10  men 


1  minute  per  inch 
of  diameter 


4  hours 


minutes  to  18 
uaautes 


1  hour 


2  hours 


10  minutes 
2 1  hours 


i       M 

10  minutes 
1  relief 
1  hour 

4  hours 


N.B.— Gabion  revetments,  7'  6"  high,  requires  14  gabions,  3  fascines  per 
HurdleJ  or  brushwood,  2'  9"  high,  requires  9  bundles  brushwood, 
Sandbag  revetment  requires  200  sandbags  per  100  gup.  feet. 
For  constructing  iiead  corer,  sandbags  and  sods,  on  earth  parapets, 


PARTY  TABLE. 


121 


Amount. 


100  sq.  yds.  or  9  to 
10  bundles  of 
60  lbs.  each 

About  300  bundles 
of  50  lbs.  each 


2  paces 


ICO 


2  paces 
100  sq.  yds. 


Tools. 


Felling  axes:  hand  axes; 
saws,  cross-c«t;  saws, 
band 


I  Billhooks,  lashing  or  wire; 
I  a  small  portion  of  felling 
)■  axes,  hand  axes  and  saws ; 
a  grindstone  and  a  few 
I    whet  stones 


Billhooks  and  hand  axes 


1  measuring  rod;  1  dicker; 
3  billhooks:  2  knives  ;  1 
maul;  1  hand  saw;  1  pair 
of  pliers 

1  billhook;  1  mallet;  2 
knives;  1  measuring 
rod 


2  billhooks;  2  knives;  1 
mallet ;  1  pair  of  pliers  (if 
sewn  with  wire) 


Sharpened 
cutter 


pades    or    sod 
Crowbar  or  pick 


3  billhooks;  1  maul ;  2  pairs 
of  pliers 


20  yds.  length.       i  2   billhooks;     2    mauls;     2 
pairs  of  pliers,  1  hand  saw 


Remarks. 


For  larger  trees  the  diameter  in  inches  cubed 
and  divided  by  144  will  give  the  number  of 
ndnutes.  With  the  hand  axe  allow  2  minutes 
per  inch  of  diameter  lor  trees  up  to  1  foot; 
for  trees  over  1  foot  twice  the  calculated 
amount. 

Men  opened  at  4  yds.  interval  should  cut 
25  yds.  to  their  front  in  4  hours. 


40  men  cutting;  40  men  sorting  and  binding; 
20  men  cartuig. 


If  very  bushy  a  pole  and  ropes  can  be  used 
to  expose  their  lower  branches  to  the  axe. 

Materials  :  4  bundles  brushwood.  60  ft.  of  wire 
or  spun  yarn  if  withes  are  not  used.  Weight 
about  140  lbs. 


One  and  a  half  bundles  of  brushwood.    Weight 
complete  about  50  lbs. 


10  bands,  10  pickets.    Weight  compl'ite,  13  lbs. 


Trees  used  where  felled. 

1  sq.  ft.  of  entanglement  takes  1  ft.  of  wire. 


sq.   ft.   takes  3  ft.   of  wire.      Entanglement 
built  with  3  rows  of  pickets,  each  2  yds.  apart. 


100  sup.  ft. 

wire  and  stakes  for  anchoring  per  100  sup.  ft. 

allow  ^  hour  to  1  hour  in  addition  to  the  calculated  task. 


122 


CHAPTER  XXII. — ROADS — BONING    AND   LEVELLING. 


be 

.£ 

'B 
o 


5 

c 

1 

<4-l 

o     . 

1° 

1 

1 

1 
i 

1 

7. 

Above  or 
below 
datiini. 

1 

A                          iH           W           O 

^                    (N         cc        O 

III 

^        1   ' 

d                          rH           1— 1 
'^                             1               1 

1 

C<1 

ft.     in. 
lino  (or  start 

5  1 

6  2 
3     10 

I— i 
r-i 

1                    y^      m 

ft.     in. 

3      0 
5       1 
G      2 

1 

2. 

Horizontal 
distances. 

ft.     in. 

5       0 
10       () 

8       2 

7     10 

i 

o          1 

i 

1 
"       1 

1 

1 

?5        *        *        ' 

<'i    o    ;:;    s 

:        1 

123 


CHAPTER  XXII.— ROADS -BONING  AND 
LEVELLING. 

Roads. 

303.  A  roadway  10  feet  wide  (8  feet  minimum)  will  take  a  width  of 
single  line  of  wagons*  passing  in  one  direction,  or  infantry  in  roadway, 
fours  ;   12  feet  is  better  as  allowing  horsemen  to  pass  without 
difficulty  ;  for  each  additional  line  of  vehicles  10  feet  should  be 

added  to  the  width  of  the  road. 

Where  there  is  little  traffic,  a  width  of  10  feet  may  suffice 
for  wagons  both  going  and  coming,  provided  sidings  are  made 
at  intervals,  into  which  one  wagon  may  go  to  allow  another 
to  pass. 

A  width  of  6  feet  is  sufficient  for  infantry  in  file  or  pack 
animals  moving  in  one  direction. 

304.  The  gradient  for  a  short  distance,  such  as  a  ramp  leading  Gradients. 
on  to  a  bridge,  may  be  ^,  or  even  J  for  infantry,  i  for  artillery, 

but  for  animals  or  wheeled  traffic  slopes  steeper  than  ■:^\  are 
inconvenient,  and  if  the  incline  be  long  it  is  still  more  desirable 
to  reduce  them.  Traction  engines  will,  on  good  roads,  draw  a 
load  equal  to  their  own  weight  up  ^q,  twice  their  own  weight 
up  2V5  ^^d  three  times  their  own  weight  on  the  level,  or  up 
slopes  not  exceeding  J3,  which  is  the  maximum  gradient 
in  first-class  roads. 

305.  Whenanew  road  has  tobeconstructeditshouldbemade  Laying 
as  straight  as  is  consistent  with  the  extreme  gradient  permissible,  out  a  new 

In  laying  it  out  the  centre  line  should  be  marked  by  pickets,  ^^^^' 
spitlocking  [i.e.,  marking  out  the  fine  with  the  point  of  a  pick), 
&c. 

If  the  road  passes  through  a  wood,  it  will  be  well  to  cut  down 
a  fine  of  trees  in  the  required  direction.     The  space  occupied 

*  The  ordinary  -width  of  the  wheel  track  of  W.D,  carriages  is  5  feet 
2  inches  from  out  to  out,  except  that  of  the  pontoon  wagons,  which  is 
5  feet  10  inches. 

The  points  of  the  axletree  arms  project  about  6i  inches  beyond  the 
wheel  track  on  each  side. 


Il 


]2i        CHAPTER    XXII. — ROADS — BONING    AND   LEVELLING. 

by  the  road  should  then  be  cleared  of  all  irregularities,  and  the 
tree  roots  grubbed  up. 
Metalled         306.  Fig.  1,  PI.  81,  gives  a  section  of  a  metalled  road  on  level 
'^^^*  ground,  or  only  slightly  inclined  in  the  direction  of  the  width 

of  the  road. 

Side  drains  must  be  cut  where  necessary,  and  communications 
made  underneath  the  road  at  intervals  to  allow  the  water 
to  escape.  The  earth  from  these  side  drains,  when  well  rammed, 
may  be  employed  to  give  a  shape  to  the  road  if  metalling 
is  afterwards  to  be  put  on  to  it,  otherwise  it  is  better  scattered. 
In  applving  the  metalling  large  stones  should  be  spread  as  a 
foundation,  and  above  this  should  come  a  layer  of  broken 
stones  some  3  inches  or  4  inches  thick.  A  thin  top  layer  of 
gravel  or  other  binding  material  is  an  advantage.  This  should 
be  rolled  or  rammed,  a  plentiful  supply  of  water  being  used. 
The  surface  of  the  road  should  slope  from  the  centre  to  the 
side  at  about  ^V'  ^^  allow  the  water  to  drain  off. 

Sometimes  only  one  layer  of  stone  of  the  smaller  size  is  used. 
In  many  situations  gravel  is  the  only  available  material ; 
it  should  contain  a  portion  of  loam,  sand,  or  other  small  stuff 
to  bind  the  pebbles  together. 

AMiere  metal  is  not  obtainable,  such  growths  as  reeds,  heather, 

or  long  grass,  laid  thickly  across  the  road  are  better  than 

nothing. 

Eoad  on  307.  AMien  on  the  side  of  a  hill  the  road  will  be  partly  cutting 

"^f  ^^        and  partly  embankment  (Fig.  2),  unless  the  hill  is  very  steep, 

when  it  may  be  all  cutting  as  in  Fig.  2,  PI.  82. 

The  ground  on  which  the  embankment  rests  should  be 
stepped,  to  prevent  slipping,  and  a  retaining  wall  of  dry  stones 
(Fig  2,  PI.  81)  or  logs,  fascines  (Fig.  1,  PL  82),  or  sods,  &c.,may 
sometimes  be  required.  The  surface  of  the  road  should  slope 
inwards  towards  the  hill,  the  water  being  got  rid  of  at  intervals 
bv  drains  passing  under  the  road.  If  no  drain  pipes  be  available, 
French  drains  may  be  constructed  by  digging  a  trench  and  filUng 
it  with  large  stones  fitted  loosely,  so  as  to  allow  the  water 
to  pass  through,  the  top  being  covered  with  brushwood,  which 
carries  the  roadway.  Serviceable  drains  may  also  be  made 
with  barrels  or  planks. 

When  ascending  a  hill  by  means  of  zig-zags  the  road  should 
he  m&de  as  level  as  possible  at  each  angle,  and  half  as  wide 


hill. 


PlccteSJ 


METALLED    ROADS. 


^i^,1. 


K  "5 --4«»i*-^  '-'^-T/ss- ^  o "-  - 


Fi^.Z. 


^    r-3'*^'—}?^-^'^^'  O' ■>j^-^;e>i 


J^z^.S. 


Weller 4 Graham. W    LithaLonaon. 
Opposite'  poLg^  J24-. 


Plat^SZ 


TEMPORARY 

ROADS 

Tis^.7. 

ff 

# 

j^ .<^  '-.„^r --^" 

'_f 

gug^gdilg^M 

i 

he 

m 

• 

^^^,.^^i%l 

/          JFl^.Z. 

^ 

/ 

s. 

6talt  orvJFcLSctrves. 

'^-^^- f8  0'- 

-tf'd 

\ 1^^  1  iJ'."J  ^^^JO^^i^'Tj 

1    '    1^'"^    ijL<.U,,jJt^.. 

'w^n 

I^^j^ffl^wjy  ^  jPF?^^:^^^ 

iwft, 

._,  •••-■*T^'  ■    '-       * 

siasB  OS. 

Welter 4 Gp«h»m.L>^   Litha London. 
TofoUxrw  plccUSi 

CHAPTER   XXII. — ROADS — BONING    AND   LEVELLING.        125 

again  as  in  the  straight  portions.  Short  zig-zags  should  he 
avoided. 

308.  When  a  road  passes  over  verv  wet  or  marshy  ground,  and  'Roa^s 
brushwood  is  available,  it  should  be  made  up  into  fascines  across 
or  hurdles,  or  even  laid  loose  across  the  road  (though  this  ^^^^^nes. 
plan  is  not  so  good  as  if  made  up)  as  foundation  for  the  road 
material. 

309.  When  fascines  are  used  there  may  be  one,  two,  or  more  Fascine 
layers  (Fig.  3,  PI.  82),  according  to  the  requirements  of  the  ^^o^^- 
case,  the  top  row  being  always  at  right  angles  to  the  direction 

of  the  road. 

310.  With  hurdles  their  length  should  be  equal  to  the  width  Hurdles, 
of  the  road,  and  there  should  not  be  less  than  two  layers  across 

the  road,  the  layers  breaking  joint. 

When  the  road  is  a  permanent  one  it  is  considered  ad- 
visable to  place  the  brushwood  at  such  a  depth  below  the  surface 
as  will  ensure  it  always  being  damp,  as  when  it  is  alternately 
wet  and  dry  it  soon  rots. 

Four  inches  to  six  inches  of  broken  stone  or  gravel  are  then 
laid  on  top,  or,  if  these  materials  be  not  available,  the  earth 
excavated  from  the  trenches  on  either  side  is  thrown  there, 
the  surface  being  sloped  as  already  described. 

311.  The  trenches  should  be  cut  about  3  feet  or  4  feet  from  Trenches, 
the  brushwood  on  either  side,  and  outlets  should  be  made  from 

them  at  intervals,  to  allow  the  water  to  discharge  into  lower 
ground. 

312.  See  Chapter  XII.  Corduroy 

road«. 

313.  Eoads  which  are  exposed  to  the  traffic  of  heavy  military  Repair  of 
vehicles  require   constant    repair.      Parties  of    men    under  a  ^°^^^* 
N.C.O.  should  therefore  be  told  olf  to  every  3  or  4  miles  of 

road  to  keep  it  in  order,  and  depots  for  road  metaUing  should 
be  formed  at  short  intervals  from  which  the  material  is  dis- 
tributed along  the  road  as  required.  The  material  used  may 
be  either  broken  stone  (of  a  size  to  pass  through  a  1  J-inch  ring), 
broken  furnace  slag,  brick  or  gravel,  which  should  be  apphed 
in  thin  layers,  the  surface  of  the  road  being  first  loosened 
by  scoring  it  with,  the  pick. 

Tools. — Shovels,   picks,    rammers,    measuring   rods,    levels,  Tods. 
&c. ;    also,  to  break  up  the  metalling,  stone  hammers  3  lbs. 


126  CHAPTER   XXII. — ROADS — BONING   AND    LEVELLING. 

in  weight,  with  handles  2J  feet  long,  so  as  to  work  standing, 
or  of  H  lbs.  weight,  with  handles  18  inches  to  2  feet  long,  to 
work  sitting. 

Boning  and  Levelling. 

Levelling  by  means  of  Boning  Rods. 

Definition.  314.  It  is  often  necessary  in  the  field  to  make  a  rough  section 
of  a  piece  of  ground  or  parapet,  so  as  to  calculate  the  amount 
of  work  to  be  carried  out,  or  to  lay  out  short  lengths  of  ground 
at  a  given  slope,  as  in  road-making,  drainage,  &c.  For  such 
purposes  levelling  by  means  of  boning  rods  may  be  employed. 
Tools.  315.  The  tools  required  for  boning  are  a  field  level  (or  a 

mason's  level,  or  a  spirit  level  with  a  straightedge),  a  mallet, 
pickets,  measuring  tape,  a  set  of  three  boning  rods,  and  where 
great  differences  of  level  are  met  with,  a  long  rod  graduated  to 
read  feet  and  inches. 
Mason's  The  mason's  level  is  sho\\Ti  in  Fig.  1,  PI.  83,  and  can  be  made 

level.  by  any  ordinary  carpenter,  where  a  field  level  is  not  available. 

Boninc  Boning  rods  are  usually  made  of  deal,  3  inches   wide    and 

rods.  I  inch  thick,  and  consist  each  of  a  long  arm,  with  a  head 

dovetailed  on  at  right  angles  to  it  (Fig.  2,  PL  83).  Care  must 
be  taken  that  all  of  a  set  are  of  exactly  the  same  length. 

316.  To  make  a  section  with  such  rods,  it  is  usual  to  select  the 
highest  point  of  the  section  and  there  drive  in  a  picket  flush  with 
the  ground,  driving  in  a  second  picket  on  the  line  of  the  section 
with  its  top  carefully  levelled  to  the  top  of  the  first  picket  (by 
means  of  the  field,  mason's,  or  spirit  level),  and  as  far  away 
from  the  first  picket  as  the  length  of  the  level  or  straightedge 
\\dll  allow  {see  A,  B,  Fig.  3,  PL  83).  It  is  evident  then  by  look- 
ing over  the  tops  of  the  two  pickets  (A,  B),  the  depth  below 
the  line  of  sight  of  any  other  points  (C,  D),  on  the  section  could 
be  determined  by  holding  up  a  measuring  rod  at  those  points, 
and  the  horizontal  distance  apart  of  the  various  points  being 
also  measured,  a  rough  section  could  be  made.  To  avoid  the 
obvious  difficulty  of  getting  one's  eye  down  to  the  top  of  the 
first  two  pickets  (A,  B),  boning  rods  are  set  up  on  them,  and 
a  third  boning  rod  (or  the  long  rod)  is  set  up  at  the  different 


:Plcxjtie<   (S3 


BONING  &  LEVELLING 


-Z^.^. 


^    s 


JFigr. 


-e   — -i^ ;'  TO    — i 


i.l 


'^MWa 


-t 


jj ?jj 


^^^/^ 


•ir 


,Sj)irvbjLeyel 


-^^MT 


:Fi^.5. 


"%W; 


H^kt,  ang^fes  to  t^.ev^pTy)pej^  positiok 


5186  l. OS. 


Wcl!er&  Graham.  L<:'?  Litho.  London. 

Oppos  tte  pa^e  J2G. 


M4xte^84. 


Field     Level 


Fi^.l. 


^-ji--i^;mr--iimi. 


•cfciCd*^ 


Jz^.Z. 


<-e9Si.9.as. 


Pl^e-SS. 


Field  Level  fcont^) 


/CS     tb  CL/  ^oot>. 


Fi^.4^. 


'^      J^e^^eZy  foZd^d^iap 


-%-^ 


JTasteirt^m^ 


We'erSGrdhani.  w'"  Lifho  London 


TcfolUnv  plyjct^  94. 


■m 


/ 


*9Q€  if-ot. 


Plate  SG 


tl 


Field     Level 


IbfoUawplxiteSS 


r 


CHAPTER   XXII. — ROADS — BONING    AND   LEVELLING.       127 

points  (C,  D,  E)  whose  level  is  required  to  be  known.  The 
boning  rods  being  all  of  the  same  length,  give  by  their  tops 
a  horizontal  line  parallel  to  the  first  line  of  sight,  but  3  feet 
(or  thereabouts)  above  It.  In  the  same  way  a  given  slope 
(say  y^^)  can  be  set  out  (i'ig.  4)  by  arranging  the  tops  of  the 
first  two  pickets  at  the  required  slope  (level  A  and  B,  10  feet 
apart,  and  then  cut  1  foot  off  B),  setting  up  two  boning  rods 
on  them,  and  by  means  of  the  third  boning  rod  driving  in 
pickets  to  show  the  top  of  the  slope  at  any  required  points, 
N,  0,  P.  Again,  a  continuous  slope  between  any  two  points 
can  be  laid  out  with  pickets,  as  in  Fig.  5,  by  putting  the  firsfc 
boning  rod  at  F,  the  second  at  G,  and  with  the  third  rod  setting 
up  the  intermediate  pickets. 

317.  In  taking  a  section  it  is  usual  to  enter  the  levels,  &c.,  Taking 
in  a  book  {see  page  122).  section. 


Field  Level. 
318.  The  field  level  is  shown  in  Plates  84,  85,  and  86. 

It  can  be  used  when  closed — 

(1)  As  an  ordinary  spirit  level    for  boning,  levelling,  &c., 

the   spirit  level   being   on  the  edge  of  the  limb  C. 
(Fig.  1,  PI.  84.) 

When  open — 

(2)  As  a  square  for  setting  ofE  right  angles.     (Fig.  1.) 

(3)  As  a  protractor  for  setting  off  angles.     (Fig.  2.) 

(4)  For  setting  off   slopes  of  all  grades,  and  as  a  mason's 

level  with  plumb  bob.     (Fig.  1.) 

In  all  cases  place  the  limb  A  against  the  slope  to  be 
measured. 

The  dotted  Unes  in  Fig.  1  show  how  the  instrument  is 
closed. 

N.B. — One  edge  of  the  level  is  graduated  in  feet  and  inches. 


128 


CHAPTER  XXIII. — RAILWAYS   AND   TELEGRAPHS. 


CHAPTER  XXIII.— RAILWAYS  AND  TELEGRAPHS. 


Railways. 


Forma- 
tion. 


Forma- 
tion level. 


Width  of 
railway. 

Gauge. 


319.  The  duties  likely  to  be  required  of  troops  in  the  field 
with  re.^-ard  to  railways  (apart  from  large  railway  schemes, 
for  which  special  arrangements  would  be  necessary)  may  be 
considered  as  either  temporar}^  repairs,  or  the  laying  of  short 
lengths  of  line  to  join  up  breaks,  the  construction  of  addi- 
tional works  such  as  platforms,  &c.,  to  adapt  the  line  for 
military  use,  or  the  demolition  of  an  existing  line. 

320.  The  formation  includes  the  whole  of  the  earthwork 
necessary  to  complete  the  line  to  "formation  level"  and 
secure  the  required  width  of  way  together  with  "side"  and 
"  catchwater  "  drains,  and  any  "  retaining  walls"  or  protective 
works  to  secure  the  bank  against  floods.  Tuimels  are  included 
under  the  head  "  Formation." 

321.  Formation  level  means  the  level  of  the  completed  surface 
before  the  ballast  is  put  on.  On  rapidly  constructed  military 
lines,  where  ballast  is  possibly  not  available,  the  formation 
level  would  be  the  depth  of  the  rail  and  sleeper  below  the 
rail  level.  The  formation  level  is  not  absolutely  horizontal 
transversely,  as  it  should  slope  slightly  downwards  from  the 
centre  line  towards  the  sides  of  the  bank  or  cutting  for 
purposes  of  drainage. 

322.  The  width  of  the  railroad  depends  on  the  gauge,  the 
width  of  the  rails,  the  clear  space  outside  the  rails  and  the 
space  necessary  for  drainage. 

'  323.  The  gauge  is  the  shortest  distance  between  the  inside 
edges  of  the  upper  surfaces  of  the  rails,  and  is  |  to  1  inch 
greater  than  the  distance  between  the  flanges  of  a  pair 
of  wheels. 

In  Great  Britain,  and  most  of  the  European  countries,  the 
ordinary  gauge  is  4  feet  8 J  inches ;  in  Ireland,  it  is  5  feet 
3  inches ;  in  Russia,  5  feet ;  in  British  India,  5  feet  6  inches 
(metre,  3  feet  3|  inches)  and  2  feet  6  inches. 

For  a  4-feet  8j-inch  gauge,  single  hne,  the  minimum  width 
of  banks  and  of  cuttings  at  formation  level  should  not  be  less 
than  12   feet   and    16   feet   respectively.     These   dimensions 


CHAPTER   XXIII. — RAILWAYS   AND   TELEGRAPHS.  129 

might  be  taken  for  gauges  of  3  feet  6  inches,  or  metre  gauge 
(3  feet  3|  inches).  For  a  2-feet  6-inch  gauge  these  miuimuni 
dimensions  might  be  reduced  by  2  feet.  For  every  additional 
line  of  rail  it  is  necessary  to  add  the  gauge  plus  two  rail- 
heads, plus  a  way  between  the  tracks  such  that  two  vehicles 
can  clear  each  other  witli  their  doors  open  and  a  little  to 
spare — say  11  feet  for  the  4-feet  8j-inch  gauge. 

324.  General  type  of  first-class  English  railwa}': —  Perma- 
i?«/Z5.— Steel  double- headed,  weight  80  to  90  lbs.  per '^^^^  way. 

yard. 

Sleepers. — Balric  fir,  9  feet  by  10  inches  by  5  inches 
(PI.  87,  Fig.  2),  weight  140  lbs. ;  laid  3  feet  apart 
centre  to  centre,  2  feet  2  inches  at  rail  joints. 

Chairs, — Cast-iron  ;  width  6  inches  or  8  inches  ;  weight 
45  lbs.  each  ;  secured  by  two  steel  spikes  and  two 
screws.     (Fig\  4.) 

Keys, — Compressed  oak,  6  inches  long.     (Fig.  4.) 

Fishplates. — Steel ;  weigJit  54  lbs.  per  pair ;  secured 
by  four  steel  bolts  |  inch  diameter.     (Fig.  7.) 

Ballast. — Screened  cinders,  broken  granite  or  slag, 
size  not  exceeding  1^  inches  cube,  nor  more  than 
10  per  cent,  to  pass  -^-inch  mesh.  Rounded  gravel, 
if  used,  to  be  mixed  with  sand  or  broken  stone  to 
prevent  it  from  working  out  from  under  sleepers. 

In  most  foreign  countries,  however,  the  flatjooted  or 
Vignoles  rail  is  used.  This  does  not  need  chairs,  and  is 
spiked  direct  to  the  sleepers,  sometimes  with  a  bearing-plate 
between  if  the  timber  is  of  a  soft  description. 

325.  Two  of  the  many  different  kinds  of  rails  in  use  are  shown  EaiK 
on  Plate  87,  Figs.  5  and  6,  the  double-headed  and  the  flat- 
bottomed   rails  are  usually  made  in  lengths  of   from  15  to 

30  feet,  or  even  60  feet,  and  weigh  up  to  110  lbs.  per  yard  for 
permanent  lines  intended  for  heavy  traffic. 

326.  The  rails  are  connected  together  by  two  fishplates  of  Rail 
wrought  iron  or  steel,  each  with  four  bolts  with  nuts  and  joints. 
washers.     The  sleepers  on  each  side  of  the  joint  are  brought 
closer  together  so  as  to  reduce  the  bearing  to  about  2  feet. 

(5289)  I 


130 


CHAPTER   XXIII. — RAILWAYS   AND  TELEGRAPHS. 


Sleepers. 


Ch  lies. 


Connec- 
tion 

between 
chairs  and 
sleepers. 


Connec- 
tion of 
rails  with 
chairs. 


Connec- 
tion 

between 
rails  and 
sleepers. 

Ballast 


327.  Sleepers  are  bearers,  whether  of  wood  or  of  steel,  used 
to  distribute  the  weig-ht  on  the  rails  over  the  ballast  or 
roadway,  aud  in  the  case  of  cross-sleepers  as  a  connection 
between  the  two  rails  to  preserve  the  g"auge. 

Each  mile  of  railway  requires  1,850  to  2,000  sleepers. 

328.  Chairs  are  used  to  connect  the  rails  to  the  sleepers, 
when  necessary  owing-  to  the  sectional  form  of  the  rail, 
and  to  distribute  the  weig-ht  over  a  greater  bearing  area 
on  the  sleeper  than  is  obtained  by  the  rail  resting  on  it. 

329.  Chairs  are  fastened  down  to  sleepers  by  spikes  and 
treuails. 

Trenails  are  wooden  spikes,  so  compressed  by  machinery 
as  to  expel  all  moisture  from  them.  When  they  have  beea 
driven  into  the  sleepers  their  tendency  is  to  absorb  moisture 
and  swell,  and  so  to  grip  the  sleeper  more  tightly.  They 
must  not  be  employed  alone,  but  where  they  are  used  there 
should  be  at  least  one  iron  fastening  to  each  chair,  for, 
although  the  trenail  is  a  firm  means  of  holding  down  the 
chair  to  the  sleeper,  it  is  liable  to  rupture  from  a  shearing 
stress.  For  this  reason,  oak  trenails  with  iron  spikes  driven 
into  them  (PI.  87,  Fig.  3)  are  often  used. 

In  the  case  of  flat-footed  rails  with  good  bearing  area  aud 
exposed  to  moderate  axle  loads,  the  rails  may  be  spiked  direct 
to  the  sleepers  without  chairs  or  bearing -plates. 

330.  The  double-headed  ;md  also  the  bull-headed  rail  is 
held  in  its  chair  by  a  key  or  small  block  of  wood,  compressed 
b}'  machinery  (Fig,  4).  This  key  is  slightly  wedge-shaped, 
and  is  driven  firmly  into  the  gap  in  the  chair  at  the  side 
of  the  rail.     Rails  may  be  ke3'ed  on  the  outside  or  inside. 

331.  Flat-footed  rails  are  generally  connected  directly  with 
the  sleepers  by  dog-spikes,  or  with  the  interveutiou  of 
hearivg-plates. 

332.  Ballast  is  broken  scone  or  other  suitable  material 
placed  on  the  formation  level,  on  which  the  sleepers  rest, 
and  with  which  they  are  "  packed  "  to  the  proper  level 
or  inclination. 

The  objects  of  ballast  are: — 

i.  To   distribute  the  pressure  imparted  to  it  by  the 
sleepers  over  a  larger  area. 


PZoJUSl 


RAILWAYS 


>Y7.  Sr—Z^.  O^. 


FzQ.3 





Flge. 


13^'      - 


ried^ 


J^.7 


^S^ 


StSS.9M»Sm 


Weller I. Graham.  U?'  Utfco.  London. 
Opposite  pcLff»  /^^( 


P7<jcte6S. 


RAILWAYS 


Fi^    1 


Points    of    ^witches 


nnnnnnn  uuu 


a 


Fi^.Z 


Cross     over     Road 


Fi^.3. 


Crossing 


y/vn^ 


.^^^^^^L 


9lti6  S.  PS 


WtUer  &  Graham.  L'f  Umo.London 


CHAPTER    XXIII. — RAILWAYS    AND    TELEGRAPHS.  131 

ii.  To  keep  the  sleepers  dry,  by  affording  a  permeable 
mass  for  rainwater  to  pass  through,  and  thus 
prevent  their  decay. 

iii.  To  afford  faciUties  for  packing  under  the  sleepers 
when  they  have  sunk. 

The  ballast  is  usually  laid  to  a  thickness  of  about  1  foot, 
or  18  inches  in  very  wet  places ;  the  permanent  way  is  then 
laid  on  it,  and  its  thickness  is  afterwards  increased  to  tlie 
height  of  the  bottom  of  the  rail.  The  two  layers  are  called 
the  bottom  ballast  and  the  top  ballast  or  boxing. 

In  field  railways  the  bottom  ballast  may  be  required  for 
drainage,  but  the  top  ballast  could  be  omitted.  As  a  temporary 
measure  ballast  could  be  dispensed  with  altogether. 

333.  Any  railway  tools  or  materials  found  along  the  line  Eailway 
must  be  handed  over  to  the  officers  in  charge  of  repair,  and  tools  and 
not  on  any  account  appropriated  by  troops.  materials. 

Railway  Repair  and  Reconstruction. 

335.  The  main  principles  on  which  the  work  of  repair  and  General 
reconstruction  is  carried  out  are : —  principles 

(1)  To   make  the  speediest  temporary  repairs   possible,  of^^-gii^^"^ 

{e.g.,  deviations  and  low-level  bridges)  in  order  to  get  ways. " 
a  line  of  some  sort  through  with  the  least  possible 
delay. 

(2)  Simultaneously  to  commence  high-level  trestle  bridges 

on  concrete  foundations  where  required  in  order  to  do 
away  with  the  disadvantage  of  lojig  deviations  with 
sleep  gradients  and  sharp  curves. 

(3)  To  commence,  without  any  delay,  all  permanent  repairs, 

viz.,  rebuilding  the  masonry,  repairing  the  girders, 
or  replacing  tliom  with  new  ones  in  order  that  the 
line  should  be  as  soon  as   possible   restored  to  its 
former  position  and  entirely  safe  against  floods. 
335.  The  best  system  to  adopt  whereby  to  carry  out  rapid  Construc- 
repairs  is  to  establish  "  Construction  Trains."     The  recoustruc-  ^^^^} 
tion  staff  hve  in  these  trains,  which  gradually  advance  along  ^^'^^°^' 
the  line  as  it  is  being  repaired,  conveying  also  the  necessary 
material. 

(5289)  I  2 


132 


CHAPTER    XXIII. — RAILWAYS   AND   TELEGRAPHS. 


Material 
depots. 

Wagon 
transport 
at  rail- 
head. 


Labour.  336.  P^or  railway  work  of  any  magnitude  Jarg-e  gangs  of 

unskilled  labour  are  required,  and  this  is  especially  true  of 
temporary  re[)airs  to  be  executed  rapidly. 

The  proportion  of  unskilled  to  skilled  labour -on  temporary 
repairs  is  as  7  to  1 ;  on  semi-permanent  and  permanent 
repairs  as  3  to  1. 

337.  An  advance  depot  for  railway  material  and  stores  must 
invariably  be  formed  at  some  place  within  50  miles  of  tha 
starting  pr jnt  for  repairs,  and  that  before  work  begins. 

338.  [Sufficient  wagon  transport  to  carry  60  tons  should,  it 
possible,  be  available  at  railhead  to  allow  an  advanced  party  to 
move  on,  repairing  minor  breaks.     Much  time  is  thus  saved. 

Night  339.  Provided  that  the  arrangements  for  lighting  works  at 

work.  night  are  good,  an  equal  amount  of  work  can  be  done  by  day 

and  night  shifts,  and  when  repairs  are  being  pressed,  day  and 
night  shifts  are  essential.  The  only  class  of  work  which 
cannot  well  be  carried  on  by  night  is  platelaying,  which 
requires  plenty  of  light  along  the  track. 

Flares,  oil,  or  acetylene,  are  easily  manipulated  and  give 
good  light  for  working  parties. 
Tern-  350.  Up  to    18  feet  height.     Crib  piers  of  sleepers  make 

porary        satisfactory  bridges,  which  are  rapidly  built,  as  a  large  number 
bridges.      qJ  jj^^jj  Q^n  be  employed  to  handle  materials. 

Between  18  and  25  feet,  the  speed  at  which  such  bridges  can 
be  built  decreases  rapidly,  not  only  on  account  of  the  additional 
height,  but  because  more  material  is  used. 
Water  341.  Damages  to  water  supply  by  the  eneniy  is  apt  to  cause 

fc^pply-  much  difficulty.  Troops  must  not  use  railway  water  supplies 
without  special  authority.  A  steam  pump  and  boiler  cariied. 
on  a  truck  is  a  useful  adjunct.  Lift  and  force  pumps  worked  by 
manual  power,  each  with  several  lengths  of  hose,  should  also- 
be  carried.  Engines  can  then  make  shift  with  temporary 
watering  ariangements. 
Tern-  3^2.  To    provide    for    entraining    or   detraining    animals,, 

porary        vehicles  and  sruns,  extra  siding  and  platform  accommodation 
^  will  become  necessary  at  various  points. 

The  sidings  would  be  in  extension  of  existing  sidings,  or 
branch  f  i  om  the  main  line,  according  to  circumstances. 

The  p/at/orms  would,  as  a  rule,  be  most  conveniently  placed 
alongside  a  siding  of  sufficient  length  to  allow  of  the  train 


CHAPTER    XXIir. — RAILWAYS   AND   TELEGRAPHS.  133 

being  shifted  so  as  to  bring-  different  vehicles  alongside  in 
succession. 

Almost  any  available  material  may  be  used,  but  perhaps  the 
most  rapid  method  of  construction  is  to  make  a  crib  work  of 
-sleepers  (or  similar  baulks)  and  rails,  or  of  sleepers  only, 
decked  with  sleepers,  or  planking  of  sufficient  thickness  to 
carry  the  anticipated  loads. 

The  edge  of  the  platform  must  be  just  sufficiently  far  from 
the  rails  to  allow  trucks  and  carriages  to  pass,  and  the  top 
should  be  level  with  the  truck  floor.  No  over-hang  need  be 
^iven.  The  decking  should  usually  be  held  down  by  ribands 
along  the  edges. 

One  or  more  inclined  ramps  will  be  needed  at  the  back  or 
ends,  according  to  length. 

Telegraphs. 
(The  term  Telegraphs  includes  also  Telephones.) 

343.  Special  troops  are  usually  employed  in  the  construction  Line, 
of  telegraph  lines,  but  it  is  as  well  that  all  should  have  a  shght 
knowledge  of  the  principles  of  construction,  if  only  with  a  view 

to  producing  the  greatest  possible  damage  to  the  lines  when 
demohshing  them. 

344.  For  the  transmission  of  messages  by  electric  telegraph  it 
is  necessary  to  have  a  continuous  insulated  conductor  connecting 
the  various  stations  in  communication. 

345.  By  a  conductor  is  here  meant  a  metallic  substance  for  Con- 
conve\ang  the   current.     For   this   purpose    galvanised   iron,  ductor. 
copper,  or  bronze  wire  is  generally  used,  either  as  a  single  wire 

or  a  smaller  number  of  wires  twisted  into  a  strand,  as  in  a  rope. 

346.  By  "continuous"  is  meant  that  the  conductor  must  Con- 
not  have  the  smallest  break  in  its  metalhc  continuiy.     The  tiauous. 
wire  is  necessarily  suppHed  in  coils  of  convenient  weight,  as  it 
would  be  too  heavy  to  manipulate  if  in  one  length.     In  the 
joints  however,  metalhc  continuity  is  ensured  by  soldering. 

347.  By  "  insulated  "  is  meant  that  the  bare    conductor  Insulated, 
must  not  be  allowed  to  touch  the  earth,  or  any  neighbouring 

^vires,  or  any  substance  of  a  conducting  nature  which  may  be  in 


134  CHAPTER    XXIII. — RAILWAYS    AND   TELEGRAPHS. 

connection  with  the  earth  or  other  wires.  This  is  effected 
usually  either  by  "  aerial  Hues  "  or  by  "  cables." 

Aerial  348.  An  aerial  hne  consists  of  a  wire  suspended  on  insulators 

of  porcelain  or  glass,  supported  on  poles  placed  at  about 
60-yard  or  80-yard  intervals.  The  poles  should  be  of  such 
height  as  will  keep  the  wire  clear  of  obstacles  and  traffic, 
and  safe  from  malicious  damage.  No  wire  should  be  less  than 
12  feet  from  the  ground. 

Insulators.  349.  The  insulators  are  shaped  like  inverted  cups  having  one 
or  more  grooves  round  them.  Porcelain  insulators  are  usually 
fixed  to  the  pole  or  arm  by  means  of  iron  bolts,  the  cups  being 
provided  with  an  internal  screw  thread  to  fit  the  top  of  the 
bolt  (PI.  89,  Fig.  2). 

Wiring.  350.  In  erecting  the  line  the  wire  is   first   stretched  con- 

veniently tight  over  several  poles.  It  is  then  placed  in  one  of 
the  grooves  of  the  insulators  and  "  bound  in  "  securely  with 
a  piece  of  smaller  wire  or  tape  binder ;  thus  at  ordinary 
insulators  there  is  no  break  in  the  continuity  of  the  wire. 

Wires  for  telegraph  circuits  are  invariably  run  straight^ 
that  is  to  say,  their  insulators  occupy  similar  positions  on  each 
pole.  On  the  other  hand,  important  telephone  circuits  require 
two  wires,  each  of  which  revolves  or  twists  round  the  other, 
though  of  course  they  are  kept  well  apart. 

Poles.  351.  The  poles  may  be  of  iron  or  wood,  usuallv  the  latter. 

They  should  be  buried  in  the  ground  to  one-fifth  their  length, 
and  their  tops  protected  by  a  piece  of  galvanised  sheet  iron 
termed  a  "  pole  roof." 

Arms.  352.  ^Vhere  more  than  one  wire  is  carried  on  the  same  line  of 

poles,  the  ^vires  are  attached  to  insulators  fixed  on  wooden  or 
iron  arms,  let  into  the  pole,  and  at  right  angles  to  it  (PL  89, 
Fig.  1).  The  length  of  the  arm  depends  on  the  number  of 
wires  to  be  carried.  When  more  than  one  arm  is  required  they 
are  usually  placed  at  vertical  intervals  of  1  foot. 

Earth  353.  Wooden  poles,  except  m  dry  rocky  ground,  should  be 

wires.  provided  with  earth  wires,  consisting  of  a  piece  of  iron  wire 
running  down  the  pole,  under  the  head  of  each  arm-bolt  to  the 
butt,  where  it  is  stapled  in  the  f  o^m  of  a  small  spiral ;  this 
ensures  the  earth  ^vire  being  well  under  ground.  Each  of  the 
arms  is  wired,  and  a  turn  of  the  wire  is  taken  round  the  arm 


JP^ae^^  89. 


TELEGRAPHS 


"ar^thyxnj^e^ 


r1. 


^-  3. 


J'oZe/  ^r-ctchets. 


s/eS.e.os. 


We(fer&Gr3h»ni.L«!    Litito. London. 
To  fcLce^  pa^0  134 


CHAPTER    XXIII. — RAILWAYS    AND    TELEGRAPHS.  135 

between  each  pair  of  insulators.  This  wire  is  also  brought 
under  the  nut  of  the  bolt  which  secures  the  arm  to  the  pole. 

Earth  wires  serve  a  dual  purpose  ;  they  protect  ths  poles 
against  lightning,  and  prevent  the  current  from  a  faulty  wire 
leaking  to  other  circuits,  the  current  being  conveyed  by  the 
earth  wire  direct  to  earth. 

354.  "\Miere,  from  the  pull  of  the  wires,  wi  :d  pressure,  and  stavs  and 
other  causes,  the  poles  are  likely  to  be  forced  out  of  the  vertical,  stmts, 
they  should  be  stayed.     Sta3^s  are  formed  of  stranded  iron 

wire  firmly  anchored  in  the  ground  and  attached  to  the  pole 
about  2  feet  from  the  top.  When  the  pole  carries  a  great 
number  of  wires  a  second  stay  may  be  required,  in  which  case 
it  is  added  below  the  first. 

In  situations  where  it  may  not  be  convenient  to  fix  a  stay, 
a  strut  can  be  erected  in  a  similar  position,  but  on  the  other 
side  of  the  pole.  Struts  are  usually  about  two -thirds  the 
diameter  of  the  poles  they  support. 

355.  Insulators    are    sometimes    fixed    on    anglt    hrackets  Brackets, 
attached    to    chimneys,    or    ivatt    brackets    driven    into    the 
masonry.       Where  arms  are   not  used,  pjle  brackets  (Fig.  3) 

mav  be  employed  to  S'jpport  the  insulators. 
Brackets  are  not  usually  earth  wired. 

356.  The  insulation  of  a  conductor  may  also  be  effected  by  Cables, 
surrounding  it  throughout  its  length  with  indiarubber,  gutta- 
percha,    or    other    non-conducting    substance.     When    this 
insulating  material  is  protected  from  injury  by  a  coatincr  of 
plaited  hemp,  tape,  or  wire,  it  forms  what  is  known  as  a  cable. 

A  cable  may  contain  one  or  more  insulated  conductors. 
Cables  are  employed  for  : — 
(a)  Under  water  lines, 
(6)  Under  ground  line 3. 
(c)  Lines  on  the  surface  of  the  ground. 

357.  When  a  cable  is  to  be  laid  in  the  water  it  should  be  Cnder 
strongly  protected  with  a  sheathing   of  steel  wires,  otherwise  ^"'^<^"- 
the  conductor  is  hable  to   be    damaged   by  the   anchors    of 
vessels,  or  by  the  motion  of  the  water. 

358.  A  similar  kind  of    cable  may  be  employed  for  under  Under 
ground  lines,  but  it  is  generally  more  economical  to  lay  a  line  gJ''3»^°<^- 
of  iron  pipes  into  which  the  unprotected  insulated  conductors 


136  CHAPTER   XXIII. — EAILWAYS    AND   TELEGRAPHS. 

can  be  drawn  in  convenient  lengths.  Joint  boxes  should  be  pro- 
vided in  the  line  of  pipes  at  about  100  yards  intervals  to  enable 
the  lengths  of  vrires  to  be  connected.  After  the  joints  are 
made  they  are  covered  over  with  indiarubber  tape  or  gutta- 
percha to  insulate  them.  The  position  of  these  imder  ground 
boxes  are  marked  so  as  to  render  them  accessible  when  desired 
for  testing  the  wires  or  other  purposes. 
On  the  359.  For  very  rapidly  establishing  telegraphic  communica- 

surface  tion  in  the  field,  a  light  single  core  cable  u  often  employed.  This 
*^^^^^,  consists  of  a  stranded  steel  conductor,  moderately  insulated 
^  '  with  indiarubber,  and  covered  with  plaited  hemp ;  thus 
considerable  tensile  strength  is  obtained  with  a  minimum 
weight.  The  cable  is  laid  out  on  the  surface  of  the  ground 
temporarily ;  if  the  communication  is  required  for  any  length 
of  time  an  aerial  line  is  constructed^  and  then  the  cable  i? 
removed. 


Sectiu)),    I 


:es 


136a 


Date,  30th  May,   1904. 


No 

Of 

Men. 

a 

H 

a 

«• 

50 

4 

95 

2 

25 

2 

RA 

o 

REMARKS. 

Where|i(i  contain  sufUcienily  full  and  clear  information  for  the  Officer,  N.-C,  Officer  or  othe) 
on  toho  has  to  execute  the  work,  to  be  able  to  carry  on  without  hesitation. 


Eedoubt  ivT^nches  and  redoubt. 

of  Dunn  S 
Trencli  I,  1{ 

chalk  pit  rmvfFse. 

HURST  CllU 

Trench  III,  M^8\ 
orchard,  ^fe^ 
on  pit,  lefP^^^^ 


Section  blockhouse, 
uprights  bound  tofcether 
with  wire.  Loop-holes 
;i  It.  G  in.  interval, 
splayed  inwards. 


Blockhouse. 


^ 


JX'ur  all.  high  I  ^^ 
by   2  ft.,   faced  | 
by  bank.  I 

,,.  , ,  Redoubt. 


1st  relief. 

-12  1st  (lay, 
26  Int'antiy 
mployeJ. 


I 


';//"»,    nUNN    STKKI 


DETAIL     OF     WORKING      PARTIES. 


Datk,  SOlh   Mat/,    1004, 


CIcartDff  and 
Trenclilll'  ... 
Bredhobst  Hdr 


dlRging  trench  (iBt  relief) 
clcarinR  hedges  in  Iron 


anddidgingiodsin 

bloHinK  up  lliree  isi 
demolitiom(encl.  win 


^1 


=■  ■SI      .-isis  . 


BEMAEKS. 


1  for  all  trenches  and  redoubt.  Kect  i 


a'; 


TraverserB  revelttd 


:^     ft 

■.al.»ith    I  E      I 

irevelttd        ott,--  9  —  ^^-^j- 


-  -7.    V  V    ' 


Section  CommuniLalion  Trench. 


I 

I  fa'nlfy   om-  f 

1  ployed.  ■ 


J 


137 


GLOSSARY    OF    TERMS. 


Ihatis. — An  obstacle   formed   of  trees   or  branches   of  trees. 

picketed  to  the  ground,   with  their  points  towards  the 

enemy. 
Banquette. — A  bank  upon  which  men  stand  to   fire   over  a 

parapet. 
Berm. — A  small  space  left  between  the  parapet  and  excavations 

of  a  work. 
Bivouac. — An  encampment  without  tents  or  huts. 
Boinh-proof. — A  shelter,  proof  against  the  penetration  of  shells.* 
Calibre. — The  diameter  of  the  bore  of  a  gun. 
Cajoonier. — A  small  chamber  formed  in  the  ditch  of  a  work 

projecting  from  the  escarp  to  give  fire  down  the  ditch. 
Casemate. — A  shell-proof  chamber  constructed  for  the  accom- 
modation of  the  garrison  of  a  work  or  position. 
Chess. — A  plank  forming  a  portion  of  the  flooring  of  a  bridge. 
Command. — The  vertical  height  of  the  crest  of   a  work  above 

the  natural  surface  of  the  ground. 
Counterscarp. — The  slope  of  the  ditch  of  a  work  furthest  from 

the  parapet. 
Crest. — The  intersection   of  the    interior    and   superior  slopes 

of  a  parapet. 
Crib-pier. — A  support  for  a  bridge  formed  of  layers  of  baulks 

of  wood  laid  alternately  at  right  angles  to  each  other. 
Dead  ground. — Ground    which    cannot    be    covered    by    the 

defenders'  fire. 
Defilade. — The  adjustment  of  the  levels  of  the  crest  and  interior 

portions  of  a  work  with  a  view  to  obtain  cover  for  the 

defenders  or  to  screen  them  from  view. 
Derrick. — A  single  spar  held  up  by  four  guys,  used  for  lifting 

or  moving  weights. 
Embrasure. — A  channel  through  the  parapet  of  a  work  through 

which  a  gun  is  fired. 


128  GLOSSARY. 

Enfilade  fire.-  -Fire  which  sweeps  a  line  of  troops  or  defences 

from  a  flank. 
Epaulment. — A  small   parapet  to  give  cover  to   a   gun  and 

detachment  in  action. 
Escarp. — The  slope  of  a  ditch  nearest  the  parapet. 
Exterior  slope. — The    outside    slope  of    a  parapet    extending 

downwaj-ds  from  the  superior  slope. 
Fascine. — A  long  bundle  of  brushwood,  tied  up  tightly,  used 

for  revetting,  &c. 
Fleche. — A  work  consisting  of  two  faces,   forming  a  salient 

angle  towards  the  enemy. 
Fougasse. — A  small  mine  filled  with  stones  w^hich  are  projected 

towards  the  enemy  on  the  mine  being  fired.     " 
Fraise. — A  palisade  fixed  horizontally  in  a  slope. 
Gabion. — An  open  cylinder  of  brushwood,  sheet  iron,  &c.,  used 

for  revetting. 
Glacis. — The  ground  round  a  work  outside  the  ditch.     This  is 

sometimes  made  up  artificially. 
Gorge. — The  face  of  a  work  furthest  from  the  enemy. 
Guy. — A  rope  fastened  to  the  tip  of  a  spar  or  frame,  to  support, 

raise  or  lower  it. 
Gyn. — A  tripod  constructed  vath  three  spars,  used  for  raising 

weights. 
Interior  slope. — The  inside  slope  of  a  parapet  (seen  in  section), 

extending  from  the  crest  to  the  banquette. 
Keep  or  Re'duit. — A  separate  enclosure  within  another  work  to 

enable  the  defenders  to  resist  after  the  outer  line  of  defence 

has  been  carried. 
Lunette. — A  work  consisting  of  four  faces,  the  two  centre  ones 

forming  an  obtuse  salient,  the  two  side  ones  affording  fire 

to  the  flanks. 
Lunette,  hlunted. — A  work  consisting  of  five   faces   (otherwise 

similar  to  a  lunette). 
Machicoulis  gallery. — A  balcony  with  a  musket-proof  parapet 

in  front,  loopholed  in  the  floor,  to  afford  fire  in  a  downward 

direction. 
Parados. — A  traverse  to  give  cover  from  reverse  fire. 
Profile. — The  section  of  a  parapet  at  right  angles  to  the  crest. 
Redan. — A  work  consisting  of  two  faces,  forming  a  sahent  angle 

towards  the  enemy. 


GLOSSARY.  139 

Tledan,  hlmited. — A  work  consisting  of  three  faces,  the  centre 

one  firing  to  the  front,  the  others  to  the  flanks. 
Redoubt. — A    field    work    entirely    enclosed    by    a    defensible 

parapet. 
Relief. — The   length  of   time    that   men   have  to  work   before 

being  relieved. 
Revetment. — Any  method  of  making  earth  stand  at  a  steeper 

slope  than  the  natural  slope. 
Reverse  fire.—¥iie  directed  on  the  backs  of  a  line  of  defenders. 
Riband. — A  baulk  fastened  down  on  each  side  of  a  roadway  to 

keep  the  chesses  in  place. 
Sap. — A  trench  formed  by  constantly  extending  the  end. 
Sheers. — Two  spars  lashed  together  at  the  tip  and  raised  to  rest 

on  their  butts,  which  are  separated.     They  are  used  to  lift 

and  move  weights  in  one  plane. 
Splinter-'proof. — A  shelter,  proof  against  splinters  of  shell. 
Superior  slope. — The  top  of  a  parapet  (seen  in  section). 
Tackle. — Any  system  of  blocks  and  ropes  by  which  power  is 

gained  at  the   expense  of  time   {i.e.,    more   power — less 

speed). 
Tambour. — A  projecting  chamber  or  stockaded  enclosure,  con- 
structed so  as  to  flank  the  walls  of  a  building. 
Terreplein. — The  surface  of  the  ground  inside  a  work. 
Trace. — The  outline  of  a  work  in  plan. 
Traverse. — A  bank  of   earth   erected    to    give    cover   against 

enfilade  fire,  and  to  localise  the  bursts  of  shells. 
Wattle. — Continuous  brushwood  hurdle  work. 


140 


IND 

EX. 

PAGE 

PAGE 

Abatis 

42, 137 

Cables 

135 

Alarms,  automatic 

. .       47 

Camping  arrangements    . . 

68 

Ammunition  recesse 

53           ..             ..37 

Camps,  defence  of . . 

49 

wagon 

s,  cover  for  . .        37 

Canvas,  Willesden 

24 

Anchors 

64 

Capstan 

107 

„        makeshift 

. .        65 

Casks,  buoyancy  of 

105 

Artillery,  cover  for 

. .        37 

„      shnging 

53 

„         field        . 

..7,95 

„      table  of 

105 

„         fire 

9 

Chain  crane 

102 

,107 

„         heavy     . 

8,  66,  96 

„     strength  of  . . 

102 

„         projectilef 

3,    penetration 

Chairs 

130 

of       . 

7 

Charges,  cordite     . . 

82 

Attacks,  night 

. .       49 

„        guncotton 

'79 

119 

Automatic  alarms . 

..       47 

„        powder    . .           81,  9 
„        simultaneous 
Cheddit3 

2,95, 

118 

87 

84 

Balancing  parapet  and  excavation       14 

Choker        

19 

Ballast 

. .      130 

Clearing  the  foregroimd   , . 

25 

Barricades  . . 

43 

Collin's  rule 

105 

Belaying     . . 

54 

Command   . . 

137 

Berkefeld  filter      . 

. .       73 

Communications,  temporary 

51 

Bivouacs     . . 

73, 137 

Co:- due -ors,  telegraph 

133 

Blockhouses 

46 

Cooking 

68 

Blocks  and  tackle . . 

107,  139 

Cordage 

101 

Boat  patrols 

. .        66 

Cordite        

.  .7 

9,82 

Boats 

. .        62 

,,       charges 

82 

119 

„       buoyancy  of 

. .       63 

Corduroy  roads 

52 

Boning  and  leveUin 

g         ..          ..126 

Cover  for  artillery . . 

37 

Booming  out 

. .        65 

„      head . . 

34 

Brackets  for  telegra 

phs    ..          ..      135 

,,      overhead      . . 

35 

Breastworks  of  logs 

28 

„      trenches 

37 

Bridges,  cantilever 

.  .      109 

Crane  chain 

102 

107 

„        demolition 

of      . .             SO,  93 

Crib  work   . . 

Gl 

137 

floating    . 

62 

Cutting  brushwood 

18 

120 

flying 

66 

,,        tools 

13 

,,        frame 

110 

Cuttings 

27 

„        railway,  de 

fence  of        . .       46 

„        sites  of     . 

55 

Bridging  expedients 

J          ..          ..61 

Defence  of  buildings 

,. 

29 

Brushwood . . 

. .     18,  25,  124 

„          localities 

.. 

44 

„           revetme 

nt       ..          ..        23 

„           villages 

48 

Buildings,  defence  ( 

Df         ..           ..29 

Demohtions,  general  rules  for 

. . 

88 

„          demoUtic 

mof  ..          ..26.93 

„            hasty — ^vith     explo- 

Buoyancy of  boats 

63 

sives 

78 

.,          of  casks 

. .     105 

„               „        without 

ex- 

„          of  timbe 

r          ..          ..106 

plosives.. 

96 

INDEX.                                                             141 

PAGE 

PAGE 

Demolitions,  table  of  charges      118^  119 

Formula    for    average    yield    of 

Depots  for  raihvay  material 

.      132 

stream  . .          . .       70 

Derricks 

.      108 

„             buoyancy  of   casks     105 

Detonators . . 

84 

„             cantilever    bridge      104 

Diagonal  lashing    . . 

54 

„             contents  of  round 

Double  lock  bridge 

.      110 

logs        . .          . .     106 

Double-manning  tools 

16 

„             hasty  demoHtions 

Drainage  of  trenches 

.37,40 

118,  119 

Dynamite   . . 

.        82 

„             power  of  tackles  . .     107 

„          charges  . . 

83 

„             rectangular  beams      103 
„             round  spars          . .     103 
>,             strength  of  cordage     101 

Earth,  slope  of       . . 

.       17 

„             suspension   bridges     IIS 

Earthworks 

.       31 

„             velocity  of  stream        56 

Embankments 

.       27 

Fortification,  object  of     . .          . .          5 

Entanglements,  tree 

42 

,,             principles  of           . .         5 

„                wire 

42 

Fougasse 43,138 

Entrances  to  redoubts 

.40,48 

Fcur-legged  trestles          . .          . .       61 

Epaulments 

37, 138 

I'raises         . .          . .          . ,          . .       43 

Execution  of  work 

.        14 

Frame  bridges       no 

Explosives  carried  in  the  field     . 

.13,78 

Fuzes           85,86 

„      substitutes  for        . .          . .       87 

Fascines      . .      19,  23,  51,  120,  1 

25,  138 

Gabions 20,  23,  138 

Faults  in  telegraph  line  . . 

.       99 

„        Jones'       . .          . .          . .       22 

Ferries 

.       66 

Garrison  of  redoubts         . .          . .       39 

Field  geometry 

10 

Gauge  of  railways . .          . .          . .     128 

„     guns  . .          . .    7,  58,  95,  102,  119 

Geometry,  field      . .          . .          . .       10 

„      howitzers 

.8,102 

Glossary  of  terms 137 

„      kitchens 

.       68 

Guncotton  . .         . .         . .         . .       79 

„     level 

.     127 

charges             ..           80,119 

,,      ovens 

.       69 

Guns,  destruction  of         . .           95, 119 

„     redoubts 

.       38 

„      field  . .          . .    7,  58,  95,  102,  119 

Filtration 

.       72 

„      siege . .          . .     8,  58,  95,  102,  119 

Fire,  artillery 

7,8,9 

>,      spring           47 

„    natures  of      . . 

9 

Guys            . .          . .            108,  109,  138 

„    rifle 

.     6,9 

Gyns            109,138 

„    trenches 

.       33 

Fishplates   . . 

.      129 

Hasty  demolitions,  formula  for  118, 119 

Flares          

.       47 

,,                „            with  explosives      78 

Floating  bridges    . . 

.       62 

„                „           without  explo- 

Flying bridges 

.       66 

sives         . .       93 

Fords           

.       67 

Head  cover            . .          . .          . .       34 

Foreground,  clearing  the. . 

25 

Hedges        25,27 

„           illuminati:n  of 

.       47 

Height  of  line  of  fire         . .          . .         6 

Forming  cuts 

.       66 

Houses,  demolition  of       . .          . .       90 

»        up           

65 

Howitzers,  field     ..          ..          ..8,102 

142 

INDEX. 

PAGE 

PAGE 

Hurdles       . .        22,  23,  74,  75,  120.  125 

Penetration  of  artillery  projectiles         7 

Huts            

.  .75,  77 

rife  bullets 

7 

„     demolition  of 

..       90 

Pickets 

20 

Illumination 

..44,47 

Platforms,  temporary 
Poles  telegraph     .. 

.     132 
.      134 

Insulators    . . 

..     134 

Posts,  defence  cf   . . 

44 

Intrenching  tools  . . 

..12,13 

Powder 

81 

Inundations 

44 

„        charges 

31, 118 

Invisibility . . 

..32,39 

hose           

87 

Jones'  gabions 

..        22 

„        mealed 
Power  of  tackles    . . 

.       87 
.     107 

Kettles,  service 

..66,68 

Precautions  with  explcsvcs 

.       87 

Keys 

..      129 

Primers 

79,80 

Knots          

..       52 

Principles  of  fortification 

5 

Profiling      . . 

.        15 

Lashings     . .          . .          . .  5 

4,  108,  110 

Proof  thickness  of  materials 

7 

rack 

..       53 

Protected  look-out 

.       36 

Latrines 

..40.69 

Pumps 

.       72 

Level,  field 

. .     127 

Purifying  water     . .          . .          ,_,       72 

Levelling     .  . 

..      126 

Line  of  fire,  height  of 

6 

Rack  lashing 

.       53 

Localities,  defence  of 

44 

Rafting 

.       66 

Log  breastworks    . . 

28 

Rafts            

64,  66 

Log  huts 

77 

Rails,  destruction  cf         . .            94  119 

Lookout,  protected 

36 

„      types  of 

129 

Loopholes  . .          . .             2Q 

30,  34,  48 

Railwa;/  bridges     . . 

132 

„            „           demoHtioa  ot     , 

93 

Makeshift,  anchors 

65 

Railways 93, 128 

Materials 

17 

„         demolition  of    .  .     93,  96.  119 

„         proof  thickness  of 

7 

„         repair  of 

131 

Mats,  straw 

77 

Randing 

22 

Mechanical  alarms 
Mousing 

..       47 
..       55 

Ranges  of  various  weapons 
Rectifiers    ,. 

8 
81 

Redoubts    . . 

31,38 

Netting,  wire 
Night  attacks 

24 
..        49 

„         high  command  . . 
„         low  command     . . 

39 
39 

Object  of  fortification 

5 

Rehef           

139 

Obstacles 

..41,49 

Revetments 

23 

„          passage  of 

..        44 

Rifle  fire 

6,9 

Outposts,  cover  for 

..        49 

„     rests  fixed     . . 

47 

Ovens,  field 

..        69 

Roads 

123 

Overhead  cover     . . 

..        35 

„       corduroy     . . 

52 

„       gradients  of 

123 

Pairing 

..       21 

„       lajdng  out 

123 

Palisades     . . 

43 

„       metalled      . . 

124 

Panels,  straw 

77 

>.       repair  of     . , 

15^5 

Parties,  working    . . 

14 

„       temporary 

51 

rNDEX. 


143' 


PAGE 

lAOE 

Sandbags    . . 

.     28,  35,  120 

Telegraphs,  destruction  of 

. .  98,  119 

Sangars 

40 

Telephones . . 

..     133 

Savage  warfare 

..        46 

Temporary  communications 

51 

Screens        

..        30 

Terms,  glossary  of 

..     137 

Seizing 

55 

Thatching 

..       76 

Service  kettles 

..66,68 

Thickness,  proof  of  materials 

7 

Sewing 

..        21 

Timber,  buoyancy 

..     106 

Siieers         

108,  139 

„        destruction  of     . . 

..       91 

Simultaneous  charges 

..       87 

„        felling 

..       18 

Single-lock  bridge . . 

..      110 

„        revetment 

24 

Sinking  wells 

..       71 

„        weight  of 

..     106 

Siting  of  redoubts. . 

39 

Tools,  cutting 

13,  120 

„         trenches 

31 

„      double-manning     . . 

..       16 

Sleepers 

. .      130 

„      intrenching.. 

. .  12,  13 

Slewing 

..       22 

„      use  of 

..        12 

Slinging;  ca«ks 

..        53 

Trace  of  redoubt   . . 

38 

Slopes,  description  of 

10 

Traverses    . . 

..36,40 

Sods 

17,  24,  120 

Tree  entanglements 

..       42 

Spars           . .           59,  103, 

107,  108,  HI 

Trenails 

..      130 

Spifclocking . .          

..      123 

Trenches     . . 

..        31 

Sphnter  proofs 

36,  40,  139 

„         communication 

..        37 

Springs 

..71,72 

„         cover 

..        37 

Stations,  railway,  defence 

cf       . .       46 

„         drainage  of 

..37,40 

Stays  and  struts    . . 

..      135 

jj         nre 

33 

Stockades    . . 

. .  29,  92 

„         siting 

31 

Stones,  parapets  of 

..       17 

Trestle  bridges 

..       59 

Straw  panels 

..       77 

„       fourlegged . . 

..       61 

;,      mats 

77 

„       tripod 

..       60 

Stream,  average  yield  of  . 

..       70 

Tunnels,  demolition  of     . . 

95 

„       measurement  of  b 

•eadth         H 

„       velocity    . . 

..        56 

Use  of  spars 

..     107 

Strength  of  bridges 

58,  102,  111 

„       tools 

12 

„           chain  . . 

..     102 

„           cordage 

..      101 

Velocity  of  stream 

..       56 

wire     .. 

..     lOl 

Villages,  defence  of 

..       48 

„              „     rope 

..     lOl 

Suspension  bridges 

..      113 

Swuiging  bridge     . . 

..       66 

Waling        

..       21 

Walls,  defence  of  . . 

..        2Q 

Tackles 

107, 139 

demohtion  of         . .  90, 

118,  119 

„       power  of  . . 

..      107 

Warfare,  savage     . . 

..       46 

Tambour     . . 

. .      139 

Warping     . . 

..     m 

Tamping     . . 

78,  84,  88 

Water,  filtration  of 

..       72 

Tasks 

14 

„       supply 

..      70 

„      method  of  executing         . .       16 

,,           „       for  railways 

. .     133 

Tracing 

..        15 

„       weight  of  . . 

70,  ].04 

Telegraphs 

98,  133 

Wattle  and  daub  . . 

..      77 

144 


INDEX. 


PAGE 

T.\C,K 

Weapons,  rano:es  of 

8 

Wire  rope,  strength  of      , . 

. .     101 

Wells           

..71,72 

Wires,  earth 

..     134 

Willesden  canvas  . . 

..       24 

Withes        

19 

paper    .. 

..        22 

Woofls,  defence  of 

..       28 

Winch         

..      107 

Working  party  tabic 

.  .     120 

Wire  entanglements 

..       42 

„             „      detail  of  . . 

..   136a 

„    netting 

..       24 

„         parties,  detailing 

^       14 

(Wt.  11464     35,000    9  ]  05— fl  &  S     52S9) 


P.  04 
1027 


MILITARY  BOOKS,  published  by  Autkority—contmwfiA. 

IiA.W.     MILITARY.     Manual  of.     1899.     Price  25. 

MEDICAL  SERVICES.     ARMY.     Regulations  for.     1900.     Price  9(Z. 

MEDICAL  SERVICES.  ARMY.  Advisory  Beard  for.  Treatmcut  of 
Venereal  Diseases  and  Scabies.  First  Report.  Price  Is.  6rf.  Second  Eeport.  1905. 
Price  2s. 

MEDICAL  CORPS.     ARMY.     Manual.     1904.     Price  'dd. 

,,  EXTRACT  FROM.     Sec.  II.    DrUls  and  Exercises.     1903. 

Price  :id. 
REO-NS.  FOR  ADMISSION  TO.     May,  1902.     Price  Ic/, 

MEDICAL  CORPS  AND  aUEEN  ALEXANDRA'S  IMPERIAL 
MILITARY  NUESING  SEETICE.     Standing  Orders.     1903.    Price  l.*;. 

MEKOMETER.     Handbook.     1904.     Price  6c?. 

POSITION-FINDER.     Handbook.    1904.    VviceSd. 

RANGE-FINDER.      Depression.     Land  Service.     1904.     Price  4f?. 

RANGE-FINDING.  Field.  With  Watkin's  Field  Eange-fiuder  and  Tele- 
meter.   Handbook.     1903.    Price  6d. 

BASHFORTH  CHRONOGRAPH.  Report  on  Experiments  with. 
(1870.)    Price  Is. 

SADDLES  AND  COLLARS,  SORE  BACKS  AND  SORE 
SHOULDEES.  A  Manual  of.  By  Veterinary  Major  Fred.  Smith,  Army  Veterinary 
Department.     Third  Edition.     1897.    Price  is. 

SCOUTS.      Training-  and  Use  of.     Price  2c?. 

SETVAGE.     Practical  Treatment  of.     Price  6c/. 

SIGNALLING  REGULATIONS.     1904.     Price  9c?. 

DO.  Extract  from.     Semaphore  Signalling.     Price  Ic?. 

SMALL  ARMS.    Text  Book.     1904.     Price  2.s.  6c/. 

TELEGRAPHS  IN  WAR.     Regulations  for  Working-,     Price  Id. 

TELEGRAPHY.  Army.  Manual  of  Instruction  in  Field  Telegraphs. 
Price  3s. 

TELESCOPIC   SIGHTS.     Land  Service.     Handbook.     1904.     Price  Ad. 

TRACTOR  TRIALS  AT  ALDERSHOT,  1903.      Report  on.     Price  6d. 

TRANSPORT  MANUAL.  (Field  Service.)  Part  I.  1905.  (Provisional.) 
Price  4d. 

ROYAL  MILITARY  ACADEMY.  ADMISSION  TO.  Regns. 
respecting.    1904.     Price  Id. 

ROYAL  MILITARY  COLLEGE.     Ditto.     Price  Id. 

ROYAL  MILITARY  COLLEGE.  Syllabus  of  the  Course  of  Instruc- 
tion at.    1900.    Price  3c?. 

STAFF  COLLEGE.    Regulations  respecting  the.    1905.    Price  2c/. 

TERRITORIAL   REGIMENTS    OF    THE    BRITISH   ARMY.     Nos. 

1  to  67.    Short  Histories  of.    Price  Id.  each,  or  the  whole  bound  in  one  volume, 

price  5s. 
VETEilNABY     DEPARTMENT.      Admission  to.      Regns.      1905. 

Price  Id. 
MILITARY  EXAMINATION  PAPERS,  viz.  :— 

Entrance.    Nov.-Dec,  1904.    Price  Is. 

E.M.  Academy  (Fourth  Class)  and  E.M.  College  (Fourth  Division).  Dec,  1904. 
Price  Is. 

Staff  College.    Admission.    August,  1904.    Price  Is. 

Militia  and  Imperial  Yeomanry.  Competitive  and  Qualifying.  March,  1905. 
Price  Is. 

Foreign  Languages.    Modern.    Officers  of  the  Army.     Oct.,  1903.    Price  Is. 

Eegular  Forces,  Militia,  Yeoraamy,  and  Volunteers.    Nov.,  1904.    Price  Is. 

SCHOOLS.    ARMY:— 

Eegulations.    Iv03.     Price  4(Z. 

Inspectors  of,  &c.,  &e.    Standing  Orders  for.    1900.    Price  4d. 

Singing  in.     Eegns.  for  Teaching.     1901.     Price  Ic?. 

Technical  Terms  and  Words  of  Frequent  Occurrence  in  Army  Orders.  Lists  of. 
1904.     Price  2d. 

Type  Exercises  from  Eegimental  Orders  for  use  of  Candidates  for  3rd  Class  certifi- 
cates.   Price  '3d. 


3 


AFRICA,    BRITISH   EAST    PROTECTORATE,  AND   ZANZIBAR. 

Precis  of  Information  concerning.    1900.     Price  3s. 

CYPRUS.      CompUed  Toy  Captain  A.  R.  Saville,  IStli  Foot.     1878. 

Price  2s.  6rf. 

DUTCH   ARMY   (HOME    AND    COLONIAL).     Handbook    of    the. 

1896.    Price  9d. 

FRANCO-GERMAN  WAR,  1870-71.    Authorised  Translation  from 
the  German  Official  Account,  by  Major  F.  C.  H.  Clarke,  C.M.G.,  K.A. 

First  Vx-rt.— History  of  the  War  to  the  Downfall  of  the  Empire. 

Vol.  I.— Sects.  1  to  6.  Prom  the  Outbreak  of  Hostilities  to  the  Battle  of 
Gravelotte.    With  case  of  Maps  and  Plans.    Price  26s,  {Out  of  print.) 

Vol.  II.— Sects.  6  to  9.  From  the  Battle  of  Gravelotte  to  the  Downfall  of  the 
Empire.    With  case  of  Maps  and  Plans.    Price  22s.  (Out  of  print.) 

Second  Part. — History  of  the  War  against  the  Bepvblic. 

Vol.  I.— Sects.  10  to  1.3.  From  the  Investment  of  Paris  to  the  re-occupation  of 
Orleans  by  the  Germans.    With  case  of  Maps  and  Plans.    Price  26s. 

Vol.  II.— Sects.  14  to  18.  Events  in  Northern  France  from  the  end  of  November. 
In  the  North-Avest  from  the  beginning  of  December.  And  the  Siege  of 
Paris  from  the  commencement  of  December  to  the  Armistice,  The 
Operations  in  the  South-east  from  the  Middle  of  November  to  the  Middle 
of  January.    (1883.)    Price  26s, 

Vol.  III.— Sects.  19  and  20.*  Events  in  South-east  France  from  the  Middle  of 
.January  to  the  Termination  of  Hostilities.  Rearward  Communications. 
The  Armistice.  Homeward  March  and  Occupation.  Keirospect.  1884. 
Price  31s.  6(Z. 

Analytical  Index.    By  Colonel  Loksdale  Hat.k.    Price  1«.  &d. 

Section  Also  separately  in  paper  covers. 

1. — The  Events  in  July.    Price  3s. 

2. — Events  to  the  Eve  of  the  Battles  of  Worth  and  Spicheren.    Price  3s. 

3.— The  Battles  of  Worth  and  Spicheren,    1882,    Price  5s, 

4, — Advance  of  the  Third  Army  to  the  Moselle,  &c.    Second  Edition,    Eevised  and 

corrected.    With  1  Plan  and  7  Sketches.    Price  4s. 
5. — Operations  near  Metz  on  15th,  16th,  and  17th  August.     Battle  of  Vionville 

Mars-la-Tour.     Price  6s.  6ci. 
6.— The  Battle  of  Gravelotte— St.  Privat.    Price  5s.  {Out  of  print.) 

7.— Advance  against  the  Army  of  Chalons.    Price  6s. 

8.— The  Battle  of  Sedan.    Price  3s.  (Out  of  print.) 

9.— Proceedings  on  German  Coast  and  before  Fortresses  in  Alsace  and  Lorraine. 

General  Review  of  War  up  to  commencement  of  September.    Price  4s.  6d. 
10.— Investment  of  Paris.    Capture  of  Toul  and  Strassburg.    Price  6s. 
11.— Events  before  Paris  and  at  other  Points.    Price  5s.  3i/. 
12.— J.ast  Engagements  with  French  Army  of  Rhine.     1878.    Price  4s.  6rf. 
13.— Uccurrences  on  the  Theatre  of  War  in  Central  France  up  to  the  re-occupation 

of  Orleans  by  the  Germans.    (1880.)    Price  6s. 
14. — Measures  for  the  Investment  of  Paris.    Price  4s. 


WORKS  prepared  by  the  GeneroJ.  67a^— continued 


FRANCO-aERMAN  WAR,  1S70-11— continued. 
Section 
15.— Measures  for  Protecting  Investment  of  Paris.     (1880.)    Price  2s  6i 
16. — Proceedings  of  the  Second  Army.    Price  3s.  6rf. 
17.— Proceedings  of  the  First  Army.    Price  3s. 

18.— Occurrences  on  the  South-eastern  Theatre  of  War  up  to  the  Middle  of  January 
18/1.     Price  8s.  ' 

19.— Occurrences  on  the  South-east  Theatre  of  War.    Price  1.3s.  Crf. 
20.— General  Retrospect  of  the  War.    The  Eesults  of  the  War.    Price  5s 
Handbook.    1901.     Price  Is. 

Regms.     1900.     Price  6(f. 


Handbook.     Second  Edition. 


By  Major  J.  H.  V. 


FRENCH  ARMY. 

GERMAN  ARMY.    FIELD  SERVICE. 

GERMAN  ARMY  (Home  and  Colonial). 

Price  Is,  M. 

GERMAN  FIELD   ARTILLERY.      Drill  Regns. 

Crowe,  B.A.,  Staff  Captain.    Price  Is.  6d. 
GERMANY:    Campaign  of  1868  in.     Compiled  by  tlie  Department 

of  Military  History  of  the  Prussian  Staff.     Price  £1  Is. 
HOSTILITIES  WITHOUT  DECLARATION  OF  WAR.    ByBt  Lieut  - 

Colonel  J.  F.  Maurice.  E.M.    1883.    Price  2s. 
NILE      AND      COUNTRY      BETWEEN      DONGOLA,      SUAKIN 

KASSALA  AND  OMDURMAN.    Report  on  the.    1898.    Price  4s.  \hd.  * 

RECONNAISSANCE    IN   LITTLE    KNOWN   COUNTRIES.     Hints 

on.    By  Captain  C.  E.  Callwell,  E.A.,  Staff  Captain.    Price  Id. 
RHODESIA,  SOUTHERN.     Precis  of  Information  concerning.    Bv 

Major  C.  T.  Dawkiks,  C.M.G.    Jan.,  1899.    Price  2s. 
STAFF  DUTIES  IN  THE  FIELD.     1891.     Price  3«. 

SUDAN  ALMANAC.     1905.     Price  Is. 

A 

SUDAN  CAMPAIGN.  History  of.  In  Two  Parts,  with  case  of  Maps. 
By  Colonel  H.  E.  Colville,  C.B.,  Grenadier  Guards.    1390.    Price  15s. 

SUDAN.     Handbook  of  the.     Parti.    Geographical.    Part  IT.    Historical 

By  Captain  Count  Gleichen,  Grenadier  Guards,  D.A.A.G.    1898.    Price  2s, 
DITTO.    SUPPLEMENT.     July,  1899.     Price  2s.  6c/. 

SUDAN,    RED     SEA,    AND     EQUATOR.        REPORT     ON     THE 

EGYPTIAN  PROVINCES  OF  THE.    Ju  y.  1884.     Price  3s.  eic/. 

®^5Z.?J5  (GOVERNMENT)  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL   COUNTRIES. 

NOTES  ON.     1882.    Price  6s 

DITTO.  SUPPLEMENT  TO.  A  Guide  to  Recent  Lar-e  Scale  Maps, 
including  both  Surveys  and  Compilations,  together  with  a  List  of  Some  Large  Sheet 

c-rrV^i^^®^-    ^y  ^-  Knox,  M.A.    Price  .5s.  6d.  ^ 

SWEDEN  AND  NORWAY.     Handbook.     1901.     Price  Is.  ed. 

SWISS  ARMY.     Handbook.      1898.     Price  6c;. 

TACTICS.  MODERN.  Precis  of.  Orig-inally  Compiled  by  Colonel 
lb92     Pdce  4s"W?  ^^^^^  '■^^'^sed   and    re-written  by  Lt.-Colonel  Sisson  Pratt. 

^^±?^^.  J^KOTECTORATE.  Precis  of  Information  concerning. 
1902.    Price  5s.  (kl. 

VALPARAISO.     The  Capture  of,  in  1891.     Report  on.     Price  Is. 
'^^Hcetf  ^^    ON   A  MAP,   CONDUCT   OF.     Rules  for  the.    1899. 
WAR  ON  LAND.     LAWS  AND  CUSTOMS  OF.     Price  6d. 

ZULULAND.  Precis  of  Information  concerning.  With  Map.  1894. 
Pnce  4s.  ^ 


J